JP7698604B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable bodies that can be operated, and can perform movable body effects by moving the movable bodies while variable display of patterns is being performed.

Some gaming machines of this type can execute an initial action (long initial action) that causes the movable body to move in the same way as the performance action when the power is turned on or when the power is restored after a power outage (see, for example, Patent Document 1), or an initial action (short initial action) that causes the movable body to move by omitting some of the performance actions (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Also, as a step-up performance that changes the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in stages, some can execute a performance in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device is likened to glass, and after displaying a crack (a glass plate as an image that indicates a crack) on the display screen, multiple images of broken pieces are displayed as if the display screen had been broken (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2015-113217 A JP 2020-127593 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state in which a player can play a predetermined number of rounds of games advantageous to the player by executing a variable display,
A movable body,
A performance control means;
A movable body control means,
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control can be performed to operate the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance operation control in which the movable body is operated by an operation for informing that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing an ending effect after a final round of play is completed,
The movable body control means
If no power interruption occurs during the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means, the performance operation control for operating the movable body is not performed during the execution of the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs during the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control ends before the end of the execution period of the ending performance,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect for encouraging a player to perform an action during a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action promotion performance is notified.
The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a computer-implemented ...
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variable display before the start of a variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control is performed with the second operation control pattern during the execution of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the confirmation operation control is ended before the start of the second part,
The confirmation operation control can be executed when the action prompting performance is executed,
A predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed.
The predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image after displaying the crack precursor image,
As a background image after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance, any one of a plurality of background images including a first background image and a second background image suggesting a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first background image can be displayed;
Before displaying the fragment image in the predetermined performance, the object image in any one of a plurality of object images may be displayed;
According to the aspect of the object image, it is possible to suggest which background image will be displayed after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance.
It is characterized by the following.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention as well as features other than the invention-specific features.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display result designation command, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a game state background designation command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special pattern), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table (for the second special pattern), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. An explanatory diagram of types of jackpots. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing during small win release. A flowchart showing an example of a small hit end processing. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial operation control process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an origin placement control process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table. 11 is an explanatory diagram of control during an execution period of confirmation control and control during an execution period of post-confirmation operation control. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 1A shows a state in which the movable body on the board is located at the origin position, and FIG. FIG. 1A shows a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. FIG. 1A shows a state in which the frame-mounted movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows a state in which they are located at the performance position. A diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the performance control CPU. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the effects that can be executed during the variable display period of the SP reach, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed during a jackpot game state. A diagram showing an example of the operation of the pre-reading movable object announcement. A diagram showing an example of the start time notice operation. A diagram showing an example of the operation of movable object preview and pseudo consecutive preview. A figure showing an example of reach notice/button notice operation. A figure showing an example of the operation of SP reach notice. A diagram showing an example of the operation of a jackpot presentation. A figure showing an example of the operation of a jackpot performance (promotion performance). FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of state transition operation control. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 1A is a diagram for explaining the operation of a movable body, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the state of lights and sounds according to the operation of the movable body. 13A to 13J are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. This is a timing chart for when movable body preview is performed after initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a start-up win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a start-up win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for when movable body preview is performed after initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice after initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting the look-ahead movable body notice during initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation, and a variable 2 display that executes a movable object preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs after an initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart showing a case where the movable body moves to the performance position as an initial operation, and a case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as an initial operation. As a performance action of the moving object notice, the moving object may move to the performance position, or as a performance action of the moving object notice, the moving object may move to the performance position. This is a timing chart for a movable body preview when the movable body stops halfway from the origin position to the performance position as an initial operation. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation due to a cold start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart of a demonstration performance when a movable body stops halfway from the origin position to the performance position during initial operation. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a jackpot fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare performance. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when operation confirmation control is executed for a fanfare performance. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A figure showing an example of the operation of operation confirmation control as a modified example when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round of play in which a promotion effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being subsequently turned on. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-consecutive announcement is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power interruption occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being subsequently turned on. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on subsequently. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being subsequently turned on. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of an initial operation due to a cold start. 1 is a timing chart showing an initial operation based on a cold start, and a timing chart showing an initial operation based on a hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 4 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between an initialization notification image and an operation confirmation control. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between an initialization notification image and an operation confirmation control. 13A to 13D are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing examples of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when an error occurs in the operation confirmation control. 1 is a front view showing an gaming machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state or the special state. 13A to 13F are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a random number value when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing variable categories. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram of whether or not a pending display effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram of a determination ratio for whether or not to execute a continuous breaking effect in a normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a dialogue preview performance setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a dialogue preview performance is executed in the normal state and the performance pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a background change is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio of the background change presentation, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a reach suggestion presentation is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in presentation is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the normal state and the performance patterns of the broken effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the normal state and the performance patterns of the broken effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the time-saving state and the special state, and the performance patterns of the breaking effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach β. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach β. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the first consecutive break effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the second consecutive breaking performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a dialogue preview performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change presentation B. A figure showing details of some examples of the operation of pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a reach suggestion performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a reach suggestion performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a weak development performance. A figure showing details of a part of an example of the operation of strong development performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of strong development performance B. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of strong development performance B. A figure showing details of an example of a cut-in performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a jackpot. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a jackpot. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a miss. This is an explanatory diagram for comparing the details of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram for comparing the details of each performance. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the dialogue preview performance. 13 is a timing chart showing details of background change performance A. 13 is a timing chart showing details of background change performance B. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart showing details of the reach suggestion performance. This is a timing chart showing details of the weak development performance. This is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance A. This is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance B. 13 is a timing chart showing details of a cut-in effect. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the result notification presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the speed change of fragment images in each performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a crack pattern in a crack effect. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing display examples of each crack pattern. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in a crack pattern G. FIG. 13A shows a pseudo consecutive effect, and FIG. 13B shows a fragment image displayed in a cut-in effect. (A) shows a fragment image displayed in background change performance A, and (B) shows a fragment image displayed in strong development performance B. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a second modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example 3 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a fourth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example 5 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a sixth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a seventh modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an eighth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a ninth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a ninth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a tenth modified example of the present invention.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic portion 132SG form)
[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a movable body performance using the movable body during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a part in which a movable body announcement in which the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down can be executed),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, a portion where an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the movement of the on-board movable body 32A),
The sound output means can output a movable body performance sound corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, in the movable body preview shown in FIG. 49, a part where performance sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position).
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is performed at the time of power-on accompanied by initialization, when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the output of the performance movable control and the movable body performance sound is limited, while the display of the effect display is performed, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, at least the performance movable control and the display of the effect display are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 are activated). When a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of 01, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of a movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L, 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 61, after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up winning occurs, and when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the effect display 132SG407 are displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction.
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the specified period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed when the power is turned on without initialization, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output, and when the movable body performance is executed after the specified period, the performance movable control, the effect display is displayed, and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, during the initial operation period of these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, When a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 and a movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 65, after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs, and when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the output of a movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction are performed during the execution period of the movable body prediction.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed with a variable display started during confirmation movable control, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate to the player that a movable body presentation has been executed by outputting an effect display or a movable body presentation sound, while preventing the presentation movable control from interfering with the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is,
The expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the movable body performance is executed than when it is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, the portion where the expectation of a jackpot is set higher when the movable body forecast is executed than when the movable body forecast is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that was started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period, the performance movable control and the output of the movable body performance sound are restricted, and after the specified period ends, the performance movable control restricted to the specified period is performed, while the movable body performance sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, In addition, when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of the movable body prediction sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body prediction are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again, but the output of the movable body prediction sound in response to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R is not executed.
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period, the performance movable control is restricted, and after the specified period ends, the performance movable control restricted during the specified period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, When a start winning occurs, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the presentation effect is not reduced due to the presentation movable control remaining restricted in a movable body presentation that has a high expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is,
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means, when powered on, is capable of performing the confirmation movement control to move the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 ),
The confirmation movement control ends based on the completion of the movement of the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the initial movements of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are the parts that end last when the initial movement of the below-board movable body 32B is completed).
The movable body performance is a performance using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable body notice is a performance that operates the on-board movable body 32A),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the specified period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the performance movement control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period, and the performance movement control restricted during the specified period is executed when the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame-up movable body 631B, the frame-up movable body 631C, the frame-up movable body 631D, the frame-up movable body 631E, the frame-up movable body 631F, the frame-up movable body 631G, the frame-up movable body 631H ... When a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the movable body 132SG101, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial operation of the under-board movable body 32B is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which performance movement control is executed using the first movable body when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed, thereby preventing the confirmation movement control from becoming indistinguishable from the performance movement control.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing an initialization notification corresponding to the initialization when power is turned on with initialization (for example, as shown in Figs. 61 and 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the presentation control means causes the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and outputs an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the confirmation movable control overlaps with the execution period of the initialization notification (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the period during which the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the upper-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the period during which the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R are longer than the initial operation periods of the upper-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101).
After the execution period of the confirmation movable control ends, when the movable body performance is executed with the variable display started during the execution period of the initialization notification, when the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification, the performance movable control and the display of the effect display are performed, while the output of the movable body performance sound is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, even if the variable display that executes the movable body announcement is started during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, if the execution period of the movable body announcement is after the end of the operation of each movable body, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are executed during the execution period of the movable body announcement, but the light emission in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the initialization response notification, if the confirmation movement control has ended, the performance movement control is executed, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not reduce the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is
The performance control means is capable of executing a pre-reading movable body performance that suggests that the movable body performance will be executed in a variable display prior to a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern in which the movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading movable body notice),
The movable body control means is capable of performing specific performance movement control to move the movable body by a specific action when the pre-reading movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A to move up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position as a pre-reading movable body notice),
The execution period of the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body performance is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special chart change time of the non-reach miss variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the period of the initial operation is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, if the start condition is satisfied multiple times during the specified period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the pre-reading movable body performance is executed in a variable display that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition, when the pre-reading movable body performance is executed during the specified period, the specific movable control is restricted,
When the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body performance is executed during the specified period ends, the specific movable control limited to the specified period is not executed after the specified period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, and the execution of the pre-reading movable body announcement is decided due to the occurrence of multiple variable displays during the confirmation operation of each movable body as the initial operation control, if the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each movable body or the period of the initial operation control, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement, and the presentation operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the pre-reading movable body announcement is not executed again after the variable display ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display is crossed, the restricted specific movable control is not executed during the confirmation movable control, so that a gaming machine can be provided that does not confuse the player by excessively moving the movable body after the confirmation movable control ends.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing, in one variable display, as the movable body presentation, a first movable body presentation (e.g., the first movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69 ) and a second movable body presentation (e.g., the second movable body announcement shown in FIG. 69 ) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body presentation,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, a first performance movement control (for example, a part in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) can be performed to move the movable body by a first predetermined operation.
When the second movable body performance is executed, a second performance movement control (for example, a part in which the board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) can be performed to move the movable body by a second predetermined operation.
When the power is turned on, in the case where the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in one variable display started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is restricted, and after the end of the predetermined period, the first performance movable control restricted during the predetermined period is executed,
If the second movable body performance is executed before the restricted first performance movable control is performed, the first performance movable control is not performed and the second performance movable control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69, if the initial operation of the movable body has already been performed during the execution period of the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is executed after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, but if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview has already been executed before the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is not executed and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is continued).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of a movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of a movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is,
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, a portion in which the above-board movable body 32A is provided with an above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with a below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g).
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the second movable body by a special operation for notifying that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a deciding performance in which the under-board movable body 32B is raised),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the underboard movable body 32B is in an initial operation).
It is possible to perform special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E5), the performance control CPU 120 controls the underboard movable body 9e to emit a predetermined light color (for example, a portion that emits light in a rainbow flash as shown in FIG. 56 (B9)) when the underboard movable body 32B rises).
When the special performance movable control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, when the execution period of the deciding performance is entered during the initial operation of each movable body after a hot start, the part that limits the light emission (rainbow flash) of the under-board movable body LED9e in a mode corresponding to the deciding performance during the execution period of the deciding performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is
The operation mode of the second movable body by the confirmation movement control and the operation mode of the second movable body by the special performance movement control are common (for example, the initial operation and the performance operation of the under-board movable body 32B are both operations between the origin position and the performance position),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B) and FIG. 61, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body LED 9e to emit light in an initial highlight mode (flashing red)).
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the special effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B) , the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body LED 9e to flash in rainbows when the underboard movable body 32B advances, and causes the underboard movable body LED 9e to emit light in a smooth rainbow when the underboard movable body 32B moves in a contrasting manner).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movable control or special movable control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-board movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 operates the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then operates the below-board movable body 32B as shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 ).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the underboard movable body 32B is in an initial operation),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, during the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the on-board movable body LED 9d is caused to emit light in an initial highlighting mode and the below-board movable body LED 9e is caused to emit light in an initialization notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position);
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not located at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin placement control process shown in FIG. 30 ).
When the variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427 from the timing when the variable display is started).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the return control is restricted (for example, if a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the variable display based on the start winning is started, the initial operation of each movable body is executed with priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position);
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not located at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin placement control process shown in FIG. 30 ).
When the variable display ends and the game is in a standby state, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427 from the start timing of the customer waiting demo performance).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the variable display ends during the predetermined period and the game is put into the waiting state, the return control is restricted (for example, if a customer waiting demo performance is started in response to the end of the variable display, a portion that prioritizes the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body over the movement of each movable body to its origin position);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-12 is
The performance control means is capable of executing the movable body performance a plurality of times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, a portion in which a first variable display notice and a second variable display notice are executed during one variable display),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that was started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the variable display is executed during the initial operation of each movable body, if a first movable body announcement is executed during the initial operation, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed).
When one of the movable body performances executed multiple times in one variable display is executed, and the movement of the movable body by the performance movement control corresponding to the one movable body performance does not end normally, when the next movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control corresponding to the next movable body performance is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 71, even if the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, when the execution period of the second movable body preview is reached, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that, even if the performance movable control corresponding to one movable body performance does not end normally, allows for a retry by the performance movable control corresponding to the next movable body performance.

The gaming machine of form 1-13 is
The performance control means is capable of executing, as the movable body performance, a first movable body performance (e.g., a first movable body announcement) and a second movable body performance (e.g., a second movable body announcement) which is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a first performance movement control that moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a first movable body notice),
When the second movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a second performance movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined operation (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a second movable body notice),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in a variable display that is started during a specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the specified period, the first performance movable control is restricted, and after the specified period ends, the first performance movable control restricted during the specified period is executed (for example, when the execution period of the first movable body announcement occurs during the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed during the execution period of the first movable body announcement, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is executed again after the initial operation of each movable body).
In the case where the first movable body is moving due to the limited first performance movement control, when the second movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is interrupted and the second performance movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the execution period of the second movable body announcement occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement in the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of a movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of a movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position);
A first detection means (e.g., origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is placed at an initial position;
Further comprising a second detection means (e.g., performance position sensor 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is disposed in the advanced position;
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body toward the advanced position over a first period based on the detection by the first detection means that the movable body is placed at the initial position, and for moving the movable body toward the initial position when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body is placed at the advanced position during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that moves the movable body toward the origin position when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the first period).
The performance movement control is a control for moving the movable body toward the advanced position over a second period, and stopping the movable body when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advanced position during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that stops the operation of the movable body when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the second period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed during play, even if the movement of the movable body corresponding to the movable body presentation is not performed normally, the movement of the movable body based on the confirmation movement control is not performed, so a gaming machine can be provided that can reduce the decrease in the presentation effect of a movable body presentation that was not executed normally.

The gaming machine of form 1-15 is
The movable body control means
If the movable body cannot operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly executes the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control for moving the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)).
In the case where the error movement control is performed, when the movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, in the movable body performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the sound output corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The performance control means is capable of performing demo display control for displaying a demonstration display on the display means when the power is turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 76, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 displays a customer waiting demo performance on the image display device 5).
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control is terminated before the demo display control is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 76 to 78, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started after a power outage, the customer waiting demo performance is displayed after the initial operation control of each movable body is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered by movable bodies operated by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movable control for a predetermined period of time (for example, the performance control CPU 120 requires 30 seconds for the initial operation of each movable body),
The performance control means is capable of performing the demo display control after a period of at least the same length as the predetermined period has elapsed since the confirmation movement control was ended (for example, a part in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed 30 seconds after the initial operation of each movable body is ended),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered by displaying the demonstration display immediately after confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 2-3 is,
The performance control means can perform the demo display control at different timings depending on whether the power is turned on with initialization or not (for example, the period from the end of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started up by a cold start or a hot start).
The movable body control means
The confirmation movement control can be performed in common when power is turned on with initialization and when power is supplied without initialization (for example, the period from the end of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed is different when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up by a cold start and when it is started up by a hot start).
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is terminated before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means;
When power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is terminated before the demo display control is performed by the performance control means (for example, even if the period from the end of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs between when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered by the movable body operating by the confirmation movable control, whether the power is turned on with initialization or without initialization.

The gaming machine of form 2-4 is,
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
and an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, a portion in which the above-board movable body 32A is provided with an above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with a below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light amount adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, and the light amount (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the underboard movable body 32B is in an initial operation),
When the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emitting means emitting light by the specific light emission control is restricted so that the brightness is not based on the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) , when the initial operation of each movable body is performed, the light amount (brightness) of each lamp 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control is not changed, so that a gaming machine can be provided in which there is no hindrance to confirming the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 2-5 is,
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
and an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, a portion in which the above-board movable body 32A is provided with an above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with a below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light amount adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, and the light amount (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The performance control means is capable of displaying a changeable display suggesting that the luminance of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a portion in the image display device 5 where a menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed),
The display of the changeable display is restricted during the specified period, and the display of the changeable display is performed after the specified period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, during the initial operation of each movable body, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed on the image display device 5, and during the initial operation of each movable body, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a changeable display during confirmation movable control, a gaming machine can be provided in which attention to the confirmation movable control is not lost.

The gaming machine of form 2-6 is,
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
Light-emitting means (e.g., frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the performance control CPU 120 moves the board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then moves the board movable body 32B).
The light emission control means is capable of performing specific light emission control for causing the light emission means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the underboard movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 56(B)) when the underboard movable body 32B is in an initial operation).
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control by the light emission control means is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A is performed, the below-board movable body LED 9e is not illuminated in the initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 2-7 is,
The performance control means includes:
A movable body performance using the movable body can be executed during the demonstration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a part capable of executing a performance in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the performance position during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a portion where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a demo-in-motion control that moves the movable body in a common motion manner with the motion manner of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation motion control (for example, a portion in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved from the origin position toward the performance position, and then the on-board movable body 32A is moved from the performance position to the origin position).
If the movable body cannot operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly executes the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control for moving the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)).
In the case where the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the customer waiting demo performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 in the image display device 5, and the illumination in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the demonstration display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before being controlled to play the round of games,
The fanfare performance is as follows:
An introduction part (for example, an introduction part. See FIG. 52 (F2) to (F6)) that notifies the user of the advantageous state;
A launch direction notification part (for example, a right-hit notification part; see FIG. 52 (F7) to (F8)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the player of the launch direction of the game medium;
It is composed of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the launch direction notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare performance (right hit notification part) involving the operation of the on-board movable body 32A starts. See FIG. 80).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare performance is not hindered by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is,
There are several types of advantageous states (for example, big wins A to E),
In the introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the multiple types of advantageous states is the advantageous state, and as the notification, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (e.g., jackpot type display 132SG421) corresponding to the advantageous state being controlled, and to display an introduction display before the advantageous state name display (e.g., introduction display before the jackpot type display 132SG422) before the advantageous state name display is displayed,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so as to end an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the advantageous state name display is displayed (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the part in which the initial operation ends before the big win type display 132SG421 is displayed in FIG. 52 (F6)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to know which advantageous state the game will be controlled to, even if confirmation movable control is performed during a fanfare presentation.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance, by using specific light emission control and fanfare light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 3-4 is,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, when the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light emission control means causes the light emission means of the first movable body to emit light by the specific light emission control, while causing the light emission means of the second movable body to emit light by the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moved, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare presentation.

The gaming machine of form 3-5 is,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the fanfare performance is executed, light emission control may be performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light at a first luminance in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed, it is possible to perform light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light at a second luminance in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first luminance in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance, during the operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second luminance (low luminance) lower than the first luminance (high luminance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 3-6 is,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
the movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlighting mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 3-7 is,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control for moving the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the special effect movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white lighting) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the performance operation control can emit light in different light emission modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movable control or special movable control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-8 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the launch direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movable control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the launch direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movable control (for example, in the movable body performance, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the right hit notification part which is different from the initial highlight mode (white lighting) and the sound output is limited when the movable body moves by the initial operation, and in the movable body performance executed in the right hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right hit notification part is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 3-9 is
Further comprising a display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
The performance control means includes:
In the launch direction notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 52 (F7)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movement control to move the movable body by a special action,
If the confirmation movement control is not normally completed within a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control is performed again.
When the confirmation movement control is performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special performance movement control is restricted while the effect display is displayed (for example, when executing a movable body performance in the right hit notification part in a fanfare performance, it is possible to operate the movable body by a special action and display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance, and if the action confirmation control cannot be normally completed over a specific period, it is possible to determine that an action error has occurred and perform the action confirmation control again, and when the action confirmation control is performed over a specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special action is restricted while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can show the player that a movable body performance has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special performance movable control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect before being controlled to play the round during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control ends before the end of the execution period of the fanfare performance (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, the operation confirmation control ends before the round performance corresponding to the round game starts. See FIG. 81).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the power consumption when the power is turned on is reduced to reduce the load on the gaming machine, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.Furthermore, when the power is cut off simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare performance, thereby providing a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy an advantageous state without having to worry about the movable body operating due to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on, and when a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
the light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery for causing the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 4-3 is,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery for causing the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves due to the performance movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 4-4 is,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance;
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the fanfare light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 4-5 is,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance.
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music during a big win)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a fanfare performance was in progress before the power was cut off.

The gaming machine of form 4-6 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the performance movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the performance operation control (for example, the win/lose button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before being controlled to play the round of games,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control is ended before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to end the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 82).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movable body from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off just before the fanfare performance ends, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on ends before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare presentation has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, consecutive win number/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see Figures 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is,
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a round of play after the fanfare presentation has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompting display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball count display 132SG452, ball count display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on after that, it is possible to perform a round-time light emission control in which the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is caused to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to a round of play by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during the big win. See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that, through specific light emission control, can draw attention to a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during a round of play.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is as follows:
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a round-time light emission control in which the light-emitting means of the movable body emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play.
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emitting control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the round light emitting control (for example, when the first movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during a round of play.

The gaming machine of form 5-6 is,
The light emission control means
In a round of play after the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light by the light emission control during the round.
The light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, has a lower brightness than the light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare performance (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to a music piece during a jackpot (round performance) in a round game in which a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the pachinko game machine 1 does not start up with a hot start may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to a music piece during a jackpot (round performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 5-7 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the performance movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the performance operation control (for example, the win/lose button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs at the same time as the easy-entry state is entered and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control is ended before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to end the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 85).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movable body from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off as soon as the variable means enters an easy-to-enter state, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power interruption occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on;
the light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery for causing the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power interruption occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, a portion capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is,
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, over a period from when the variable means is controlled from the easy-to-enter state to when the game medium is not allowed to enter,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display. See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that can be moved by confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 6-4 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period of time, it is possible to perform a round-time light emission control in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emission control during the recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the round (for example, during the power outage recovery, a part that may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 6-5 is as follows:
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during control of the variable means to set the variable means to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is in the easy-entry state for a specified period of time, it is possible to perform a round-time light emission control in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round performance (music during the jackpot). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on, even if a round of play was in progress before the power outage.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the easy-entry state in one round of play ends and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the easy-entry state in the next round of play ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period of the large prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play ends (see FIG. 52 (F10)). See FIG. 86).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movement of the movable body from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the confirmation movement control in the case where the power is cut off just before the end of one round of play and the power is turned on is terminated before the end of the next round of play, allowing the player to continue playing a round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare presentation has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, consecutive win number/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see Figures 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 7-3 is as follows:
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a next round of play that is started when the one round of play is ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-4 is as follows:
When a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state of the variable means in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the variable means in one round of play to be in the impossible-entry state, and then moves the movable body through the confirmation movement control (see FIG. 86 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 7-5 is as follows:
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the performance movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the performance operation control (for example, the win/lose button performance), they emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, the advance operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) is performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally;
When informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a winning/losing button performance or a promotion performance) is performed to move the movable body by an action for informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs at the same time as the control is made to the no-entry state in one round of play and then the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the no-entry state ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)). See FIG. 87).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movable body from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm its operation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the confirmation movement control in the case where the variable means becomes unable to enter during one round of play and the power is cut off at the same time and the power is turned on is terminated before the next round of play ends, allowing the player to continue playing a round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and the power is then turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery for causing the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power interruption occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state and the power is then turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and the power is then turned on (for example, a portion capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 8-3 is
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is provided,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and when the power is subsequently turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display during the period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play;
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display. See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that can be moved by confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 8-4 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means includes:
In the case where the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state during one round of play and a power outage occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform interval light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance during the execution period of the interval performance,
When a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to a recovery display during the period from the end of the one round of play to the start of the next round of play;
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the interval (for example, during power outage recovery, a part that may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 8-5 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means includes:
In the one round of play, when the variable means is controlled to the inaccessible state and a power outage occurs at the same time, and when the power is turned on after the power outage occurs, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform interval light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance during the execution period of the interval performance,
When a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to a recovery display during the period from the end of the one round of play to the start of the next round of play;
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance (for example, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the interval performance (music during a big win)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 8-6 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to end an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation is not hindered by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-7 is
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body performance when the movable body is moved by the special performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance using the under-board movable body 32B can be executed as a promotion performance in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and when the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance operation control in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates by the operation confirmation control, and a part in which sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates by the operation confirmation control, and a sound corresponding to the movable body performance is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 8-8 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect for informing whether or not the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means includes:
In the result notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 53 (F24)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control is not normally completed within a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control is performed again.
When a power outage occurs immediately before the control to the inaccessible state is performed in the one round game in which the interval performance is performed, and the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
When the movable body performance is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special performance movement control is restricted while the effect display is displayed (for example, when the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the operation confirmation control again, and when a power outage occurs just before the large prize winning port is controlled to a closed state in one round game in which the interval performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and when the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance is restricted while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can show the player that a movable body performance has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special performance movable control.

The gaming machine of form 8-9 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body movable by the performance movement control emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, an advance operation period) in the performance operation control (for example, in the case of successful promotion of the promotion performance), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, a retreat operation period). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The presentation control means is capable of executing a notification presentation (e.g., a promotion presentation) for notifying a player of which advantageous state the player is in during a specific round of play in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state;
The notification performance is
An introduction part (see, for example, FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see, for example, (F24) to (F29) of FIG. 53) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
When the first advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
When the second advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round game and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round game starts. See FIG. 89).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification performance is not hindered by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare presentation has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, consecutive win number/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see Figures 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the specific round of play, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area;
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 9-4 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the notification performance is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the notification performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during a notification performance by using specific light-emitting control and notification light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-5 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification performance;
The light emission control means causes the light emission means of the movable body to emit light by the specific light emission control when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moved by the movement confirmation control, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) instead of a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-6 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification performance,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light by the notification light emission control.
The notification light emission control performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on has a lower brightness than the notification light emission control performed when no power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play (for example, during the second round interval period or the third round of play, the operation confirmation control is started, and the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but the portions that are illuminated at a lower brightness than when illuminated in the performance operation control (promotion performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-7 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing a motion promotion presentation for encouraging a player to perform a motion during the execution period of the notification presentation (see FIG. 53 (F23)),
The action prompting performance is executed in the introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)),
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the introduction part starts (for example, the operation prompting part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, that is, the part where the initial operation of the movable body ends before the operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action promotion presentation in the introduction part is not hindered by the movable body that operates according to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-8 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, to emit light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body performance when the movable body is moved by the special performance movement control (for example, when performing an initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, an initial highlighting manner; white lighting), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited, and when performing a performance in a promotion performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) (for example, a rainbow manner, etc.), while a sound effect in a manner corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that makes it easy to determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-9 is
The performance control means includes:
In the result notification part, a movable body performance using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control is not normally completed within a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control is performed again.
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game, and the confirmation movement control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
When the movable body performance is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special performance movement control is restricted while the effect display is displayed (for example, when the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the operation confirmation control again, and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which the promotion performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and when the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance is restricted while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can show the player that a movable body performance has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special performance movable control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, is capable of performing a round game multiple times by setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The presentation control means can execute an ending presentation after the final round of play is completed (see FIG. 52 (F12) to (F14)).
The ending performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Fig. 52 (F12) and Fig. 53 (F31)),
A special state notification part (for example, a time-saving state notification part. See FIG. 52 (F13), FIG. 53 (F32), (F34)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies about a special state controlled after the advantageous state;
It is composed of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movable control ends before the special state notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the 10th final round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see FIG. 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information on the time-saving state is notified starts in the ending period. See FIG. 90).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special state notification part in the ending performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, an ending light emission control can be performed in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control is made to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during an ending performance by using specific light-emitting control and ending light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance;
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, when the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light-emitting control means causes the light-emitting means of the first movable body to emit light by the specific light-emitting control, while the light-emitting means of the second movable body to emit light by the ending light-emitting control (for example, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-under movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body performing the initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during an ending presentation.

The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is further provided,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the ending performance is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the ending light emission control.
The ending light emission control performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on has a lower brightness than the ending light emission control performed when no power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the ending performance (for example, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g that perform the initial operation are illuminated at a low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) instead of a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) in which the movable body is moved by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the performance movement control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs the initial operation are illuminated in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but are illuminated at a lower luminance than when illuminated in the performance operation control. See FIG. 56 (B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, is capable of performing a round game multiple times by setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing an ending effect after a final round of play is completed,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the execution period of the ending performance (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see FIG. 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information on the time-saving state is notified starts in the ending period. See FIG. 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the load on the gaming machine by reducing power consumption when the power is turned on, cuts off the power at the same time as the ending performance is executed, and terminates the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on within the execution period of the ending performance (allowing the player to enjoy the high base state without worrying about the moving body operated by the confirmation movement control).

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power failure occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on, and when a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
the light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery for causing the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in a case where a power failure occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on, and in a case where a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on (for example, a portion capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power interruption occurs during a variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power interruption occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control for causing the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display. See FIG. 56(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that can be moved by confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 11-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance during the execution period of the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance;
The light emission control during the recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the ending light emission control (for example, during the power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 11-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (e.g., a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform ending light emission control for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance during the execution period of the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance;
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the ending performance (ending introduction). See FIG. 56 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on, even if an ending presentation was in progress before the power failure.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The specific identification information includes first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
the normal state is a state in which the variable display of the first identification information is easily performed,
the special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is easily performed,
During the special state, information regarding the advantageous state (e.g., consecutive number of times/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) can be displayed in the first display area of the display means;
During the special state, the second display area of the display means can display hold information (e.g., a second hold memory number or a second hold display 132SG002) related to the variable display of the second identification information,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the first display area with respect to the second display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when the power is started by hot start after a power outage occurs during time reduction and then restored, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display related to the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454). See FIG. 92).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as that of the first display area.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is
The information relating to the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while the reserved information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (for example, the consecutive number of times/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, while the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 are parts whose display mode can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings or pre-reading notices, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of pending information, which may change due to a movable body operated by confirmation movable control, is not hindered as much as information regarding an advantageous state, which does not change.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is
The range in which the movable body movable by the confirmation movable control overlaps with the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body movable by the confirmation movable control overlaps with the second display area (for example, the range in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with the display area of the consecutive number of wins/total number of balls displayed 132SG454 by the initial operation is larger than the range in which the movable body 32A on the board overlaps with the display area 5SL of the second reserved memory number and the second reserved display area 132SG012 of the second reserved display 132SG002 by the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as that of the first display area.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect for encouraging a player to perform an action during a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part (for example, the period from (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 50) until the action promotion performance is executed;
A second part (for example, a result notification part of FIG. 50 (D6) and (D7)) that is executed after the first part and notifies the result of the action promotion performance;
The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a computer-implemented ...
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific variable display and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the second part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the button notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 94).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the action promotion presentation is not obstructed by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command that designates execution of a button advance notice, etc.) to the performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of performing the action promotion performance based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific variation and the power is then turned on (for example, when a variation pattern designation command designating a specific variation pattern (with button advance notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the means may interrupt the initial operation being performed (about 20 seconds) and switch to a shortened initial operation having a shorter operation period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial operation being performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movable control that takes into consideration the onset of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The performance control means is capable of executing a start performance (e.g., a start notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started,
The start performance is as follows:
An introduction part (see FIG. 48 (B2) to (B6)),
A result notification part (see FIG. 48 (B3a) to (B6a)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the start notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 95).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result-announcement part in the start-up performance is not impeded by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command designating execution of a start notice) to the performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of performing the start performance based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power interruption occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and the power is then turned on (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation ends before the notification part is started as a result of the start-time notice),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movable control that takes into consideration the onset of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The performance control means is capable of performing a variable display of the identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and is capable of performing a variable display notification performance (e.g., a pseudo consecutive announcement) that notifies the user that the variable display of the identification information will be performed after the variable display of the identification information is temporarily stopped.
The reconfigurable display notification performance is
An introduction part (see (C3) to (C5) of FIG. 49) inviting the user to decide whether or not the re-variable display of the identification information is to be executed;
A result notification part (see (C6), (C10), and (C9) of FIG. 49) which is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It is composed of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the variable display of the identification information based on the specific variable display pattern starts and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 96).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification performance is not impeded by a movable body that operates according to confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command designating execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) to the performance control means;
The presentation control means is capable of performing the re-variable display notification presentation (e.g., a pseudo consecutive announcement) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power interruption occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that may be configured to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation ends before the notification part is started as a result of the pseudo consecutive announcement based on a specific performance control command by the performance control CPU 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movable control that takes into consideration the onset of a specific fluctuation.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The normal state is a state designed to launch the game medium to the first game area (e.g., the left game area),
The special state is a state designed to launch the gaming medium to the second gaming area (e.g., the right gaming area),
The display means is capable of displaying a first game area side launch promotion display (e.g., a left hit promotion display 132SG530) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) in the normal state, which urges the player to launch the game medium toward the first game area, and is also capable of displaying a display corresponding to the normal state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, and then the initial operation is performed when the power is started up by a hot start and restored, the part is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps the left hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. See Figures 97 and 98).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not hindered by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power interruption occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on,
When the recovery display is displayed, it is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left hit promotion display 132SG530).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the launch direction of the gaming medium even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display a first game area promotion notification display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) and output a first game area promotion notification sound.
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, while the output of the first game area promotion notification sound is limited;
When the confirmation movement control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output (for example, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is restricted, and when the operation confirmation control is performed based on starting up with a hot start after a power outage occurs, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an appropriate first game area promotion notification taking into consideration the situation when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 16-4 is
In the normal state, when a gaming medium enters a predetermined area (e.g., a passing gate 41, etc.) provided on the second gaming area side, it is possible to perform the first gaming area promotion notification (e.g., a left hit promotion display 132SG530),
It is possible to perform a special first game area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification based on the fact that a specific number of game media have entered the predetermined area in the normal state,
The confirmation movement control makes it possible to perform the special first game area promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is movable (for example, a special left-hit operation promotion notification having a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification can be performed based on the entry of a specific number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) into the gate switch 21 in a normal state, and the operation confirmation control makes it possible to perform a special left-hit operation promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is operating (e.g., 20 seconds)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the special first game area promotion notification is not hindered by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The display means is
If a power outage occurs during the round game and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) in a predetermined display area.
Thereafter, in the predetermined display area, it is possible to display displays corresponding to the round of play (for example, the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.).
When displaying either the display corresponding to the round game or the display during recovery, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompting display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in a specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot game state, and then the power is started with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap the front side of the right hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front side of a predetermined area (see FIG. 83(A)) in which information corresponding to the round game (for example, the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the ball number display 132SG453, the consecutive number of balls/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. See FIG. 99 and FIG. 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the predetermined movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movable control (for example, after a power interruption occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation at the time of power-on is performed in an operation manner that includes a performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompting display 132SG430, while after a power interruption occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in a time-saving state, the initial operation at the time of power-on is performed in an operation manner that does not include a performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right-hit prompting display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
The display means includes:
If a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510).
As the display during recovery, text information indicating that recovery is in progress can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
Along with the recovery display, it is possible to display a launch direction indication display (for example, right-hit prompting display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round play in a jackpot game state and then the game is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A does not overlap the front side of the right hit prompting display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. See Figs. 99 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body operated by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the text information indicating that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined performance movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined performance movable control (for example, after a power interruption occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power interruption occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in a time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control for moving the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the special movement control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
the confirmation movement control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner including the special action in the special movement control,
The time that the movable body moved by the special movement control stays in the specified display area is longer than the time that the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control performed when a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on (for example, the time that the under-board movable body 32B stays in the performance position overlapping the recovery display 132SG510 may be set to be shorter than the performance operation of the movable body performance in the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a power outage occurs during an advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control that is performed is not superimposed on a specified display area for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not interfere with determining whether or not recovery is in progress.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The display means is
If a power outage occurs during the special state and the power is then turned on, a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area;
Thereafter, a display corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the predetermined display area,
When displaying either the display corresponding to the special state or the display during recovery, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompting display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in a specific display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during variable display in a time-saving state, and then the power is started with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is not overlapped on the front side of the specific area (see FIG. 101(A)) in which the right hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed, rather than being overlapped on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIG. 101(B)(C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the time-saving remaining display 132SG201, the consecutive number of balls/total number of balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. See FIG. 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which is a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control and has a large impact on gameplay, is not obstructed as much as the recovery in progress display.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined performance movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined performance movable control (for example, the initial operation is performed in an operation manner that includes the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompting display 132SG430, while the initial operation at the time of power-on after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during variable display in the time-saving state is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right hit prompting display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A movable body,
A movable body control means;
A display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
the display means is capable of displaying, in the special state, a launch direction indication display indicating a launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and displaying information relating to the advantageous state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area with respect to the predetermined display area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game using a movable body operated by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the visibility of information regarding advantageous states.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined performance movement control for moving the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined performance movable control.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of a specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that is movable by confirmation movable control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information light emission control to indicate the result of the variable display of the specific identification information by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 is a part that can light up a plurality of lamps constituting a special pattern in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has begun through the startup preparation display, and a gaming machine can be provided that allows the specific identification light-emitting control, which has a large impact on gameplay, to be confirmed without being distracted by the movable body that operates through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the start condition while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B) , the portion where the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to a variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
When a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power failure was not completed while the start-up preparation display was being displayed and before the confirmation movable control was performed, the display means displays a display of the recovery in progress (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the portion where the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
Further provided with a reservation storage means (for example, the special chart reservation storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 9) capable of storing reservation information regarding variable display,
When a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the variable display that was being performed before the power failure is terminated and the variable display is started based on the hold information that was stored before the power failure, the display means displays the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the portion where the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to a variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The light emission control means is capable of performing initialization-responsive light emission control for causing a plurality of light emission means to emit light in a mode corresponding to initialization (for example, as shown in Figs. 61 and 62, a portion for causing frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an upper board movable body LED 9d, a lower board movable body LED 9e, an upper frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g to emit light in an initialization notification mode).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on,
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the portion where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the initialization corresponding light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification mode).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the initial operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board face-line 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has begun through the startup preparation display, and a gaming machine can be provided that allows the initialization-compatible light-emitting control to be confirmed without being distracted by the movable body operating through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
Further comprising light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
When a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in an illumination pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
Further comprising light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
When a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress).
Thereafter, when the variable display executed before the power outage is terminated while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, background display corresponding light emission control is performed in which the light emission control means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the background display (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background image).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-4 is
Further comprising light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
When a power outage occurs during one of a plurality of rounds of play and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round of play),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress).
Thereafter, when the one round of play that was being played before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), when the round of play that was being played before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top board movable body LED 9d, the bottom board movable body LED 9e, the top frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started while the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to a round of play (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form 22-5 is
Further comprising light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
When a power outage occurs during one of a plurality of rounds of play and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round of play),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress).
Thereafter, when the one round of play that was being played before the power outage ends and the next round of play of the one round of play is started while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B) , when the round of play that was played before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top board movable body LED 9d, the bottom board movable body LED 9e, the top frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by performing an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The game control means includes:
When the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, when the result of the variable display of the normal pattern is a win (normal win), an opening control is executed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time).
When a power interruption occurs while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state, and when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the normal variable means to the easy-entry state again (for example, in the case where a power interruption occurs while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol win, a portion controls the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state again based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started by a hot start).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (e.g., startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on,
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107A, the portion where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has begun by the start-up preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine which, when the power is cut off when the normal variable means is in an easy-to-enter state and the power is turned on (power outage is restored), allows the player to quickly confirm that the normal variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body which operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107A, the portion where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the normal variable means that is in the easy-entry state due to the special control while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed after a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B that is in the open state).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is
When a power interruption occurs during the variable display of normal identification information, the result of which is a predetermined display result, and the power is then turned on (for example, when the variable display of normal symbols is being executed before the power interruption occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 is started up in a hot start mode),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107B, the portion where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-entry state (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control for moving the movable body by performing an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on (for example, a part that performs the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 by the performance control CPU 120 executing the operation confirmation control process shown in Figs. 31 and 32).
The game control means includes:
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-entry state in which the game medium can easily enter (for example, a portion that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When a power interruption occurs while the variable means is in the easy-entry state, and then when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the variable means to the easy-entry state again (for example, in the case where a power interruption occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, a portion controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to be in the open state again based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started by a hot start).
The display means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)).
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a display indicating that the power is being restored (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion in which the display 132SG510 indicating that the power is being restored is displayed).
When the power is cut off during the advantageous state while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the display of the restoration in progress display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine which allows the player to quickly confirm that the variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off when the power is cut off and then turned on (power outage is restored) without being distracted by the movable body which operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
In the advantageous state, it is possible to play multiple rounds of games (for example, as shown in FIG. 8, a portion in which 3 to 10 rounds of games can be played as a jackpot game),
In a round game, it is possible to perform control to set the variable means to the easy-entry state and control to set the variable means to the non-entry state (for example, a part that controls the special winning ball device 7 to an open state and a part that controls the special winning ball device 7 to a closed state in a round game).
When the power is cut off while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, when the special control in one round of play ends and control is performed to make the variable means in the next round of play unable to enter the entry state while the start preparation display is being displayed, the recovery display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, when the round of play ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the wall s state, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed).
Then, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (e.g., on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the movable body by an operation for confirming that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The display means includes:
When power is turned on with initialization (e.g., cold start processing), it is possible to display an initialization display (e.g., initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating that initialization has been performed,
When power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
Then, the confirmation movable control is performed,
Then, after the confirmation movable control ends, the display of the initialization display ends (see FIG. 109 and FIG. 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the gaming machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control does not prevent confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has been completed.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is
The period from power-on with initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed (for example, the period from power-on with initialization (start-up with cold start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (start-up with hot start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when the power is turned on to initiate initialization, confirmation movement control is not immediately performed, preventing the display of the initialization display from becoming visibly observable.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period;
Even if the start condition is satisfied while the initialization display is being displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds) and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period, and even if a start winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 25-4 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, if the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the display of the initialization display continues until the end of the execution period of the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform the operation check control in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the display of the initialization display is continued until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, after power-on without initialization (startup by hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 is not displayed, and the background display is performed based on the game state background designation command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B),
A second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A),
A movable body control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The distance between the first movable body and the second movable body is closer when the first movable body is located at the advanced position and the second movable body is located at the advanced position than when the first movable body is located at the initial position and the second movable body is located at the initial position (see FIG. 111 );
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) for moving the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
The confirmation movement control is a control in which the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position so that the moving periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap, and then the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the moving periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A start moving from the origin position to the performance position at the same time so that their initial operation periods overlap (see FIG. 111 (B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position so that their initial operation periods do not overlap (see FIG. 111 (C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can operate normally in the advanced position and that the second movable body can operate normally in the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to individually confirm the movement of the first movable body from its advanced position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from its advanced position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the first movable body and the second movable body,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movement control means is capable of performing a performance movement control in which the first movable body is moved from an initial position to an advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to an advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap, and then the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the movement of the first movable body and the second movable body in the performance movement control (for example, for the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B that perform a performance movement in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), in the operation confirmation control, an initial movement is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance movement described in Figures 112 (B) to (D) (for example, a manner in which the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B are separately advanced)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is
Further comprising a detection means (e.g., a performance position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is disposed in the advanced position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the advance position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the on-board movable body 32A) arranged at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the below-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing return control to move the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, to the initial position when the movable body is not located at the initial position when the power is turned on (for example, a part in which return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part in which short initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) is performed when the movable body including the first movable body and the second movable body is not located at the origin position before the long initial operation control is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B),
A second movable body (e.g., a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (e.g., game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in a game frame (for example, an opening and closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) can be performed to move the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation for confirming that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
As the confirmation movement control, an operation is performed to move the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position, an operation is performed to confirm that the second movable body is operating normally (for example, while the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57 (F)), the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position. See Figures 57 (G) to (I)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which a first movable body being placed in an advanced position during confirmation movable control indicates that the confirmation movable control has not ended, and the operation of the second movable body is started when the first movable body is placed in the advanced position, thereby ensuring that the confirmation movable control of the second movable body is not overlooked.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is
Further comprising a detection means (e.g., a performance position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is placed in an initial position;
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) arranged at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine capable of performing confirmation movable control in an optimal manner can be provided.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of FIG. 1 is the front (front face, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the rear (rear face, back) side, and the description is based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "132SGS1", "Normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach", and "Super reach" may be abbreviated to "SP reach".

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device. The game machine frame 3 is provided with an opening and closing door frame 3a having a glass window that can be rotated around the left side, and is configured so that the game area can be opened and closed by the opening and closing door frame 3a, and the game area can be viewed through the glass window when the opening and closing door frame 3a is closed.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns. The special patterns on the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are composed of multiple lamps (LEDs). The CPU 103 is capable of lighting these multiple lamps in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, has a device with a movable piece that can move back and forth, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in a retracted position away from the game board surface, making it difficult for game balls to flow down the upper surface of the movable piece, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in a protruding position where the movable piece protrudes forward from the game board surface, making it possible for game balls to flow down the upper surface of the movable piece, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-mentioned device as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided to the right of the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

Below the variable winning ball device 6B, a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the opening and closing door frame 3a. Frame LEDs 9a, 9b are provided at the upper part and left and right sides of the opening and closing door frame 3a so as to surround the game area. In addition, an attacker LED 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), there are provided an above-board movable body 32A and a below-board movable body 32B that operate according to the performance. In addition, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are provided with movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG121 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g. The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LEDs 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attacker LED 9c are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the opening and closing door frame 3a below the game area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the game machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

In addition, an operation unit 600 is provided at the center of the bottom of the opening and closing door frame 3a. The operation unit 600 includes a chance button 631B that the player can press, and a lever body 631A that the player can push and pull in the forward and backward directions and that is rotatable. The chance button 631B is movable up and down between an origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and is also movable between the origin position and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the origin position. In addition, a cross key that constitutes a selection button 132SG35 for setting the sound volume and other aspects of the presentation is provided on the upper tray of the opening and closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see Figure 2) for detecting the player's operation (action) of the chance button 631B, an origin position sensor 635C (see Figure 2) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is in the origin position, a protruding position sensor 635D (see Figure 2) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is in the protruding position, a vibration motor 635E (see Figure 2) for vibrating the chance button 631B, an advance/retract motor 635F (see Figure 2) for moving the chance button 631B forward and backward between the origin position and the protruding position, a push/pull sensor 625Y (see Figure 2) consisting of a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A, and a protruding position sensor 625C for detecting whether the lever body 631A is in the protruding position. The selection button 132SG35 is also provided with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see FIG. 2), which is made up of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detects the operation of the selection button 132SG35's cross key in the up/down/left/right directions.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The opening and closing door frame 3a has three performance units: a first performance unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center position, a second performance unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left side, and a third performance unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right side. The first performance unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame-mounted movable body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the performance position, as described below.

The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown). The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52 (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200 in this feature section 132SG, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set to a setting change state by operating the setting change switch 52, and the jackpot probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in this setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see FIG. 2) is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the large winning hole (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the second start winning hole (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have won the large winning hole (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out.
The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the opening and closing door frame 3a.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

The time-saving state continues until one of the end conditions is met first, such as a predetermined number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. When the end condition is that a predetermined number of special games have been played, it is also called a time-saving state (time-saving state after time-saving).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and a specified recovery process is not performed after power is turned on). The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called the low base state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, in the first round of a jackpot (first jackpot) in normal mode, the large prize opening is opened in a jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the presentation shown in FIG. 52 (F8) is performed, and in the first round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in a small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time), so the presentation shown in FIG. 40 (C2) is performed. Also, in the second round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in a jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the displays, various lamps, and sounds are different between the first and second rounds.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switches (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the opening and closing door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals (signals output when an operation by the player is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation) from the push/pull sensor 625Y, the protruding position sensor 625C, the button sensor 635B, the origin position sensor 635C, the protruding position sensor 635D, the up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, the origin position sensors 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and the presentation position sensors 132SG104, 132SG114, 132SG124, and 132SG134.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to each movable body or to the drive circuit that drives the vibration motor 635E, the advance/retract motor 635F, and the drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132 of each movable body.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B (such as supplying signals to operate each movable body) may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process (see FIG. 12) of step S27.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

Figure 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 132SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3 is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable display time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 4(A), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big win", or "minor win", and the determination result (big win type determination result) of which of several types of big win types the big win type will be when the variable display result is a "big win".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(A), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is a power-on command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold-started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed down (step S6 has been executed because the recovery condition was not met in step S3 of the game control main processing in FIG. 12)).

Command 9200H is a power outage recovery command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has been hot started (the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (step S4 has been executed because the recovery condition was met in step S3 of the game control main processing in FIG. 12).

Command 95XXH is a game state background designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. The game state background designation command is also a command that designates that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 be updated to a background image that corresponds to the game state. In the game state background designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4B, as a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is a second game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in one variable display of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A (high base state, time-saving state A). Command 9502H is a third game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in a maximum of 685 variable displays of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B (high base state, time-saving state C1). Command 9503H is a fourth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in a maximum of seven variable displays of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C (high base state, time-saving state B). Command 9504H is a fifth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state B) in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special chart up to 7 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. Command 9504H is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state C2) in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special chart up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

Command A0XXH is a start of win command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A3XXH is an end of win command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a big win game state or a small win game state.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or small win game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number in an identifiable manner in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number in an identifiable manner in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command C4XXH is a pattern designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a V winning notification designation command that notifies that a V has been won, in other words, that the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on as a result of the game ball passing through it. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special pattern time reduction count notification command that notifies the remaining number of time reduction controls for the second special pattern in the time reduction state. Command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command that notifies the number of prize balls generated (awarded) as a result of the game ball winning in the winning slot. Command E100H is a customer waiting demo designation command that specifies the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance).

Figure 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 5, in this feature unit 132SG, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the winning type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted on the main board 11 side. In addition, random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating them by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

6 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 132SG. In this feature section 132SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" and the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Of these variation patterns, for the jackpot variation pattern, after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, an additional 15 seconds of special chart display time is set up to execute a congratulatory performance to celebrate the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the miss fluctuation pattern in this feature section 132SG have the same period until the variable display result is announced, preventing the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss based on the length of the period until the variable display result is announced.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern in this feature unit 132SG, an example is shown in which an additional 15-second special chart variable display time is provided for executing a congratulatory effect after the same special chart variable display time as the miss fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special chart variable display time for executing a congratulatory effect provided in the jackpot fluctuation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and may vary depending on the game status.

As shown in Figures 6(A) and 6(B), this feature section 132SG has multiple different variation patterns pre-defined according to the special symbols that perform the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 6(A), the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol include jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns, which include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α or super reach β is executed, and a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which no reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 132SG has only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach. Also, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern, super reach α variation pattern, and super reach β variation pattern for the first special symbol include a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display is executed 1 to 3 times. In this feature section 132SG, the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is executed determines which of the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β reach performances is executed. For example, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display, a normal reach reach performance is executed afterwards, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, a super reach α reach performance is executed afterwards, and if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display, a super reach β reach performance is executed afterwards.

Incidentally, of the reach effects that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the Super Reach β reach effect is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and the Super Reach α reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach β reach effect. The normal reach reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach α reach effect (jackpot expectation of reach effects: Super Reach β > Super Reach α > Normal Reach). In other words, in this feature section 132SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation of that variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(B), the variation patterns of the second special symbols in this feature section 132SG include non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns (normal reach variation patterns in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach γ variation patterns in which the reach performance of a super reach γ is executed) that have special symbol variable display times different from the variation patterns of the first special symbols as jackpot variation patterns, small jackpot variation patterns, and miss variation patterns. Of these variation patterns of the second special symbols, the super reach γ variation pattern has the highest jackpot expectation, and the non-reach variation pattern has the lowest jackpot expectation (jackpot expectation in the second special symbols: super reach γ > normal reach > non-reach).

In addition, in this characteristic section 132SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these types are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables shown in FIG. 7 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern judgment table (see FIGS. 14 to 19) that stores a plurality of variation patterns that are the variation modes of each pattern in a variable display such as a special pattern or a normal pattern.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include, for example, display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 7(A), display result judgment table 2 shown in FIG. 7(B), big win type judgment table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 7(C), big win type judgment table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. 7(D), small win type judgment table shown in FIG. 7(E), as well as various first special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment tables (see FIG. 14, FIG. 19), various second special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment tables (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 19), and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (not shown).

7(A) and 7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result judgment table 1 and the display result judgment table 2. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning judgment value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result judgment table 1, a judgment value for a big win and a judgment value for a small win are set when the variable display special pattern designation buffer (a value that the CPU 103 sets when the special pattern normal processing is executed as a value that designates a special pattern that executes variable display) is 1 (first), that is, when the first special pattern is the target of variable display. In the display result judgment table 2, a judgment value for a big win and a judgment value for a small win are set when the variable display special pattern designation buffer (a value that the CPU 103 sets when the special pattern normal processing is executed as a value that designates a special pattern that executes variable display) is 2 (second), that is, when the second special pattern is the target of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is set to the first position, a judgment value corresponding to a big win is set, but a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not set. Therefore, when the first special pattern is the target of variable display, a big win is possible, but a small win will not occur. Note that the probability of winning a big win when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is set to the first position is approximately 1/200.

Also, as shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable display special chart designation buffer is set to the second level, a judgment value corresponding to a big win and a judgment value corresponding to a small win are set. When the variable display special chart designation buffer is set to the second level, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is the first (when the special pattern that performs the variable display is the first special pattern), if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 7(A), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (big hit A or big hit B). Also, when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is the second (when the special pattern that performs the variable display is the second special pattern), if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 7(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (big hit B), and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 7(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probability" shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big win or a small win. Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to control the game to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to control the game to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B a small win pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in Figures 7 (A) and 7 (B), but a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of a big hit may be made using a common table for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern, regardless of the variable display special pattern designation buffer, and the determination of a small hit may be made using a separate table depending on the variable display special pattern designation buffer.

In addition, in this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display special chart designation buffer is the first, no judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to a big win is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small win, in other words, a small win cannot be won, but it is also possible to set some of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to a big win as judgment values corresponding to a small win, so that a small win can be won.

Figures 7(C) and 7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 7(C) is a table when the jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 7(D) is a table when the jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be jackpot A or jackpot B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot pattern. In addition, in this feature section 132SG, as shown in Figures 7 (C) and (D), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern) has two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern) has only one type of jackpot, jackpot B. In other words, the jackpot that occurs when the first special pattern is variable displayed is either one of the two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot that occurs when the second special pattern is variable displayed is only jackpot B.

Figure 7 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. The small win type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win to be small win A or small win B based on the random number (MR2) for winning type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win pattern. Furthermore, in this characteristic section 132SG, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit A, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type C is executed, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D or jackpot E is executed, and if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, that is, if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type E is executed. In other words, these jackpots C through E are not determined by the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot extracted at the time of the initial winning, but by the fact that the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during either small jackpot A or small jackpot B.

Now, referring to FIG. 8, the jackpot types in this feature section 132SG are explained. In this feature section 132SG, the jackpot types are set to jackpot A through jackpot E, which execute time-saving control after the jackpot game state ends.

Of these jackpots A through E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the rounds that change the jackpot entry port to the second state that is advantageous to the player are executed three times (so-called three rounds). The interval period for each round in jackpot A is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state A until the special game is executed once for the variable display of the second special pattern, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

In jackpot B, the rounds that change the jackpot entry port to the second state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The interval period for each round in jackpot B is set to 0.5 seconds. After the jackpot game state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C1 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of a total of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

The jackpot C is a jackpot in which the jackpot entry port is changed to the second state, which is advantageous to the player, three times (so-called 3 rounds). The interval period between each round in the jackpot C is set to 0.5 seconds for the first and second rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. After the jackpot game state ends, the time-saving control is executed as the time-saving state B until a maximum of 7 special game games are executed for the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of 11 special game games are executed for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

The jackpot D is a jackpot that changes the jackpot entry port to the second state, which is advantageous to the player, nine times (so-called 9 rounds). The interval period for each round in the jackpot D is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second and fourth to ninth rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. After the jackpot game state of the jackpot D ends, the time-saving control is executed as the time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games are executed for the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of 11 special game games are executed for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

The jackpot E is a jackpot that changes the jackpot entry port to the second state, which is advantageous to the player, nine times (so-called 9 rounds). The interval period for each round in the jackpot E is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second and fourth to ninth rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. After the jackpot game state of the jackpot E ends, the time-saving control is executed as the time-saving state C2 until a maximum of 685 special game games are executed for the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of 689 special game games are executed in total for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

In this way, the interval period for the third round from jackpot C to jackpot E is set to 30 seconds, and this feature section 132SG can execute the promotion effect described below as an effect that suggests that the jackpot game will continue up to the ninth round over those 30 seconds.

In each time-saving state, the probability of a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B; in other words, the occurrence of the second start winning makes it easier for the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed, making it easier for a small hit to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time-saving state ends, a big hit may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur when the game ball enters a V during a small hit game, resulting in a so-called consecutive win state in which big hit game states tend to occur continuously.

In addition, in time-saving state A after the end of jackpot play on jackpot A, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot in either the one variable display of the second special symbol and the one variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during the one variable display of the second special symbol (the total percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of five variable displays of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters the V) is set to approximately 54%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of jackpot play for jackpot D, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the percentage of variable display results that will be a jackpot or small jackpot in either of the seven variable displays of the second special symbol and the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during the seven variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 11 variable displays of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters the V) is set to approximately 83%.

In addition, in the time-saving state C2 after the end of jackpot play on jackpot B or jackpot E, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to 685 times, so the percentage of variable display results that will be a jackpot or small jackpot in either of the 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol and the maximum of four variable displays of the second special symbol based on reserved memories that occur during the 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters the V) is set to almost 100%.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, four types of jackpots are provided, jackpot A to jackpot E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be five or more types of jackpots, or there may be three or less types of jackpots.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 132SG150 as shown in FIG. 9 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a special pattern reserve memory section 132SG151, a regular pattern reserve memory section 132SG151C, a game control flag setting section 132SG152, a game control timer setting section 132SG153, a game control counter setting section 132SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 132SG155.

The special symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151 stores, in order of winning, reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a start winning (first start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A but has not yet started, and reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B but has not yet started.

As an example, the special chart reserve memory unit 132SG151 associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and stores the start port buffer value, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, as reserved data, until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "8"). The number of reserved data stored in response to winning in the first start winning port and the number of reserved data stored in response to winning in the second start winning port are each up to four.

The reserved data thus stored in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SG151 indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a separate reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. Furthermore, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in a separate reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number, one of the variable display based on the first reserved information and the variable display based on the second reserved memory information may be executed in preference to the variable display based on the other reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they were detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 132SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The special symbol variable display performance control pattern corresponds to a number of different variation patterns and is composed of data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as the variable display operation of decorative symbols, the performance display operation in reach performance, re-draw performance, etc., during the period from when the special symbol starts to vary in the special symbol game to when the confirmed special symbol that is the special symbol display result is derived and displayed, or various performance display operations that do not involve the variable display of decorative symbols. The advance notice performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents of the performance operation that becomes the advance notice performance that is executed in response to advance notice patterns, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance. The various performance control patterns correspond to various performance operations that are executed depending on the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

The control patterns for controlling the presentation of special charts during variable display may include, for example, multiple types of reach presentation control patterns in which the presentation manner in each reach presentation is different for each variation pattern that executes the reach presentation.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 132SG190 as shown in FIG. 10(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 132SG190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 132SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 132SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 132SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 132SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A as shown in FIG. 10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 132SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "8") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory (for example, "8"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special pattern being variably displayed. When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, three commands, namely, a start port winning designation command (first start port winning designation command or second start port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (entry) reserved for storing the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory together by associating these start winning designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "0" which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the decorative pattern change stop process which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A of this feature section 132SG, a memory area for setting a pending display flag value indicating the display mode of the pending display or active display in the advance notice setting process (Fig. 35) described later, and a memory area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display corresponding panel or the second special chart pending memory corresponding panel displayed on the image display device 5 in the time-saving state A are reserved for each buffer number.

When a start win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands in the start win reception command buffer 132SG194A, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number). When a start win occurs, the start win designation command through the pending memory count notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the ends of the buffer numbers corresponding to the pending memories, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) are deleted from the entry (buffer number "0") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that has just ended, and the contents stored in the entry (entry corresponding to buffer number "1") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is to start and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer numbers "3", "4", "5", etc. is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer numbers "2", "3", "4", etc. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the reserved memory that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, or a pending memory number notification command. If these commands have been received, these commands are stored at the top of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A as pending memory for each special pattern.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed. The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

After executing the recovery process or initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is generated periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and if necessary, it is possible to issue a warning depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG. In the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG, the special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, a determination is made as to whether to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal process, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" or a "small hit", the big hit type in the case of a "big hit", and the small hit type in the case of a "small hit" are determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a determined special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a miss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" and the normal special symbol processing ends. In addition, this feature unit 132SG stores the winning order of the game balls into the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole, and the start conditions of the special symbol game are established in the winning order (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern as one of several types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result will be "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (variable special display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change has reached the special pattern variable display time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the determined special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

Step 132 The pre-opening process for small wins in SGS118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This pre-opening process for small wins includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the pre-opening process for small wins ends.

The small win open process of step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open process includes a process of measuring the time that has elapsed since the large win opening was opened, a process of determining whether it is time to return the large win opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, and a process of determining whether game balls have been detected by the second count switch 132SG024. When the large win opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open process ends.

The small win end process of step 132SGS120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the performance operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, if a game ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win game state ends, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "4" and the small win process ends. Also, if a game ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0" and the small win end process ends.

Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in Figure 13. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on or not (132SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (132SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in 132SGS102 (132SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 132SGS101 (132SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 132SGS102 (132SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (132SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (132SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the second reserved memory count in 132SGS105 is not the upper limit value (132SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of 132SGS103 and 132SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 (132SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random number values thus extracted and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of hit are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 132SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display state including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (132SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special pattern process is completed.

Following the processing of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (132SGS112). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (132SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of 132SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 15 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed by 132SGS112 in Figure 14 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 132SG, when the variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is started, the special pattern normal process (S110 in Figure 13) determines whether or not the special pattern display result (the variable display result of the special pattern) is controlled to a big win game state as a "big win" or whether or not it is controlled to a small win game state as a "small win". In addition, in the variable pattern setting process (S111 in Figure 13), a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of S112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the big win pattern or the small win pattern is derived and displayed as the special pattern display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a game ball entering the starting winning hole begins, that is, before it is determined at the start of the variable display whether it will be a big hit or a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120 and other devices will execute pre-reading predictions such as panel display presentations and hold preview presentations, as described below.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the game state is normal or time-saving (step 132SGS121). Then, it determines whether the set start port buffer value is 1 or not (step 132SGS122a). If the start port buffer value is 1, it selects display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 7(A) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b), and if the start port buffer value is 2, it selects display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 7(B) and proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result judgment table, and judges whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the judgment range for a big win. If the random number value MR1 is outside the judgment range for a big win, it judges whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the judgment range for a small win (step 132SGS123b).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is outside the range of the small win determination value, that is, if the variable display result is a miss, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a pattern designation command corresponding to the miss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). If the start port buffer value is 1, if the game state is a normal state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18 (A), and if the game state is one of the time-saving states, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19 (A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

If the start port buffer value is 2, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20(A) is selected if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, which is the 1st to 7th variable display, and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 18(A) is selected if the game state is time-saving state C2, which is the 8th or subsequent variable display, and the program proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a small win (step 132SGS127). Then, if the game state is time-saving state A, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 20(C); if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 21(C); if the game state is normal state or time-saving state C2, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 18(C), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

In step 132SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). If the start port buffer value is 1, if the game state is the normal state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 18 (C), and if the game state is either the time-saving state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19 (B), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

In addition, if the start port buffer value is 2, when the game state is normal, if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 20 (B) is selected, if the game state is time-saving state B, the 1st to 7th variable display of time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 21 (B) is selected, and if the game state is normal or the 8th or subsequent variable display of time-saving state C2, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 22 (B) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS130c).

In step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 132SGS109, and determines the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). Then, it sets up the transmission of a fluctuation category designation command (any one shown in FIG. 15(B)) according to the determination result, and ends the random number value determination process at the time of winning (step 132SGS132).

The commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Figure 16 is a flow chart showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) shown in Figure 13. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is a reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). If there is no reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151, demo display settings such as sending settings for a customer waiting demo designation command are performed and the normal special symbol processing ends (step 132SGS572). The customer waiting demo designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 12).

If there is a reserved memory in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151, the start port buffer value and the random number values MR1 to MR3 are read and identified from the reserved number "1" in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). The values of the number of reserved special charts to be variably displayed and the total number of reserved special charts are incremented by 1, and the memory contents of the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

It is also determined whether the start opening buffer value identified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special chart designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 132SGS544b), and if the start opening buffer value is 2, the variable display special chart designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Next, a display result judgment table according to the variable display special chart designation buffer value is set (step 132SGS555). Then, the random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 is compared with the display result judgment table set in step 132SGS555 to judge whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of a big win (step 132SGS556). If the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the range of a big win, it is further judged whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of a small win (step 132SGS557). If the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of a small win, that is, if the variable display result is a small win, a small win flag is set (step 132SGS558). Then, a small win type determination table (see FIG. 7(E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small win type is determined by comparing the selected small win type determination table with the random number value MR2 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS558b). Then, a small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). Note that if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the range of a small win, that is, if the variable display result is a miss, the process proceeds to step 132SGS570.

Also, if the value of the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot in step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 7(C) or FIG. 7(D)) corresponding to the variable display special chart designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the jackpot type is determined by comparing the selected jackpot type determination table with the random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

In step 132SGS570, the CPU 103 determines the confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the variable pattern setting process, and the normal special symbol processing is terminated (step 132SGS571).

Figure 17 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) shown in Figure 13. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special chart (step 132SGS131). Whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special chart may be judged, for example, by whether the variable display special chart designation buffer value is 1. If it is the variable display of the first special chart, a variable pattern determination table is selected from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 18 and 19 according to the variable display result, game status, and number of reserved memories, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special charts is two or less, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18(A) is selected, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special charts is three or more, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 18(B) is selected, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 18(C) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special chart variable pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19(A) is selected, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special chart variable pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19(B) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special chart, a variation pattern determination table according to the variable display result, game state, value of the time-saving state variable display count counter (variable display count in each time-saving state), etc. is selected from Figures 20 to 23, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20(A) is selected, if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is time-saving state A, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 20(B) is selected, and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is time-saving state A, the second special chart fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 20(C) is selected.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C1, and the time-saving state C2, and the 12th to 685th variable display, the variable pattern determination table D for the second special chart shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected, if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C1, and the time-saving state C2, and the 12th to 685th variable display, the variable pattern determination table E for the second special chart shown in FIG. 21(B) is selected, and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display of the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C1, and the time-saving state C2, and the 12th to 685th variable display, the variable pattern determination table F for the second special chart shown in FIG. 21(A) is selected.

If the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table J shown in FIG. 23(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table K shown in FIG. 23(B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special chart variable pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 23(C) is selected.

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies a variation pattern that includes the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing from among the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, and determines the identified variation pattern as the variation pattern that executes the variable display.

Then, the variable display start setting for the special symbol is performed (step 132 SGS136), and various commands for starting the variable display, such as a variable pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variable pattern and a variable display result designation command, are set for transmission (step 132 SGS137), and a variable display time timer corresponding to the variable pattern is set (step 132 SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variable processing, and the variable pattern setting process is terminated (step 132 SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 132 SGS137 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

In addition, for the miss variation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 18 and 19, so that the non-reach variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β variation patterns are the least likely to be determined. On the other hand, for the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 22 and 23, so that the super reach β variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the super reach α and normal reach variation patterns are the least likely to be determined. For this reason, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in the non-reach variation pattern, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) is the lowest, and the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β variation patterns are the most likely to be determined. In other words, the shorter the special chart change time, the lower the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the longer the special chart change time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the multiple variation patterns, for the variation patterns that execute a common reach performance, the variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance is set to have a higher jackpot expectation. For example, for the variation patterns that execute the reach performance of the super reach β, a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance and a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance are provided, but the variation pattern of the super reach β that executes the pseudo consecutive performance is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of the super reach β that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance. Similarly, for the variation patterns that execute the reach performance of the super reach α, a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance and a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance are provided, but the variation pattern of the super reach α that executes the pseudo consecutive performance is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of the super reach α that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, for the variation patterns that execute the reach performance of the normal reach, a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance and a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance are provided, but the variation pattern of the normal reach that executes the pseudo consecutive performance is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of the normal reach that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance.

Figure 24 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in Figure 13. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a symbol determination period timer, which will be described later, is running (step 132SGS201). If the symbol determination period is not running, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays a stopped symbol of the special symbol (step 132SGS202), and sets up the transmission of a symbol determination command (step 132SGS203). The symbol determination command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12.

Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, if any time-saving flag is set, the time-saving flag and other game state flags are cleared (step 132SGS205), and the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is cleared (step 132SGS206). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command, and sets the transmission setting of the game state background designation command indicating that the game state is in the normal state, and proceeds to step 132SGS242 (step 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). The hit start designation command and the game state background designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Also, if the pattern determination period timer is operating in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern determination period timer by 1 (step 132SGS209) and determines whether the pattern determination period timer has timed out (step 132SGS210). If the pattern determination period timer has not timed out, the special pattern stop process is terminated, and if the pattern determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 further determines whether the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a losing pattern (step 132SGS211). If the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a losing pattern, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern process and terminates the special pattern stop process (step 132SGS212), and if the derived and displayed stopped pattern is not a losing pattern, the CPU 103 determines whether the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a winning pattern (step 132SGS213). If the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a big win pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big win pre-opening processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS214), and if the derived and displayed stopped pattern is not a big win pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win pre-opening processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS215).

If the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time-saving counter is 1 or more (step 132SGS216). The total time-saving counter is set to the sum of the maximum time-saving control count for the first special symbol and the maximum time-saving control count for the second special symbol in the time-saving state (either "5", "11", or "689").

If the value of the total time-saving counter is 1 or more, the value of the total time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether the completed variable display is the variable display of the first special pattern (step 132SGS218). If the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 132SGS224. If the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 2 (if the completed variable display is the variable display of the second special pattern), the value of the second special pattern time-saving counter is decremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). The second special pattern time-saving counter is a counter in which the maximum time-saving control count (either "1", "7", or "685") of the second special pattern is set in the time-saving state.

In step 132SGS224, the CPU 103 judges whether any time-saving flag is set (whether any time-saving state is controlled). If none of the time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If any of the time-saving flags are set, the process further judges whether the value of the total time-saving counter has become 0, that is, whether the variable display of the maximum time-saving control count has ended in the controlled time-saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time-saving counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If the value of the total time-saving counter is 0, the process clears the set time-saving flag (step 132SGS226), clears the value of the total time-saving counter, and proceeds to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit start 4 designation command according to the type of small hit, and proceeds to step 132SGS242. The hit start 3 designation command and the hit start 4 designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12. If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer to a value corresponding to the symbol determination period (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of this feature unit 132SG), and sets the transmission of a symbol determination period designation command corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, it sets the transmission of a game state background designation command corresponding to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS243).

The pattern determination period designation command and the game state background designation command are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12.

Figure 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S119 of Figure 13 as the small win opening processing. In the small win opening processing, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the opening time timer by 1 (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the opening time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to 132SGS293. If the opening time timer has not timed out, the process determines whether or not it is time to open the large prize opening (132SGS283). If it is time to open the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to an open state by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the process sets the transmission of the large prize opening open command according to the round (132SGS285), and proceeds to 132SGS286. The large prize opening open command set for transmission in 132SGS285 is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to open the large prize opening, the process proceeds to 132SGS286 without passing through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

In 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to close the large prize opening (132SGS286). If it is time to close the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to a closed state by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS287). Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the command after the large prize opening is opened according to the round (132SGS288) and proceeds to 132SGS289. The command during the large prize opening that has been set for transmission in 132SGS288 is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to close the large prize opening, the CPU 103 proceeds to 132SGS289 without passing through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

In 132SGS289, the CPU 103 judges whether the second count switch 132SG024 is on or not (132SGS289). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not on, the small win opening process is terminated, and if the second count switch 132SG024 is on, the CPU 103 judges whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, i.e., that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024, has been set or not (132SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win opening process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag (132SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS292). The V winning notification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" (132SGS293), which is the value corresponding to the small win end process (S120), and ends the small win open process.

Figure 26 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed by 132SGS120 in Figure 13 as small win end processing. In the small win end processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the small win end display timer is operating (132SGS301). If the small win end display timer is not operating (132SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (132SGS302), and a win end designation command corresponding to the small win is set to the performance control board 12 (132SGS303). The win end designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above. Then, the small win end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the small win end display time (132SGS304), and the small win end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is operating, the value of the small win end display timer is decremented by 1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small win end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). If the small win end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 has not been turned on, the small win end process is terminated, and if the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on, it is determined whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024, has been set (132SGS308). If the V prize flag is set, the small win end process ends, and if the V prize flag is not set, the V prize flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS310) and ends the small win end processing. The V winning notification command is sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above.

In addition, when the small win end display time has elapsed in 132SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether the V win flag is set or not (132SGS311). If the V win flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V win flag and sets the big win flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big win type from "Big Win C" to "Big Win E" based on the small win type in which the V win occurred (132SGS314). As shown in FIG. 7(E), if the small win type in which the V win occurred is a "small win A", the big win type is determined to be a "big win C", if the small win type in which the V win occurred is a "small win B", the big win type is determined to be a "big win D", and if the small win type in which the V win occurred is a "small win C", the big win type is determined to be a "big win E". The big win type thus determined is stored by, for example, setting the big win type buffer value, which is the storage value of the big win type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315).

In addition, the time-saving flag and the time-saving state variable display count counter are cleared (step 132SGS316, step 132SGS317), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4" (132SGS318), which is the value corresponding to the pre-big win release process (S114), and the small win end process is terminated.

In other words, in this feature section 132SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during the small win game, but also during the period until the small win end display time has elapsed after the small win game ends. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big win hole just before the small win game ends, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024, and the big win game is executed after the small win end processing is completed.

If the V winning flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (132SGS319), which corresponds to the normal special symbol processing (S110), and ends the small win end processing.

Figure 27 is a flow chart of the jackpot end process shown in Figure 13. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not running, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 132SGS322a), and the jackpot end designation command transmission setting according to the jackpot type is performed (step 132SGS322b). The jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. In addition, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time), and the jackpot end process is terminated (step 132SGS322c).

In addition, if the jackpot end display timer is operating in step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end process is terminated, and if the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 132SGS325). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special chart time-saving counter is set to "1" and the total time-saving counter is set to "5" (steps 132SGS326, 132SGS327). Then, the time-saving A flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is controlled to A, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

If the type of the jackpot is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132 SGS328). If the type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot E, the second special chart time-saving counter is set to "685" and the total time-saving counter is set to "689" (steps 132 SGS329 and 132 SGS330). Then, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot is jackpot B (step 132 SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving C1 flag indicating that the state is controlled to time-saving state C1 is set and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a); if the jackpot type is jackpot E, the time-saving C2 flag indicating that the state is controlled to time-saving state C2 is set and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

If the type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot D, the second special chart time-saving count counter is set to "7", and the total time-saving count counter is set to "11" (steps 132SGS335 and 132SGS336). Then, the time-saving B flag is set to indicate that the jackpot is in time-saving state B, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

In step 132SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets the game status background designation command for transmission according to the type of jackpot that has been executed (step 132SGS339b). The game status background designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. The CPU 103 also stores the game status background designation command for which transmission has been set (step 132SGS340), and ends the jackpot end process.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 28 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a startup preparation display display process (step 132SGS70) for displaying a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

In this embodiment, for example, the "boot preparation display" described in the embodiment is described as a "boot preparation image" in the drawings, and so "display" and "image" are sometimes used, but since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may be described as "image" and "image" as "display."

The initialization process of step S71 prevents the startup preparation display displayed by the startup preparation display process of step SGS70 from being initialized. By displaying the startup preparation display, the user can quickly know that power has been supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can confirm that the image display device 5 can display the display normally.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power outage recovery display process (step 132SGS75b) is executed to display a power outage recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the power outage recovery designation command received from the CPU 103, and an initial operation control process (step 132SGS75c) is executed to execute the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up.

The startup preparation display process in this characteristic section 132SG includes a process of setting a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a cold start when it is determined that a power-on command has been received, and the power outage recovery display process in this characteristic section 132SG includes a process of setting a hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a hot start when it is determined that a power outage recovery command has been received.

After the initial operation control process, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update process (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a volume/light intensity adjustment process (step 132SGS79) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity of each LED, and a background image update process (step 132SGS80) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the received background image designation command based on the background image designation command received from the CPU 103 are executed. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command until the customer waiting demo performance starts, and may start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 29, the initial operation control process is roughly divided into two processes: an origin placement control process (step 132SGS100) that places the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at their respective origin positions, and an operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS200) that confirms the operation of these movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101).

Figure 30 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in the origin placement control processing in Figure 29. In the origin placement control processing shown in Figure 30, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132 SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it further determines whether the start-time origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132 SGS402). If the start-time origin placement control completed flag is not set, it determines whether it is the start timing of a demo performance (step 132 SGS403). Whether it is the start timing of a demo performance can be determined by, for example, determining whether the process timer for the demo performance is operating or not, and whether the value of the process timer for the demo performance is a value corresponding to the start timing of a demo performance.

If it is not the start timing of the demo performance, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether it is the start timing of the variable display can be determined, for example, by determining whether the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is operating or whether the value of the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is a value corresponding to the start timing of the variable display. If it is not the start timing of the variable display, the origin placement control process is terminated.

Then, if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set in step 132SGS402, if it is not the start timing of the demo performance in step 132SGS403, or if it is not the start timing of the variable display in step 132SGS404, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the movable body to be controlled (step 132SGS410), and determines whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS411). If there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG412), and control of the movement of the non-detected movable bodies toward the origin is started by means of driving a motor corresponding to the non-detected movable bodies (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. Note that if there are no movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor in step 132SGS411, that is, if all movable bodies are located at their respective origin positions, the process proceeds to step 132SGS414 without executing steps 132SGS412 and 132SGS413.

In step 132SGS414, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detected movable body (the movable body placed at the origin position). Then, it sets the detection time operation process data of the detected movable body (step 132SGS415), starts the timer count of the detection time operation process timer, and starts the operation control of the movable body (detected movable body), as well as the display control of the image display device 5, the sound output control of the speakers 8L, 8Rk, etc., and the light emission control of each LED (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, it starts the timer count of the origin operation period timer and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS417).

Also, if the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the values of both the detection time operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). Then, it is determined whether the origin operation period timer after subtraction has timed out (timer expired) (step 132SGS421). If the origin operation period timer after subtraction has not timed out, it controls the operation based on the process data corresponding to the detection time operation process timer value after subtraction, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS422).

If the origin operation period timer has expired in step 132SGS421, the operation of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423) and the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body to be controlled is identified (step 132SGS424). Then, it is determined whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS425).

If there are any movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG426), and if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set, the flag is set and the origin placement control process is terminated (step 132SGS427). Note that if there are no movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, the process of step 132SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process is terminated.

Figures 31 and 32 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in the operation confirmation control process in Figure 29. As mentioned above, a cold start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 pressed, that is, the initialization process (step S6) being executed in the game control main process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a hot start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 not pressed, that is, the recovery process (step S4) being executed in the game control main process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

In the operation confirmation control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the post-confirmation operation in progress flag is set (step 132 SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation in progress flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmation in progress flag is set (step 132 SGS502). If the operation confirmation in progress flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmed flag is set (step 132 SGS503).

If the operation confirmation flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated, and if the operation confirmation flag is not set, it is further determined whether the startup origin placement control flag is set (step 132SGS504). If the startup origin placement control flag is not set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated, and if the startup origin placement control flag is set, the operation confirmation in progress flag is set (step 132SGS505), and it is determined whether there is a memory of an undetected movable object (step 132SGS506). If there is no memory of an undetected movable object, proceed to step 132SGS508, and if there is a memory of an undetected movable object, the operation of the undetected movable object is restricted before proceeding to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

In step 132SGS508, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the start type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a cold start or a hot start) and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the start type. In addition, in step 132SGS508, it identifies whether the cold start flag or the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, it identifies the start type as cold start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the cold start, and if the hot start flag is set, it identifies the start type as hot start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper) according to the hot start.

Then, the operation confirmation process timer (upper) starts counting, and the operation control of the movable body as well as the display control of the image display device 5, the sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emission control of each LED are started, and the operation confirmation control process ends (step 132SGS509).

If the operation check execution flag is set in step 132SGS502, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the operation check process timer (upper) (step 132SGS510) and identifies the process data corresponding to the value of the operation check process timer after the subtraction (step 132SGS511). Then, it is determined whether the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS512). If the identified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the identified process data is corresponding data of the performance position (step 132SGS513). If the identified process data is not corresponding data of the performance position, it proceeds to step 132SGS515, and if the identified process data is corresponding data of the performance position, it stores the performance result of the corresponding movable body's performance position sensor and then proceeds to step 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

In step 132SGS515, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process switching flag is set. If the process switching flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the process switching flag is not set, the CPU 120 further determines whether it is the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body performance is executed (step 132SGS516). If it is not the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body performance is executed, the operation of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emission of each LED are controlled based on the process data identified in step 132SGS511, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS517).

In addition, if it is the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body performance is executed, the start type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a cold start or a hot start) is identified, and the lower-level switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in Figure 33 is identified according to the identified start type (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the identified startup type is a cold start, image display control on the image display device 5 and LED light emission control are identified as the lower-level switching control types, and when the identified startup type is a hot start, image display control on the image display device 5 and sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R are identified as the lower-level switching control types.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower-level switching control type to lower-level process data among the process data identified in step 132 SGS 518 (step 132 SGS 219), and sets the process switching flag (step 132 SGS 520). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control based on the non-switched process data among the process data identified in step 132 SGS 218, and ends the operation confirmation control process (step 132 SGS 521).

Also, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection positions of the origin position sensors of each movable body (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) (step 132SGS530), and identifies a malfunctioning movable body from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) and stores the malfunctioning movable body as a movable body with limited operation (step 132SGS531). Furthermore, the operation check in progress flag is cleared (step 132 SGS 532), and it is determined whether the process switching in progress flag is set (step 132 SGS 533).

If the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132 SGS534), and all control process data is switched to the performance control process data (lower), and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132 SGS535). If the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132 SGS536), and if the target type is a cold start, the sound output control control process data is switched to the performance control process data (lower) (step 132 SGS536a). In addition, the chance button and the on-board movable body are identified as the movable body to be operated, and the post-confirmation operation process data (upper) is set (step 132 SGS537), and the timer count of the post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) is started to start the operation control and LED light emission control of the chance button and the on-board movable body (step 132 SGS538). In addition, the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132 SGS539).

Also, if the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set in step 132SGS501, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts -1 from the value of the post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS540), and identifies the process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value after the subtraction (step 132SGS541). Then, it is determined whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS542).

If the identified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the identified process data corresponds to the presentation position (step 132SGS543). If the identified process data is not corresponding data to the presentation position, the operation confirmation control process is terminated, and if the identified process data is corresponding data to the presentation position, the detection results of the presentation position sensors (protruding position sensor 635D and presentation position sensor 132SG124) of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A are stored and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

If the identified process data is completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the origin position sensors (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A (step 132SGS545), and determines whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548, and if the chance button 631B is not located at the origin position, the process stores the chance button 631B as a motion-restricted movable body and proceeds to step 132SGS548 (step 132SGS547).

In step 132SGS548, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position. If the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS550. If the on-board movable body 32A is not located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A is stored as a motion-restricted movable body and the process proceeds to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

In step 132SGS550, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the process data for movable body control and LED light emission control to performance control process data (lower). Then, the operation check execution flag is cleared to end the operation check control process (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the movable body control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (upper order), and the display control is executed based on the performance control process data (lower order).

Also, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the movable body control and LED light emission control are executed based on the process data for operation confirmation (upper order), and the display control and sound output control are executed based on the process data for performance control (lower order).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 34(C), during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control, operation control of the chance button 631B and the movable body on the board (movable body control) and LED light emission control are executed based on the post-confirmation operation process data (upper order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on the performance control process data (lower order).

35 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 28 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in FIG. 35, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a pre-reading notice setting process in this feature section 132SG based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11, and displays a reserved display notice performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot by the display mode of the reserved display as a pre-reading notice, and displays a panel image on the image display device 5 for one variable display of the second special pattern in the time-saving state A and four variable displays of the second special pattern immediately thereafter, and is capable of executing a panel performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot at different rates according to the display mode of these panel images. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a pending display preview performance, a value according to the display mode of the decided pending display is set as the pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be displayed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132 SGS 194A, and if it is decided to execute a panel display performance, a value according to the display mode of the decided panel display is set as the panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be displayed in the start winning time receiving command buffer 132 SGS 194A, thereby starting the display of these pending displays and panel displays (see FIG. 10 (B)).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance also executes a result performance execution process (step 132SGS162). In the result performance execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred since the first hit occurs and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are counted, and when the last variable display in the time-saving state (time-saving state A is the four variable displays immediately after the end of the time-saving state) ends and the normal state is controlled (during the pattern determination period), a process is performed to execute a result performance that displays the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out on the image display device 5. Note that, in this feature section 132SG, when controlled in the time-saving state C2, there are exceptional cases in which the result performance is executed from the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special chart to the eleventh variable display.

The presentation control CPU 120 also executes a breakthrough presentation execution process (step 132SGS163). In the breakthrough presentation execution process, for example, a breakthrough presentation is executed to notify that the time-saving state has been entered from the ending presentation of the jackpot game until the first variable display after the jackpot game.

After executing the processing of step 132SGS163, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, or step 132SGS177, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special symbol hit waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol for the symbol fixation period indicated by the symbol fixation command, based on receiving a command (any of the first symbol fixation command, second symbol fixation command, third symbol fixation command, and fourth symbol fixation command) that specifies the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol received in the variable display performance process.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation judges whether or not a presentation control command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11 at the end of the pattern determination period. Then, when a presentation control command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the presentation processing during a small win. In addition, if a command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it judges that the display result in the special chart game was a "miss" and updates the value of the presentation process flag to the initial value "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the waiting process for the special chart hit is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step 132SGS176 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "6". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process of step 132SGS177 is a process executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process is terminated.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 35. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received (step 132SGS601). If the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A is shifted up by one buffer number (step 132SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased. Also, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 132SGS602, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605) and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 132SGS606).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a remaining time-saving count display process (step 132 SGS608) for displaying the remaining number of time-saving controls (remaining number of time-saving controls) in the time-saving state on the image display device 5, a time-saving end countdown display process (step 132 SGS609) for displaying a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends (also called a countdown performance or time-saving end countdown) on the image display device 5 when the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number, and a variable display preview performance determination process (step 132 SGS610) for executing a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game status, and variable display result (step 132 SGS611), and starts the process timer (step 132 SGS612).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and chance button 631B are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as described later, an example of a form in which the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time-saving state is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage or the like during the variable display when the time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2 is being controlled, the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may not be resumed during the variable display even if the power is restored, and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may be resumed at the start of the next variable display (the timing when the value of the time-saving counter is updated). Also, even if the power supply is stopped when the time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2 is being controlled but there is no reserved memory and the variable display is not being executed (in a customer waiting state), the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may not be resumed even if the power is restored, and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may be resumed at the start of the next variable display or from the variable display after the value of the time-saving counter is updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (chance button 631B, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (132SGS613). For example, to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (132SGS614). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

(Flow of the performance)
Next, the flow of the performance in the variable display in this feature part 132SG will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, when the game state is in the normal state, the reach performance of the super reach performance is started by the progress of the variable display of the first special chart, and a predetermined period has passed, as part of the reach performance, an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, a movable body performance in which the under-board movable body 32B operates as part of the reach performance is executed, and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot (X6 to X10). After that, a notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player that the variable display result has become a jackpot, and then a right hit notification is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot game state is a state in which the game balls are shot toward the right game area to enter the big prize opening, and a round performance during the round game is displayed (X11 to X13).

When the jackpot game is a jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in Figures 38 and 39, when the jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending performance is performed, and then a breakthrough performance A is performed to indicate that the game has been controlled to the time-saving state A. During the execution of the breakthrough performance A, if there is a reserved memory of the first special chart, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special chart is executed in an extremely short special chart change time (0.5 seconds). In addition to being controlled to the time-saving state A, the breakthrough performance A executes a right-hit notification to notify the player that the time-saving state A is in a state in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area to enter the second start winning hole and the variable display of the second special chart is executed (A1 to A4).

When the player shoots the game ball towards the right game area in accordance with entry performance A, the game ball enters the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special chart begins. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel performance. Then, when the player continues to shoot the game ball towards the right game area and the game ball enters the second start winning hole, additional panel images corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special chart are displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel performance. Note that up to five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special chart currently being executed and the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special chart ("4").

When one variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A ends, the game state is controlled from time-saving state A to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol begins. In this variable display, when the decorative symbols stop in a reach combination, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8 to A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small win, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect in which the under-board movable body 32B operates is executed, and then the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a combination indicating a small win. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the game ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024 (B1-B3).

When the player hits the game ball towards the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that control will be given to a big win game (B4-B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss. After that, in the variable display corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memories of the second special chart, the image display device 5 notifies the remaining number of variable displays of the second special chart, and then an image similar to the first reserved memory of the second special chart is displayed (B6 to B8).

If all the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memory of the second special symbol are misses, during the final pattern determination period of the variable display of the second special symbol, an image indicating that all the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memory of the second special symbol have ended (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END...") is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, while the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 10 times. Also, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) (B9-B12).

In either of the time-saving states, the player hits the game ball into the right game area, causing the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special chart is mainly executed. After the big win game via the small win of the second special chart ends, the game is controlled to the time-saving state B or the time-saving state C2.
As will be described later, if the power is cut off and restored during the period of Fig. 38 (A1) to (A4), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display until Fig. 38 (A5), and the movable body performs an initial operation for 26 seconds. Also, if the power is cut off and restored just before the end of Fig. 38 (A4) (within 5 seconds until the end) and the display period of the start preparation display overlaps with the period of Fig. 38 (A5), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display from Fig. 38 (A6) onwards (the timing when the restoration display is not displayed is Fig. 39 (B3), (B7)), and the movable body performs an initial operation for 26 seconds. Also, if the power is cut off and restored during Fig. 38 (A5), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display until the variable display corresponding to the second panel is started, and the movable body performs an initial operation for 26 seconds (the first time-saving variable time is longer than 26 seconds). In addition, if the power is cut off and then restored in FIG. 38 (A10) (5 seconds or more until the end of the fluctuation) (miss pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to FIG. 38 (B7), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to FIG. 39 (B6), and the shortened initial operation (taking into account the button performance) from FIG. 39 (B7). In addition, if the power is cut off and then restored in FIG. 38 (A10) (win pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display up to FIG. 39 (B3), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation up to FIG. 39 (B2), and the shortened initial operation (taking into account "Aim for V") from FIG. 39 (B3). Note that the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e when the under-board movable body 32B is operating differs between the initial operation and FIG. 39 (B1).

Also, if the power is cut off and restored in FIG. 39 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the variable display ends) and the display period of the start preparation display overlaps with the period of FIG. 39 (B5), the image display device 5 will allow the user to see "Aim for V" after the display period of the start preparation display has elapsed, and the movable body will change the initial operation after the start preparation display is hidden to a shortened mode based on the main command (small win start command or small win open command) received in FIG. 39 (B3). Also, the large prize opening will start opening during the display period of the start preparation display. Also, if the power is cut off and restored in FIG. 39 (B3) (at the start (2 seconds left until the next round)), the image display device 5 will display a recovery display in a special mode (notifying that a small win has been won) until the open command (second round) is received after the V win (round 1), and the movable body will perform the initial operation in the normal mode (finished by the start of the next round), and the large prize opening will start opening during the display period of the start preparation display.

When the time-saving state B is entered after the big win game ends, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A or small win B, as shown in Figure 40, first, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination indicating a small win as the variable display of the second special chart. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the game ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024. When the player hits the game ball into the right game area during a small win game according to the image, and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that control will be given to a big win game (the "FEVER" image) (C1-C4).

Next, when the big win game via the small win ends, an image is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the number of winning balls won in the big win game as an ending performance. Then, after the entry performance B is executed in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 differs according to the number of times already controlled in the time-saving state, the first variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state B is started. In the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed while the background image of a night city (second background display) is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5 to C8).

If seven variable displays (seven variable displays of the second special chart) end without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win in the time-saving state B, a result presentation starts during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result presentation displays a value according to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the first win or one of the time-saving states, or the total number of winning balls. If there is a reserved memory of the second special chart at the start of the result presentation, a maximum of four variable displays of the second special chart are executed in an extremely short special chart change time (0.5 seconds) according to the reserved memory (remaining reserved memory) of the remaining second special charts (C9 to C11).

If none of the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved memory result in a big win or a small win, the image display device 5 starts displaying a stage background image, and also displays an image for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area. After this, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until 10 variable displays are completed (C12 to C14).

In addition, when the time-saving state C2 is entered after the end of the jackpot game via a small win, that is, when the time-saving state C2 is entered after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot E, first, as in the case of being controlled to the time-saving state B, the display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win, the display of an image on the image display device 5 displaying "Aim for V!", the display of an image notifying the occurrence of a V prize during the small win game, the display of an image indicating that the game is being controlled to a jackpot game (the "FEVER" image), the display of an image according to the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game, the entry performance B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is different depending on the number of times the game has already been controlled to the time-saving state, and the display of seven variable decorative symbols while the second background display is displayed are executed (C1 to C9 in FIG. 40).

Here, as shown in FIG. 41, when the seventh variable display of the decorative pattern (seven variable displays of the second special pattern) ends without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win, a result presentation starts during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result presentation displays a value according to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the first win or any time-saving state, and the total number of winning balls. During the execution period of the result presentation, three variable displays of the decorative pattern (variable display of the second special pattern) are executed in an extremely short special pattern change time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result is neither a big win nor a small win in the three variable displays of the decorative pattern (eighth to tenth variable displays), a further variable display of the decorative pattern (eleventh variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the 11th variable display does not result in a big win or a small win, the movable body 32A on the board moves and a light-emitting effect image corresponding to the movement of the movable body 32A on the board is displayed on the image display device 5. After the movable body 32A on the board falls, when the movable body 32A on the board returns to the standby position before it fell (the upper position of the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is dimmed (displayed in black). After the dimming ends, an image indicating that the time-saving state has not yet ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, on the image display device 5, an operation prompting image is displayed to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, a V stock effect is executed on the image display device 5 to notify that the number of time-saving control times in the time-saving state is 685 times, that is, that the variable display result during the time-saving state is essentially a big win or a small win. After that, when the V stock effect ends with the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays are started in a state in which the second background display is displayed on the image display device 5 (D7 to D9). In particular, as shown in FIG. 41 (D2) to FIG. 41 (D8), in the result effect during the time-saving state C2 to the V stock effect, unlike the result effect corresponding to the time-saving state B, the right-hit notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden in order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time-saving control continues to be executed even after the result effect ends. The right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 will resume from the start of the 12th variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
As shown in Figures 37 to 41, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a first reserved display area 132SG011 corresponding to the first reserved memory is provided on the left side of the active display area 132SG013. For example, in response to the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and in response to the value of the first reserved memory number being 4, four first reserved displays 132SG001 are displayed horizontally in the first reserved display area 132SG011.

When the game state is in the time-saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided at the bottom left of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above that, a second reserved display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second reserved memory is provided (see FIG. 92). For example, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013 provided at the left end of the display area, and in response to the value of the second reserved memory count being 4, four second reserved displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second reserved display area 132SG012.

In this embodiment, in order to consume winnings in order, if the second reserved memory is stored in the normal game state, the second reserved display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first reserved display area 132SG011, and if the second reserved memory is stored in the time-saving state, the first reserved display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second reserved display area 132SG012. However, for example, the first reserved display 132SG001 and the second reserved display 132SG002 may be displayed in the first reserved display area 132SG011.

In addition, a display area 5SL is provided at the top left of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4") and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, reserved display, small symbol, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, time reduction remaining display 132SG201, right hit promotion display 132SG430, etc. may be displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (upper layer) to prevent the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, small symbol, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer) to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed, even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32A on the board or the movable body 32B below the board covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command, thereby performing the variable display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern. Also, the performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command, thereby performing the variable display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED or the second special pattern LED, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable body will be described based on Fig. 42 to Fig. 44. Fig. 42 is a diagram showing (A) a state where the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state where it is located at the performance position. Fig. 43 is a diagram showing (A) a state where the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state where it is located at the performance position. Fig. 44 is a diagram showing (A) a state where the on-frame movable body and chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) a state where they are located at the performance position.

As shown in Figures 42 and 43, an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B are provided on the front side of the game board 2. These above-board movable body 32A and below-board movable body 32B are also called "board-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the game board 2. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 44, an above-frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. These above-frame movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also called "frame-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it cannot be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state, and the frame-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it can be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 42, the on-board movable body 32A is formed in a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32a with the letters "XXX" displayed on the front, and a support section 32b that supports the performance section 32a from the left and right sides, and is arranged to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A. In detail, the on-board movable body 32A is movable between an origin position at the front upper part of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 42(A) and a performance position at approximately the center of the front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 42(B), and a part (lower part) overlaps with the display area at the origin position, and the entire area overlaps with the display area at the performance position.

The on-board movable body 32A is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG123, and at the performance position by the performance position sensor 132SG124. A plurality of on-board movable body LEDs 9d are provided inside, and the front surface of the on-board movable body LEDs 9d can be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 43, the under-board movable body 32B is shaped roughly like a "fist" when viewed from the front, has a performance section 32c with a decoration displayed on the front, and a support section 32d that supports the performance section 32c from below, and is arranged to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-board movable body 32B. In detail, the under-board movable body 32B is movable between an origin position at the front lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 43(A) and a performance position at approximately the front center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 43(B), with a part (upper part) overlapping the display area at the origin position and the entire area overlapping the display area at the performance position.

The underboard movable body 32B is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG133, and at the performance position by the performance position sensor 132SG134. A plurality of underboard movable body LEDs 9e are provided inside, and the front surface can be illuminated by these underboard movable body LEDs 9e.

As shown in FIG. 44, the first performance unit 132SG100 has a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 that protrudes upward and forward from the upper edge of the opening and closing door frame 3a, and a frame-top movable body 132SG101 that is movable up and down on the front side of the base member 132SG105. The frame-top movable body 132SG101 is shaped to resemble a character (not shown) that is displayed in various performances of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and on the back side, frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R shaped to resemble the wings of the character are movably provided.

The first performance unit 132SG100 includes a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG102 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame-top movable body 132SG101, an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG104 for detecting that the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is located at the performance position, and a drive motor 132SG112 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG112 to the frame-top decorative part 132SG It has a drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits power to 132SG111L, 132SG111R, an origin position sensor 132SG113 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R are located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R are located at the performance position, and an above-frame movable body LED9f for illuminating the front of the above-frame movable body 132SG101 and the above-frame decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R.

In this way, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 can move vertically between the origin position shown in FIG. 44(A) and the performance position shown in FIG. 44(B) at the upper front part of the opening and closing door frame 3a (above the glass window). In addition, the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R can be changed between a non-deployed state in which they are stored at the origin position on the left and right sides of the back surface of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and a deployed state in which they protrude so as to spread out to the performance positions on the upper left and right sides of the back surface, and change from the non-deployed state to the deployed state in response to the upward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and change from the deployed state to the non-deployed state in response to the downward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101.

As shown in FIG. 44, the chance button 631B is made of a cylindrical member with an operation surface formed on the top, and is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction relative to the base portion 600A formed on the top of the operation unit 600. In detail, the chance button 631B is movable in the vertical direction between an origin position (see FIG. 44(A)) where the operation surface protrudes slightly upward from the base portion 600A, and an operation detection position where the operation surface is lower than the origin position, and is biased upward so as to be constantly held in the origin position; when the player presses the button, it moves from the origin position to the operation detection position, and the pressing operation is detected by the button sensor 635B.

The chance button 631B can be moved vertically between an origin position (see FIG. 44A) and a presentation position where the operation surface is higher than the origin position, by a drive mechanism (not shown) including the advance/retract motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the advance/retract motor 635F to the chance button 631B. In other words, the chance button 631B can be changed by the advance/retract motor 635F between a first operable state in the origin position and a second operable state in the presentation position, and can be pressed up to the operation detection position in either the first operable state or the second operable state.

The chance button 631B is detected by an origin position sensor 635C at the origin position, by a button sensor 635B at the operation detection position, and by a protruding position sensor 635D at the performance position. In addition, multiple chance button LEDs 9g are provided inside, and these chance button LEDs 9g can illuminate the operation surface.

In this embodiment, the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2 is exemplified by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, and the frame-side movable body provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a is exemplified by the chance button 631B and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side movable body and the frame-side movable body are not limited to those described above, and the number, position, shape, and operation mode of each can be changed in various ways.

[Various performances]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 45 to Fig. 46. Fig. 45 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. Fig. 46 (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during the variable display period of the SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 45, the performance control CPU 120 can execute multiple performances. In detail, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "pre-reading movable object forecast" that suggests the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display (also called a target change) that is the subject of the pre-reading forecast before that variable display starts.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "start-time announcement," a "pseudo consecutive announcement," a "moving object announcement," a "reach announcement," and a "button announcement" as advance announcements that indicate that the variable display will be controlled to a jackpot.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a "win/lose button presentation" as a deciding presentation that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in a variable display based on a super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E, etc.).

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute the following jackpot presentations during a jackpot game state: a fanfare presentation, a round presentation, a promotion presentation, and an ending presentation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute "time-saving performance" and "result performance" as time-saving performances that can be executed in the special states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a "customer waiting demo presentation" as a standby presentation that can be executed in a standby state where no game is being played.

As shown in FIG. 46(A), the "Start Notice", "Movable Object Notice/Pseudo Consecutive Notice", and "Reach Notice/Button Notice" are effects that can be executed, for example, before the variable display mode becomes the N reach mode and the N reach effect is executed, or before the variable display mode becomes the SP reach mode and the SP reach effect is executed. In addition, the "Win/Loss Button Effect" is an effect that can be executed in the latter half of the SP reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the "fanfare effect" is executed during the fanfare period from when the control of the jackpot game state starts until the start of the round game in which the large prize opening is opened, the "round effect" is executed during the period in which the opening control of the large prize opening is executed during the round game in which the large prize opening is repeatedly opened and closed, the "interval effect" is executed during the period in which the closing control of the large prize opening is executed during the round game, and the "ending effect" is executed during the ending period from when the round game ends until the jackpot game state ends. These fanfare period, round game period, and ending period are periods managed by the CPU 103. In addition, in the first round of jackpots C, D, and E, the large prize opening is opened in a small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time).

The "promotion effect" is also executed during the special round interval period from the end of the third round opening period of the large prize entry port in jackpots C, D, and E until the start of the fourth round opening period.

(Pre-reading moving object notice)
As shown in Figure 45, the "pre-reading movable body announcement" is an effect in which an on-board movable body 32A operates in multiple variable displays corresponding to pending memories that were not the subject of the pre-reading announcement performance, which is executed before the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) of the pending memory that was the subject of the pre-reading announcement performance is executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(A1), if a start winning occurs when the number of reserved memories for the first special pattern is "2" and a variable display is being executed, and a decision is made to execute a pre-reading movable body announcement based on the fact that the variable display based on the reserved memory prior to the start winning is a non-reach miss (i.e., the special pattern change time is 12 seconds or less), then after the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 47(A2)), when the reserved memory is consumed and the variable display is started, the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the effect display 132SG401 emphasizing the on-board movable body 32A is displayed and a sound effect is output (see FIG. 47(A3)), and then it returns to the origin position before the variable display is stopped (see FIG. 47(A4)). This action is performed when the variable display that is executed before the start of the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-reading preview performance is started, and when the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-reading preview performance is started (see Figures 47 (A5) to (A7)).

In this embodiment, the pre-reading movable body announcement is an example of a presentation pattern in which the pre-reading movable body announcement continues across multiple variable displays until the target change begins, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a presentation pattern with a low expectation level in which the pre-reading movable body announcement ends before the target change begins may be executed. In addition, multiple presentation patterns with different jackpot expectations may be executed depending on the moving speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(Announcement at the start)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "start notice" is an effect that indicates whether the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display starts. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is set to white as a standard color and can be changed to blue, green, and red, and the display color at the end of the start notice indicates the probability of a big win. In this embodiment, a presentation pattern that ends with white, a presentation pattern that ends with blue, a presentation pattern that ends with green, and a presentation pattern that ends with red are executable, and the presentation patterns with the highest probability of a big win are white, blue, green, and red, in that order.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B1), when it is decided to execute a start-up notice with the start of the variable display, the entire display area is turned off or becomes dark with low brightness, and the character display 132SG402 "!!" is displayed approximately in the middle of the display area (see FIG. 48 (B2)). Next, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become bright (see FIG. 48 (B3)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or enlarge, and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), the character display 132SG403 with a question mark is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be white (see Figure 48 (B3a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in blue, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged (see FIG. 48 (B4)), and when a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white in FIG. 48 (B3), the active display 132SG003 breaks and the character display 132SG404 "!?" is displayed, notifying the user that the final display color will be blue (see FIG. 48 (B4a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in green, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually changes from white to blue to green in that order and are enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) (B5)), and then when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), the active display 132SG003 breaks and the word "heat" 132SG405 is displayed, notifying the user that the final display color will be green (see Figure 48 (B5a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in red, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually changes from white, blue, green, and red in that order while being enlarged (see Figures 48 (B4) to (B6)), and then when a predetermined time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in Figure 48 (B3), the text display 132SG406 saying "Super Hot" is displayed above the active display 132SG003, notifying the user that the final display color will be red (see Figure 48 (B6a)).

In this way, the "start notice" includes an introductory part that is a period during which the user is aroused as to whether or not the hold display will change (see FIG. 48 (B2) to (B6)), and a result notification part that is a period during which the user is notified of the result of the hold display change (see FIG. 48 (B3a), (B4a), (B5a), (B6a)).

In this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot is suggested by changing the display mode such as the display color and size of the active display 132SG003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected probability of a jackpot may be suggested by changing a display mode other than the display color and size. Also, the expected probability of a jackpot may be suggested by changing the display mode of not only the active display 132SG003, but also the first pending display 132SG001 and the second pending display 132SG002. Also, the change patterns of the display color and size are not limited to those described above, and other change patterns may be executable.

(Movable object preview)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "movable object notice" is a presentation in which the movable object 32A on the board vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the middle position and the chance button 631B vibrates before the pseudo consecutive presentation described later is executed in the variable display. The presentation patterns of the movable object notice include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the vertical vibration amplitude is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the vertical vibration amplitude is larger than the vibration (small) and the expectation of a big win is high. Depending on the variable display result, either non-execution, a "vibration (small) pattern" or a "vibration (large) pattern" is determined.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (C1), when the execution of a movable object announcement is decided with the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the pseudo consecutive performance starts, the movable object 32A on the board vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the middle position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see FIG. 49 (C2)). In addition, an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the movable object 32A on the board is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and performance sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a movable object prediction is executed in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable object prediction may also be executed in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is not executed (for example, a non-reach variable pattern).

In addition, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern A) before the start of the operation of the chance button 631B in the initial operation described later, or together with the advance operation. In addition, as a performance during the change, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern B) to indicate the degree of expectation, or to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern C) as a decoration (liven up) when a jackpot is hit or when the movable body is moving. Each of these patterns A, B, and C has a different vibration mode (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, and movement time), as well as a different lamp mode (pattern A: initial emphasis, pattern B: high-speed white flashing, high-speed red flashing, pattern C: rainbow color, lighting in a color corresponding to the effect displayed when the movable body is moving) and sound output mode (pattern A: initialization notification or no sound, pattern B: background music during change, pattern C: congratulatory sound at the time of the jackpot, movable body performance sound).

As described below, the initial highlight mode is a lighting pattern (brightness, lighting time, etc.) that is dedicated to the initial action, and is therefore a lighting pattern that is not used in any performance action control (see Figure 56 (B)).

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that suggests whether or not the variable display will resume after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, that is, whether or not one variable display will be pseudo-shown as multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive presentation includes a double pattern in which the variable display is resumed twice, and a triple pattern in which the variable display is resumed three times and has a higher chance of winning than the double pattern, and either the double pattern or the triple pattern is determined depending on the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(C1), when a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed is started, if it is decided to execute a movable object prediction, the movable object prediction is executed (see FIG. 49(C2)). After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 49(C3)), and after a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49(C4)), a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is decelerated and displayed just before the stop display position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 49(C5)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 49 (C6)), and then the variable display of the decorative patterns is resumed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and a variable display result of a miss is displayed (see FIG. 49 (C10)).

In addition, in FIG. 49 (C7), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo consecutive announcement of a double pattern, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are temporarily displayed as stopped (see FIG. 49 (C8)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see FIG. 49 (C9)), and progressing to an SP reach performance.In addition, in FIG. 49 (C7), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo consecutive announcement of a triple pattern, the flow of FIG. 49 (C3) to (C7) is repeated, and then in FIG. 49 (C8) and (C9), the reach mode is reached, and progressing to an SP reach performance.

In this way, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" includes an introductory part that is a period to tease whether or not the variable display will resume (see Fig. 49 (C3) to (B5)), and a result notification part that is a period to notify the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed (see Fig. 49 (C6), (C10), (C9)).

(Reach notice)
As shown in Figure 45, the "reach preview" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun and the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is then displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, in other words, whether or not a reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (D1), after the variable display is started, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed stationary (see FIG. 50 (D2)), and then, before the stationary display position in the variably displayed right decorative pattern display area 5R, the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started (see FIG. 50 (D3)). Then, when the operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display is started, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has elapsed, if the reach state is not reached, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L passes the stationary display position and the next decorative pattern is displayed stationary (see FIG. 50 (D4), (D5), (D7)), and if the reach state is reached, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed stationary at the stationary display position (see FIG. 50 (D4), (D5), (D6)).

The reach mode is a mode (also called a reach performance) in which, from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed stationary, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

(Button Preview)
As shown in Figure 45, when the above-mentioned reach prediction is executed, the "button prediction" is executed from the time when the decelerating display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins in the right decorative pattern display area 5R until a specified operation valid period has elapsed, and is a presentation that promotes button operation to determine whether or not a reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Fig. 50 (D4) to (D5), this is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the chance button 631B from when the deceleration display of the decorative pattern begins until a predetermined effective operation period has elapsed, and begins with the display of an operation promotion display and a button image imitating the chance button 631B, and ends when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the effective operation period, or when no operation is detected and the effective operation period has elapsed, with the operation promotion display and button image no longer displayed.

The presentation patterns (operation promotion modes) of the button announcement include a "long press pattern" that encourages the player to press and hold the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, a "continuous hit pattern" that encourages the player to repeatedly hit the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that encourages the player to press the chance button 631B once. Depending on the variable display result, either non-execution, "long press pattern," "continuous hit pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set. The operation promotion display is "Long press!" in the "long press pattern," "continuous hit!" in the "continuous hit pattern," and "Press!" in the "single hit pattern."

In this way, the "button announcement" includes an operation promotion part that serves as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 50 (D5)), and a result notification part that serves as a period for notifying the user of the result of whether or not the operation has resulted in a reach state (see FIG. 50 (D6) and (D7)).

(Win/lose button effect)
As shown in Figure 45, the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" is a presentation that prompts the user to operate a button to determine whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot at the end of the SP Reach presentation in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern, and notifies the user of the result of whether or not it will be a jackpot.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E1), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, a reach title, which is a type of SP reach performance, is announced, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 51 (E2) and (E3)), and then, from the timing when the battle is concluded until a predetermined effective operation period has elapsed, an operation prompting display 132SG411 consisting of the characters "PRESS!!" to prompt the operation of the chance button 631B, and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B are displayed (see FIG. 51 (E4)).

When the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 132SG411 and the button display 132SG412 are hidden and the game ends. When the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 9e is lit in a predetermined light color while the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, the effect display 132SG413 that emphasizes the underboard movable body 32B is displayed and a predetermined performance sound effect is output, and it is announced that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 51 (E5)). After that, an image (not shown) indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, and then the combination of jackpot confirmation patterns is displayed to announce that a jackpot has been achieved (see FIG. 51 (E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a display 132SG414 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle against the enemy character, after which it is announced that the variable display result is a miss (see Figure 51 (E10) to (E12)).

The possible presentation patterns are one in which the operation prompt display is displayed while the chance button 631B remains in the origin position, and one in which the chance button 631B moves from the origin position to the presentation position and the operation prompt display is displayed, with a higher chance of winning than when the chance button 631B is in the origin position. The presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/lose button effect" includes an operation promotion part that serves as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 51 (E4)), and a result notification part that serves as a period for notifying the user of the variable display result of whether or not the result is a jackpot by the under-board movable body 32B (see FIG. 51 (E5) and (E10)).

(Fanfare performance)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "fanfare effect" is an effect that notifies information about the controlled jackpot during the period from when the jackpot game state is controlled to when the round game starts. The information about the jackpot is, for example, information about the jackpot type, the number of rounds, the number of balls dispensed, the game state after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A, B, C1, C2), and the like, and may include other information.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F1), when the jackpot confirmed symbol combination is stopped and the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the jackpot game state starts, and the display 132SG420 indicating that the jackpot has started is displayed (see FIG. 52 (F2)). Also, when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 54 (A1) and (A2), the frame-top movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the performance position, and after the jackpot game state ends, it is maintained in the performance position until the time-saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the type of jackpot (jackpot A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 that constitutes "BIG BONUS!!" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (for example, one character) and moved to the center of the display screen (see Figure 52 (F3) to (F6)). In addition, in the case of a 3-round jackpot, the character image that constitutes "SMALL BONUS!!" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (for example, one character) and moved to the center of the display screen (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the presentation position and displays a right-hit promotion display 132SG431 that encourages the player to shoot the game ball into the right game area (see FIG. 52 (F7)), after which the on-board movable body 32A returns to the origin position and displays a right-hit promotion display 132SG432, which indicates that the player should aim for the big prize slot (see FIG. 52 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part that serves as a period during which information regarding a jackpot is announced (see FIG. 52 (F2) to (F6)), and an operation direction announcement part that announces the operation direction of the ball-hitting control handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right (see FIG. 52 (F7) and (F8)).

(Round performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "round performance" is a performance in which winning information during a round is announced after the large winning port of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened during a round of play after the fanfare period ends when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F9) to (F11), during a round of play, a character display 132SG450, a round number display 132SG451 indicating the number of rounds, a winning ball number display 132SG452 indicating the number of winning balls in that round of play, a ball number display 132SG453 indicating the number of balls paid out from the start of the jackpot game state to the present time, a consecutive jackpot count/total ball number display 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls paid out during the jackpot count, and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 promoting right-hit operation are displayed.

If a jackpot occurs during the time-saving mode, the "Aim for the V!!" effect shown in FIG. 40 (C2) is executed in the operation direction notification part of FIG. 52 (F8). The "Aim for the V!!" effect also continues during the round effect period of FIG. 52 (F9).

The images displayed in the round presentation may be moving images, and each round may be a picture-story presentation in which an explanatory presentation of a character, an explanatory presentation of "FINAL BATTLE", or a story is presented. For example, if an explanatory presentation of character A is presented in the first round, an explanatory presentation of character B is presented in the second round, but if the power is restored after a power outage in the middle of the first round, a "restoration in progress" message is displayed until the first round ends, and then when the second round begins, the explanatory presentation of character A that was presented in the first round is presented again. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so by displaying it from the beginning in the second round, consideration can be given to players who want to see the explanatory presentation of character A until the end.

In addition, in the round performance, a PV performance according to the selected song may be performed. For example, if a PV performance (up to the chorus) according to the selected song A was performed in the first round, if there is no change in the song, a PV performance (chorus part) according to the selected song A will continue to be performed in the second round, but if the power is cut off in the middle of the first round, when the power is restored, a recovery display will be displayed (and there will be no sound) until the first round ends, and then, when the second round starts, a PV performance (A melody) according to the selected song A will be performed again. Also, if the selected song A is changed to the selected song B in the first round, a PV performance according to the selected song B will be performed in the first round, and then, a PV performance according to the selected song B will continue to be performed in the second round, but if the power is cut off in the middle of the first round, when the power is restored, a recovery display will be displayed (and there will be no sound) until the first round ends, and then, when the second round starts, a PV performance according to the selected song A will be performed. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so in the second round, a PV presentation corresponding to the default selected song A can be performed (for example, if the ball output display "150" is displayed during one round of play, when power is restored after a power outage, the ball output display displayed during the next round of play will be "0").

(Promotional performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "promotion effect" is a round promotion effect that notifies whether or not the round play will continue (round promotion) during the round interval in the third round play of jackpots C to E in which the variable display result of the second special pattern has become a jackpot display result, that is, whether or not the jackpot will be promoted to jackpots D or E (10 rounds), which have a greater number of rounds than jackpot C (3 rounds).

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (F21), the background image is switched to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the planned ball number counter display 132SG351, which indicates the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, are displayed, and the promotion effect begins.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball number display 132SG353 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 53 (F22)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B, an operation prompting display 132SG355 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 132SG356 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect is executed to encourage a single press of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 53 (F23)).

Next, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the pressing operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the movable body 32B below the board rises from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 53 (F24)), the friendly character attacks, the counter value of the planned ball number counter display 132SG351 is displayed variably (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 59 (F25)). Then, the planned ball number counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "1500", which is the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is displayed as a stop, and it is announced that the jackpot has been promoted to a 10 round jackpot (see FIG. 53 (F26)).

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the pressing of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, an image (not shown) is displayed in which the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position and the enemy character is not defeated, and it is announced that it was not a 10-round jackpot, in other words, that promotion to a 10-round jackpot has failed (see FIG. 53 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion effect" includes an introductory part that provokes the question of whether or not the player will be promoted (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)), and a result notification part that notifies the player of the result of whether or not the player has been promoted (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F27)).

(Ending performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "ending presentation" is a presentation in which the end of the jackpot is announced and information about the game state that will be controlled after the jackpot ends is announced.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F12) to (F14), if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round of play ends, a notification is displayed that the "FINAL BATTLE presentation" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A will be set), and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed, indicating to the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area and aim for the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, when the third round of play is completed, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state C1 will be controlled) (see Fig. 52 (F32), (F34)). In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the promotion effect (promotion failure) ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B will be controlled) (see Fig. 53 (F32), (F34)). In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the ninth round of play is completed, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B or time-saving state C1 will be controlled) (see Fig. 53 (F32), (F34)).

In this way, the "ending performance" includes an introduction part as an introductory period (see FIG. 52 (F12) and FIG. 53 (F31)), a time-saving state notification part in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified (see FIG. 52 (F13) and FIG. 53 (F32) and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part in which the operation direction of the ball-hitting operation handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right, is notified (see FIG. 52 (F14)).

(Performance during time-saving)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "time-saving effect" is an effect that notifies the user that a "FINAL BATTLE effect" or a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is being executed, that is, that the device is being controlled to a time-saving state (see FIGS. 38 and 40).

(Results Production)
As shown in Fig. 45, the "Result Presentation" is a presentation that notifies the player that the "FINAL BATTLE Presentation" or the "BATTLE RUSH Presentation" has ended, that is, that the control of the time-saving state has ended (see Figs. 39 and 40). Also, when the game state is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state, as shown in Figs. 54 (B1) and (B2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 descends from the presentation position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position.

(Waiting for customers demo performance)
As shown in Figure 45, the "waiting for customers demo effect" is an effect that notifies the user that the machine is in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is initiated when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of a waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without the reception of a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (G1), when the power is turned on and the initial operation is started in the initial operation control process, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed when the initial operation is completed (see FIG. 55 (G2)) (see FIG. 55 (G3)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on in FIG. 55 (G1) without any variable display, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is hidden and a customer waiting demo performance is started (see FIG. 55 (G4)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after a moving image is displayed that sequentially introduces the multiple friendly characters A to D (enemy character images may be included) that appear in various performances and the contents of the content (see FIG. 55 (G4) to (G7)), the image of friendly characters A to D gathered together is still displayed (see FIG. 55 (G8)), the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises to the origin position (see FIG. 55 (G9) to (G10)), and the first background display 132SG310 showing a daytime city corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the performance ends (see FIG. 55 (G11)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G12)).

When a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed multiple times repeatedly in the standby state, or may not be performed after it has been performed a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the form in which the various effects shown in FIG. 45 can be executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than those described above may be executed. Furthermore, the performance mode of each effect can be changed in various ways, and the effect may be executed in a mode other than those described above.

[Initial Operation Control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the sound will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 (A) is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the lamp and sound modes according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in FIG. 56 (A), the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing initial operation control that causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to perform their initial operation (initial operation) when the power is turned on (during cold start processing or hot start processing), and performance operation control that causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to operate in a manner appropriate to the performance during various performances.

"Initial motion control" includes "origin placement control (short initial motion control)" which includes non-detection motion control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is located other than the origin position, and non-detection motion control that moves the movable body away from the origin position when it is located at the origin position and returns it to the origin position from that position away, and "motion confirmation control (long initial motion control)" which is a confirmation motion to confirm that the movable body is operating normally, in which the movable body is moved from the origin position to the performance position and then moved from the performance position to the origin position.

In more detail, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the initial operation process and the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor, that is, when the movable body is in a position other than the origin position (for example, a specified position between the origin position and the performance position) for some reason (for example, when the movable body has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the play island, when the movable body could not be returned to the origin during the previous operation (for example, when an operation error (operation abnormality) occurs during the execution of the performance, such as when the motor is out of step, malfunctions, or gets stuck, and the movable body cannot be confirmed to be returned to the origin or cannot operate), or when the movable body has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine), the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control to return the movable body to the origin position. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable body is in a position away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable body toward the origin position.

In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 detects a movable body by the origin position sensor when executing the initial operation process, it executes detection-time operation control. For example, in cases where a predetermined operable range (e.g., play) is set between the time the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time the movement of the movable body toward the origin position is restricted so that the movable body is reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, the movable body may return to the origin and stop at a position further back than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection-time operation control is executed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

This detection operation control requires that the movable body be moved away from the origin position to temporarily release the detection state by the origin position sensor, and then returned to the origin position. However, since there is no need to move it to the performance position, the movable body is moved from the origin position to a detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. In other words, it is made to perform a reciprocating motion over a shorter distance than the long initial motion.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control in the initial operation process, and then executes operation confirmation control processing. Since the operation confirmation control processing is an operation control for confirming that the movable bodies are operating normally, it is an operation control that moves each movable body from its respective origin position to the performance position farthest from the origin position, and then returns it to the origin position. In other words, the movement to the performance position is the maximum advancement operation. In addition, the operation confirmation control processing of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B is the same as the performance operation controls 3 and 4 described below, but the operation confirmation control processing of each movable body does not necessarily have to be the same as any of the performance operation controls.

"Performance operation control" refers to the operation control of movable bodies in various performances, and includes multiple types of operation control with different types of target movable bodies and different operation modes. In more detail, 1. "Prediction" is an operation control that vibrates the movable body 32A on the board up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position before the target fluctuation such as pre-prediction movable body announcement begins. 2. "The relevant" is an operation control that vibrates the movable body 32A on the board up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position in the relevant fluctuation such as movable body announcement, and vibrates the chance button 631B by the vibration motor 635E. 3. "Big hit notification, round promotion, V promotion" is an operation control that moves the movable body 32B below the board from the origin position to the performance position in big hit notification, round promotion, V promotion, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 4. "Fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo performance" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position in fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo performance, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 5. "Big hit game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the big hit game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Operation promotion" is an operation control that moves the chance button 631B from the origin position to the performance position in the win/lose button performance.

In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as short initial operation control, it controls the moving body so that it always operates at a single (constant) operating speed based on the minimum control speed (low speed) set in the operation confirmation control. Note that these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the moving body, and are not common operating speeds when there are multiple moving bodies, so the minimum speed for each moving body may be different.

Specifically, the first movable body and the other second movable body differ in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, so even if the same control speed is set, the actual operating speed of the movable body differs. Also, even if a different control speed is set for each movable body, the actual operating speed of the movable body differs. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and the movable body is controlled to operate at the optimal minimum speed, so it is possible to reliably detect multiple movable bodies with different modes at the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control when performing a movable body performance in which a movable body is operated in various performances such as the pre-reading performance, advance notice performance, deciding performance, and jackpot performance shown in FIG. 45), so the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum speed in the performance operation control. However, as long as it is possible to check whether or not the movable body is operating normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the performance operation control do not necessarily have to be the same.

(Operation check control (long initial operation control))
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts (when the power is turned on), if the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (cold start process) of step S6 in the game control main process, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined startup preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Then, when a power-on command is received from the main board 11 after a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) has elapsed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification is started to indicate that the cold start process has been performed, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) has elapsed since the initialization notification was started, the initial operation control of the movable bodies (the movable body on the board 32A, the movable body below the board 32B, the chance button 631B, and the movable body on the frame 132SG101) is started (see FIG. 57(B)). In the initialization notification, as described later, each lamp (frame LED 9a, 9b, the movable body on the board LED 9d, the movable body below the board LED 9e, the movable body on the frame LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) starts to light up in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R start to output a predetermined initialization notification sound (see FIG. 61).

In the initial operation control, first, a short initial operation control is performed for each movable body (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101), and then an operation confirmation control is performed. In the following, illustrations of the operation modes based on the short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation modes based on the operation confirmation control will be described.

In the operation confirmation control, first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(B)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(D)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(E)). Next, the under-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), and then the on-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(G)). Next, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), and then the board-bottom movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends, and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

In this way, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation of each movable body is started in the order of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, since the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with part of the initial operation period of the chance button 631B, and the initial operation control of the above-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with part of the initial operation period of the below-board movable body 32B, the operation confirmation control period of multiple movable bodies can be shortened.

In addition, when the initial motion control of one movable body is being performed while the motion control of another movable body is being performed, while one movable body (e.g., chance button 631B, below-board movable body 32B) is stopped at the performance position, the other movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A, above-frame movable body 132SG101) moves to the performance position or the origin position, so that even when the initial motion control of two or more movable bodies is being performed in parallel, the motion of each movable body can be confirmed.

In addition, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing was explained above based on Figure 57. However, in the operation confirmation control during hot start processing, initialization notification using a lamp and sound is not performed, but the operation confirmation control is performed for the movable body in the same manner as during cold start processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during operation confirmation control flashes "red" during cold start processing (during initialization notification), is "off" during hot start processing (during recovery), and is lit "in a manner corresponding to the background image" during hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during performance operation control is lit "in a manner corresponding to the background image". Note that the background image (background display) is, for example, background images A and B, and when background image A is displayed and power is lost and then restored, background image A is always displayed, and the lamp is always illuminated in a manner corresponding to background image A.

In addition, the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position and during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position in the operation confirmation control is lit in "white" during cold start processing (initialization notification), hot start processing (recovery), and hot start processing (variable display stopped). On the other hand, in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control of the under-board movable body 32B in the win/lose button performance), the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position is lit in a first light-emitting mode (for example, a rainbow flash mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are lit in sequence at predetermined intervals with off in between), while the movable body LED of the movable body during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position is lit in a second light-emitting mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are lit in sequence at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the operation mode of each movable body is common to the operation confirmation control and the presentation operation control, the movable body LED of each movable body emits light in the same manner (white lighting) for the advancing operation and the retreating operation in the operation confirmation control (the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode are the same), while it emits light in different manners (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) for the advancing operation and the retreating operation in the presentation operation control (the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode are different), so it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine 1 that makes it easy to distinguish whether the operation confirmation control or the presentation operation control is being performed. In particular, in the operation confirmation control, the light emission color and lighting mode do not always change, such as in the case of a rainbow flash or smooth rainbow, making it easier to check the operation of the movable body.

Note that in FIG. 56(B), rainbow flash and smooth rainbow are shown as examples of the first and second light emission modes of the movable body LED in the performance operation control, but these light emission modes may be different depending on the type of performance.

In addition, the light emission brightness during operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness during performance operation control, which reduces power consumption when the power is turned on and reduces the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the brightness of the movable body LED is set to a low brightness, preventing the movable body's operation from being difficult to confirm due to glare.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), during cold start processing in the operation confirmation control (during initialization notification), a predetermined initialization notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R over the initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound that indicates that initialization notification is being performed, and is a different sound from the performance sound effects output in other performance operation controls. Also, during hot start processing (during recovery or variable display stopped), no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R (silent).

The menu/volume and light adjustment indication suggestion display 132SG480 (see FIG. 55 (G3)) is displayed during the valid operation period during which menu display and volume and light adjustment operations are validly accepted, and by operating the selection button 132SG35 while the menu/volume and light adjustment indication suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed, it is possible to display a specified menu screen (not shown) or adjust the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g.

In this embodiment, during the execution period of the operation confirmation control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), the menu display and the volume/light intensity adjustment are not controlled during the effective operation period, so even if the light intensity adjustment operation is performed using the selection button 132SG35 during the operation confirmation control, the light intensity of the various lamps 9a to 9g does not change and they continue to emit light at the brightness during execution. More specifically, during the operation confirmation control, the brightness of the movable body that is operating while emitting light in "white" (initial highlighting mode) at "low brightness" cannot be adjusted.

In addition, during hot start processing, it may be possible to adjust the volume and light intensity while the operation check control is being executed, allowing the player to quickly play in an environment that suits their preferences.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is not possible to display a menu or adjust the volume and light intensity during the execution period of the operation confirmation control, but after the operation confirmation control ends, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed, so that if the selection button 132SG35 is operated during the operation confirmation control, it is possible to check whether or not the brightness has been adjusted by that operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a command to specify the start of a big win or a command to specify the opening of a big prize slot is received during the period in which the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the display of a fanfare effect or a round effect may be started in a display layer lower than the recovery display 132SG510, and when the start preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the display of the fanfare effect or the round effect may be made visible partway through in the lower layer.

In addition, when a command to specify whether to start a jackpot or a command to specify whether the jackpot is opening during a jackpot is received during the display period of the start preparation display 132SG500, the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed until the next command (a command related to the start of a round of play) is received.

As shown in Figures 58 to 60, power outages may occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at various times, such as when the variable display is stopped and the machine is in a game standby state, when the variable display is being executed, and when a jackpot game is being executed. Although not shown in detail, at any time when a power outage occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may start up with a cold start process or a hot start process, but the operating state of each movable body, the light emission state of each movable body LED, background sound, etc. may differ depending on the time when the power outage occurred.

[Initial operation control during cold start and hot start]
Next, a description will be given of a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start and a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start. Note that, for a hot start, a description will be given of a case where the gaming state is in a normal state.

Mode 1 (Initial operation control during cold start)
As shown in Figures 61 and 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is started on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed from the start of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 has received the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in the initialization notification mode from the reception timing of the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, and the output of the initialization notification sound is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this feature section 132SG light up to indicate initialization, and then turn off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, background image command, or customer waiting demo command. After that, they repeatedly light up in red (light up) and turn off.

Then, 2 seconds (2000 ms) after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command from the CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the background image during the variable display stop corresponding to the normal state starts instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After this, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 starts as the initial operation control.

First, when the chance button 631B starts moving from the origin position to the presentation position 4 seconds after the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends (6 seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button LED 9g starts emitting light (white light) in the initial highlight mode from the start of the moving forward motion. When the chance button 631B moves to the presentation position, the chance button 631 stays at the presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After staying there for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B moves to move away from the presentation position to the origin position. The chance button LED 9g stops emitting light in the initial highlight mode at the end of the moving away motion of the chance button 631, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode (see Figures 63 (A) to (C)).

In addition, from the end of the advancement motion of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A starts to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A starts to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts to emit light in the initial highlighting mode (white light) from the start of the advancement motion. Then, after the specified period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A executes a retreat motion from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retreat motion of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to illumination in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, from the end of the retreat operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in the initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of dwell, the below-board movable body 32B executes the retreat operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the retreat operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and returns to illumination in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the over-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in the initial highlight mode (illuminated in white) while the over-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The light emission in the initial highlight mode of the over-frame movable body LED 9f ends at the end timing of the retreat motion of the over-frame movable body 132SG101 and returns to light emission in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a cold start in this characteristic part 132SG ends when 20 seconds (20,000 ms) have elapsed since the start of the advancement operation of the chance button 631B. Furthermore, after the operation (check operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, when 4 seconds (4000 ms) have elapsed from the timing of the completion of the operation (check operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g end their illumination in the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all initial operation control ends. In other words, the initial operation control at a cold start in this characteristic part 132SG is a control that is executed for 30 seconds (30,000 ms).

Here, we will explain the case where a start winning occurs after the initial operation control, and a variable display is started in which a movable body prediction is executed based on the start winning. First, as shown in FIG. 61, after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). Also, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state where sound output is stopped.

When a start winning occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R start to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period when the movable object prediction is being performed, an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction is displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the example shown in Figure 61, the movable object prediction includes displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound (movable object prediction sound) corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable object prediction may include only displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, and reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position. In addition, the movable object prediction may include displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, as well as one or more of the following: vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound (movable object prediction sound) corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction.

Next, we will explain the case where a start winning occurs during the initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on the start winning is started. First, as shown in FIG. 62, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is started from the timing of the start winning. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L, 8R start outputting background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

After the variable display starts, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the execution period of the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation control period of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, a movable body effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body preview, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 continues to be executed (see Figures 63 (D) to (E)).

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination state of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlight state of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination state corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all the movable bodies ends, the up and down movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the middle position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have been executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed from the timing when the operation ended (Figures 63 (F) to (J) and Figures 64 (K) to (L)). Note that while the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the speakers 8L and 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

(Initial operation control during hot start)
As shown in Figures 65 and 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is started on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, and based on this, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state from the reception timing of the power recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command. Note that from the reception timing of the power recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (silence).

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-under movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this characteristic section 132SG emit light in a color (e.g., white) corresponding to the normal state as an illumination corresponding to the background image in the normal state after the performance control CPU 120 has been turned off for one second from the timing of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the background image designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in the time-saving state (low probability high base state) or the probability variation state (high probability high base state), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-under movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g may emit light in a color or pattern different from that in the normal state as an illumination corresponding to the background image in the time-saving state or the probability variation state.

Then, 2 seconds (2000 ms) after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the background image during the variable display stop corresponding to the normal state starts instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After this, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 starts as the initial operation control.

First, when the chance button 631B starts moving from the origin position to the presentation position 4 seconds after the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends (6 seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command are received), the chance button LED 9g starts emitting light in the initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the moving forward motion. When the chance button 631B moves to the presentation position, the chance button 631 stays at the presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After staying there for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B moves to move away from the presentation position to the origin position. The light emission of the chance button LED 9g in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the moving away motion of the chance button 631, and the chance button LED 9g changes to emitting light in the default mode (e.g., white light emission).

In addition, from the end of the advancement motion of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A starts to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A starts to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light) from the start of the advancement motion. Then, after the specified period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A executes a retreat motion from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retreat motion of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

In addition, from the end of the retreat operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in an initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the specified period of dwelling, the below-board movable body 32B executes the retreat operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the retreat operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode (illuminated in white) while the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The light emission in the initial highlight mode of the above-frame movable body LED 9f ends at the end timing of the retreat operation of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to light emission in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 during a hot start in this characteristic part 132SG ends when 20 seconds (20,000 ms) have elapsed since the advancement operation of the chance button 631B began. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, unlike when it is started by a cold start, light is not emitted in the form of an initialization notification by the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, and an initialization notification sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For this reason, the initial operation control at a hot start in this feature part 132SG is a control in which the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are executed for 26 seconds, as shown in Figures 65 and 66.

Here, we will explain the case where a start winning occurs after the initial operation control, and a variable display is started in which a movable body prediction is executed based on the start winning. First, as shown in FIG. 65, after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output has been stopped (silent).

When a start winning occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R start to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period when the movable object prediction is being performed, an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction is displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, we will explain the case where a start winning occurs during the initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on the start winning is started. First, as shown in FIG. 66, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is started from the timing of the start winning. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L, 8R start outputting background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

After the variable display starts, the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the execution period of the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation control period of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, the movable body effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body preview, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 continues to be executed.

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination state of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlight state of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination state corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all movable bodies ends (initial operation control ends), the up and down movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have been executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed from the timing when the operation ended. Note that while the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the speakers 8L and 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

As described above, in this characteristic section 132SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the on-board movable body 32A (and the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B) are operated as initial operation control. Also, when a start-up winning occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction based on the start-up winning is started, if the execution period of the movable body prediction and the confirmation operation period overlap, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the movable body prediction are regulated as a performance operation of the movable body prediction. In addition, if a start win occurs during the confirmation operation when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction based on the start win is started, only the operation of the movable body 32A on the board is restricted as a performance operation of the movable body prediction.

By doing this, when a movable body prediction is executed with a variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control, the initial operation control is not hindered by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a performance operation of the movable body prediction, and the player can be notified that the movable body prediction has been executed by the display of a movable body effect on the image display device 5 and by the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) according to the movable body prediction.

In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 66, the pachinko game machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including the execution of a movable body prediction is started with a hot start, and when the execution period of the movable body prediction occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including a deciding performance (i.e., a variable display of a jackpot) is started with a hot start, and when the execution period of the deciding performance occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the under-board movable body 32B as the deciding performance and the light emission (rainbow flash) of the under-board movable body LED9e in a mode according to the deciding performance may be restricted during the execution period of the deciding performance. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the under-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial operation or as a deciding performance based on the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED9e.

In addition, in this characteristic section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 30, an example is given in which the presentation control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start timing of the variable display to place each movable body at its respective origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and variable display based on the start winning is started, the initial operation of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the initial operation of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

In addition, in this characteristic section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 30, an example is given in which the performance control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start timing of the customer waiting demo performance to place each movable body at its respective origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the start winning is started, and then the variable display ends during the initial operation period, and a customer waiting demo performance starts in response to the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body may be executed with priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body from being interrupted by the operation of each movable body to its origin position.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 1)
In addition, in this characteristic section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the operation of the movable body as the initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body prediction overlaps with the operation period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and after the initial operation control is ended, the operation of the movable body that is the target of the movable body prediction (in the case of this characteristic section 132SG, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, and 9c are displayed. b. An example has been given of a form in which light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview by the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the operation of a movable body as initial operation control, as shown in Figure 67, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the target movable body (the above-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, if the control period of the initial operation (operation control of each movable body and illumination of each LED in an initialization notification mode, and output of an initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R) ends during the execution period of the movable body preview, as shown in FIG. 67, from the timing when the control of the initial operation ends to the timing when the movable body preview ends, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the movable body preview, and a sound corresponding to the movable body preview may be output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the control period of the initial operation, when the operation control of each movable body is terminated but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in accordance with the initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R continue to output the initialization notification sound, if a movable body announcement is executed, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board and the chance button 631B in accordance with the movable body announcement is executed, while the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g do not emit light in accordance with the movable body announcement mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in accordance with the movable body announcement, thereby making it possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body announcement.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 2)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot. In this case, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of the movable body effect on the image display device 5, the light emission of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are described. However, as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot. In the case where execution of a pre-reading movable body preview is decided due to multiple occurrences of variable display during the moving body confirmation operation, if the execution period of the pre-reading movable body preview overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each moving body or the period of initial operation control, during the execution period of the pre-reading movable body preview, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5, and the operation of the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B), the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f and chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the pre-reading movable body preview, and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the pre-reading movable body preview are not executed. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the subject of the pre-read movable body prediction is executed after the initial operation control is completed, during the execution period of the movable body prediction during the variable display, a movable body effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction, and sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction.

By doing this, even if the period for executing the pre-read movable object prediction occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable object, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A or the chance button 631B as the pre-read movable object prediction will not be executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by excessive operation of the on-board movable object 32A or the chance button 631B after the initial operation control has ended.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 3)
Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, an example has been given of a form in which a movable body prediction can be executed to move the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position as a presentation suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a movable body prediction (second movable body prediction) can be executed again after a movable body prediction (first movable body prediction) as a presentation suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the rate at which the variable display result will be a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the movable body prediction is executed during the variable display (for example, the rate at which the variable display result will be a jackpot is higher when the second movable body prediction is executed in addition to the first movable body prediction than when only the first movable body prediction is executed).

In addition, in the case where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display in this manner, as shown in FIG. 69 as a modified example, when a start winning occurs during the initial motion control and a variable display that performs the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement may be executed after the initial motion control ends (the first movable body announcement may be re-executed). However, if the second movable body announcement has already started during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the second movable body announcement being executed may be executed as a priority, and the first movable body announcement may not be re-executed, as shown in FIG. 69.

In this way, if the second movable body announcement is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement is prioritized, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed even as the first movable body announcement, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body announcement due to the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement being hindered by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the first movable body announcement.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, a form in which the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview can be executed during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview may be the same (for example, the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview are both performed in such a way that the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position), or the operation modes of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview may be different (for example, the first movable body preview is performed in such a way that the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, while the second movable body is performed in such a way that the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and the preview position).

(Initial Operation Control Modification 4)
Furthermore, in the case where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be executed during the variable display as shown in Figure 69, as a modified example, as shown in Figure 70, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, control may be performed so that the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed, while control may be performed so that only the second movable body announcement after the initial operation control is executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 71, when a start winning occurs after the initial operation control and a variable display is started to perform the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction based on the start winning, that is, when the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed as the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction during the variable display, if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A stops midway during the execution period of the first movable body prediction due to a loss of synchronism or the like, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be controlled to start as the second movable body prediction during the execution period of the second movable body prediction.

In this way, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the next movable body preview, the second movable body preview, is executed, so that the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 5)
In addition, in Figure 69, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body prediction overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body prediction can be executed after the initial operation control ends, while if the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction is within the execution period of the second movable body prediction, the execution of the second movable body prediction is prioritized and the first movable body prediction is not re-executed.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 72, in the case where the execution period of the second movable body prediction occurs during the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction, the re-execution of the first movable body prediction may be interrupted at the start of the execution period of the second movable body prediction, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second movable body prediction.

In this way, when the execution period of the second movable body announcement begins during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect caused by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement impeding the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 6)
In addition, in the characteristic section 132SG, an example is given of a form in which the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position as an initial motion control, while the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and an intermediate position as a performance motion of the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-board movable body 32A may be operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial motion control and the performance motion of the movable body preview.

In addition, in the case where the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the performance operation of the movable body announcement, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation, the initial operation is continuously executed until the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, whereas when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the performance operation of the movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped according to the process data for the movable body announcement, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 73(A) and Fig. 73(B) as a modified example, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over the first period (1000 ms) by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the on-board movable body 32A being detected by the origin position sensor. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the performance position). Then, based on the on-board movable body 32A being detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124, the drive motor 132SG122 is driven in the reverse direction to operate the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Furthermore, the reverse rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position).

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 73 (B), for example, if a step-out occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position and the on-board movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 continues the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 beyond the first period because the performance position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the performance position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period from the start of the initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction from the timing of the judgment of the operation error. Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.
Also, as shown in Figures 74(A) and 74(B), when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as a performance operation of the movable body notice, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body notice to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a second period that is longer than the first period. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the performance position by stopping the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body notice. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124. Then, the performance control CPU 120 operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction based on the process data of the movable body notice while the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body notice. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74(B), for example, if a step-out occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position and the on-board movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 continues to drive the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body preview until the timing when the second period has elapsed. In other words, at the end timing of the second period, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body preview, regardless of whether or not the on-board movable body 32A has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124.

If the performance position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the second period from the start of the initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction from the timing of the determination of the operation error. Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, if a movable object prediction is executed during gameplay after the initial motion control has ended, even if the operation of the on-board movable object 32A corresponding to the movable object prediction is not performed normally, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as the initial motion control (confirmation operation) is not executed, making it possible to reduce the decrease in the presentation effect of the movable object prediction that was not performed normally.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 7)
In addition, in the above-mentioned variant example 6, an example was given of a form in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A when the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 as the initial operation control, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A as the initial operation control, it is possible to only display the effect on the image display device 5, light up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and output sound corresponding to the movable body announcement from the speakers 8L and 8R without operating the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body announcement execution period during the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75 as variant 7, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 1000 ms as initial operation control, and is also capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position toward the origin position over 2000 ms.

Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred and then can execute the initial operation control multiple times.

Here, if the performance control CPU 120 executes four initial motion controls and judges all of them to be errors, it stores the on-board movable body 32A as a motion-restricted movable body by the fourth initial motion control (dead end judgment). After that, the performance control CPU 120 operates the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position for 3000 ms as a special initial motion control, and then operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position for 6000 ms.

After that, when a start winning occurs and a variable display that executes a movable object prediction based on the start winning is started, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the on-board movable object 32A is stored as a movement-restricted movable object, does not operate the on-board movable object 32A during the movable object prediction execution period, and only displays effects on the image display device 5, lights up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputs sounds corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As described above, by not operating the on-board movable body 32A that has been determined to be a dead end as a movable body preview, while displaying effects on the image display device 5, lighting up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputting sound corresponding to the movable body preview from the speakers 8L, 8R, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by operating the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body preview, while suppressing a decrease in the presentation effect of the movable body preview.

The configurations described in the above modified examples 1 to 7 may be added to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Alternatively, a part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may be changed to at least one of the configurations of modified examples 1 to 7. In other words, modified examples 1 to 7 can be added to or changed to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment in any one of multiple modifications, or in a combination of multiple modifications.

Mode 2 (Initial operation control modification 8)
In addition, in the characteristic section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 16, when variable display is not executed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer waiting demo designation command to the presentation control board 12, thereby executing a customer waiting demo presentation on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 76, FIG. 77, and FIG. 78, in any of the cases where the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, where the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability low base state (normal state), and where the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a high base state (time-saving state), the presentation control CPU 120 may receive a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the start of the pachinko game machine 1, while the customer waiting demo presentation itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation has ended.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the customer waiting demo performance image (the demo movie shown in Figures 76, 77, and 78) displayed on the image display device 5 from being reduced due to the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) operating as the initial operation control obstructing the image.

Note that Figures 76, 77, and 78 show an example in which the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed may be set to 30 seconds or later, which is the period required for the initial operation of each movable body, thereby providing a sufficient period between the initial operation of each movable body and the customer waiting demo performance, and preventing the visibility of the customer waiting demo performance from being hindered.

Furthermore, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start. Regardless of whether the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance may be executed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body, thereby preventing the customer waiting demo performance from being hindered by the movable body operating as the initial operation.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 9)
In the above-mentioned modified example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the performance control CPU 120 judges that the on-board movable body 32A is in a dead end state, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated as a movable body notice, but an effect is displayed on the image display device 5, LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are turned on, and sounds corresponding to the movable body notice are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 79 as variant example 9, if the performance control CPU 120 performs a dead end determination for the on-board movable body 32A, when the customer-waiting demo performance is executed after the special initial operation is completed, the on-board movable body 32A may not be operated, but effects corresponding to the customer-waiting demo performance may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be lit up in accordance with the customer-waiting demo performance.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent a breakdown caused by forcing the on-board movable body 32A to operate forcibly as part of a customer waiting demo performance in a situation where the on-board movable body 32A is not operating normally, while at the same time reducing the performance effect of the customer waiting demo performance.

Form 3 (power cut just before the big win fluctuation ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the big win fluctuation will be described with reference to Fig. 80. Fig. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the operation confirmation control in the case where the power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the big win fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 80, after the variable display based on the jackpot variable pattern is started, the combination of jackpot confirmation patterns is displayed statically in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends just before the variable display ends (for example, when the variable display is resumed and a re-lottery performance is executed after the combination of jackpot confirmation patterns is temporarily displayed, or during the pattern confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative patterns are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative patterns begins in the next variable display, approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), and then the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)). Although the jackpot variable display resumes, the variable display ends immediately and control of the jackpot game state begins.

Therefore, while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing, the power outage recovery command and the pattern determination command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received, and then the fanfare effect is started based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the jackpot start command.

In detail, until a predetermined time (e.g., about 1000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command and the pattern determination command were received, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g and the output of background sound (BGM) are restricted. In other words, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and the background sound (BGM) is not output.

After that, when a jackpot start command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) begins. In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the jackpot start command was received, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) begins. Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) is displayed as a black screen until a predetermined time (e.g., 1500 ms) has elapsed since its start.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the fanfare performance (introduction part) ends, and the fanfare performance (right hit notification part) starts.

As shown in Figures 52 (F7) and (F8), in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, right-hit promotion displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball into the right game area, and a right-hit operation promotion presentation is performed. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the right-hit notification part starts, the visibility of the right-hit notification part in the fanfare presentation, such as the right-hit promotion display 132SG431, will be hindered by the movable body operating due to the initial operation, and there is a risk that the player will suffer a disadvantage by not performing the right-hit operation.

In addition, in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 52 (F7), when the right-hit promotion display 132SG431 is displayed, a movable body performance is executed in which the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being executed when the right-hit notification part starts, it becomes difficult to determine whether the movable body is operating as the initial operation or the right-hit operation promotion performance.

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare performance is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare performance (right hit notification part) that involves the operation of the movable body 32A on the board is started. This prevents the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the right hit notification part in the fanfare performance, or making it difficult to distinguish whether the initial operation or the right hit operation promotion performance is operating.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare performance is executed, the introductory part period and the initial operation period of the fanfare performance are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period from when the fanfare performance starts to when the right-hit promotion performance starts (see Figure 52 (F1) to (F6)).

In addition, in the introductory part of the fanfare effect, when announcing which of the multiple types of jackpots A to E has occurred, it is possible to display the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type being controlled, and the pre-jackpot type display introduction display 132SG422 before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed.In the operation confirmation control, the initial operation ends before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 in FIG. 52 (F6), so that even if operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare effect, it is possible to know which type of jackpot has been controlled to.

When the fanfare performance is executed, the LEDs 9d, 9e, 9f, and 9g of the movable body above the board, the LEDs 9d, 9e, 9f, and the chance button LEDs 9g that are performing their initial operation light up in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the LEDs 9d, 9e, 9f, and the chance button LEDs 9g that are not operating under the operation confirmation control light up in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part) (for example, blue-based colors for a 3R jackpot and red-based colors for a 10R jackpot), but the initial highlighting mode (white light) is not used in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part). Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control even during the fanfare performance.

In addition, when the first movable body is moving due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in an illumination mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is performing the initial operation even during the fanfare performance.

In addition, when a fanfare performance is being performed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first brightness in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance, while during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness), thereby reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

The duty ratio of all movable body LEDs may be reduced from the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to be initialized is placed at the origin position), or the duty ratio may be reduced until a specified time has elapsed.

In addition, when the first movable body is operating due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlighting mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlighting mode, making it possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating due to the operation confirmation control.

The movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation is illuminated in a common initial highlight mode (white light) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the performance operation control can be illuminated in different light emission modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Specifically, during the advance operation, the movable body LED is illuminated in a first mode (for example, a wave mode in which the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the attacca LED 9c, the movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc. are used to light up in stages from one side to the other side at a predetermined cycle), and during the retreat, the movable body LED is illuminated in a second mode (for example, a flash mode in which the movable body flashes at a fast cycle (such as 30 ms)). In this way, it is easy to determine whether the operation confirmation control or the performance operation control is being performed based on the initial highlight mode (white light) and the mode corresponding to the performance.

In addition, in the movable body performance executed in the right hit notification part of the fanfare performance, the movable body 32A on the board operates in a common operating mode (descending from the origin position to the performance position) with the initial operation, and in the initial operation, the movable body LED emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), and in the movable body performance, it emits light in a mode that is different from the initial highlighting mode (white light) and corresponds to the right hit notification part, and when the movable body operates in the initial operation, the sound output is restricted, and in the movable body performance executed in the right hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right hit notification part is output. In this way, it is easy to determine whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed, depending on the initial highlighting mode and the mode corresponding to the right hit notification part.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance executed in the right hit notification part is the same as the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance and the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation may have only some operating modes in common, or may have all operating modes in common. Furthermore, the operating modes of both may all be different.

In addition, when executing a movable body performance in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare performance, it is possible to operate the movable body by a special action and display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance, and if the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is possible to determine that there is an action error and perform the action confirmation control again, and if the action confirmation control has been performed for a specific period of time, when the movable body performance is executed, the special action is restricted while the effect display is displayed. In this way, it is possible to show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by the effect display, while preventing the initial action from being hindered by the special action.

Form 4 (power cut immediately after fanfare begins)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power failure occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Fig. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where the power failure occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance.

As shown in FIG. 81, after the combination of jackpot confirmation patterns is displayed statically in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the variable display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the variable display ends, the pattern confirmation display period ends and the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command, and the jackpot fanfare performance begins. After a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance begins, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

Immediately after the fanfare effect starts is, in detail, immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the jackpot, and immediately after the CPU 103 recovers and the CPU 120 for controlling the effect receives the jackpot start command and starts the fanfare effect (introduction part). However, after starting with a hot start, only the power outage recovery command is sent with the recovery of the CPU 103, so the CPU 120 for controlling the effect cannot determine what state the game is in (whether it is in the fanfare period or not, etc.) until it receives the command to specify that the jackpot opening is open. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the text "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the fact that the power outage is being restored is notified until the next command is received, that is, for the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control is started during the remaining period of the fanfare that notifies the player that the power outage is being restored, and ends before the fanfare period ends and a round of play begins. During the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control.

After that, when a command for specifying that the large prize opening is open is received for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first time has started, so the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot, and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot begins. The chance button LED 9g lights up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance has begun, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, in the operation confirmation control that begins during the remaining period of the fanfare, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial operation will light up in an initial highlighting mode (white lighting), but will light up at a lower brightness than when they light up in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). This reduces the power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while at the same time preventing the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm the operation of the movable bodies.

In addition, based on receiving a command indicating that the large prize opening has been opened, a performance corresponding to the round play (light emission and sound output corresponding to the music during the jackpot) is started. In detail, during the round play period, the large prize opening is open for a long period of time, allowing a large number of game balls to enter, and this is a period that is more advantageous for the player than the fanfare period or ending period of the jackpot, so a lively round performance is provided using images, lights, and sounds, but by ending the operation confirmation control before the round performance corresponding to this round play starts, the player can enjoy the round performance without having to worry about the movable body performing its initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect starts and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the fanfare effect period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the fanfare effect ends (see Figures 52 (F2) to (F6)).

The performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper board movable body LED9d, lower board movable body LED9e, and upper frame movable body LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light) in the cases where a power failure occurs during variable display and then power is turned on, and where a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and then power is turned on. It is possible to perform operation confirmation control in the cases where a power failure occurs during variable display and then power is turned on, and where a power failure occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then power is turned on. This makes it possible to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power recovery, except for the movable body performing the initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and then the power is turned on, the image display device 5 displays a common recovery display 132SG510. For example, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is not displayed when the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, but if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed when the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed. There are differences, but as long as at least the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 is common, the display modes of the other displays do not need to be common.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a big win and then the power is turned on, the right hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at the same timing as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs, only the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to display the right hit promotion display 132SG430 depending on the game state. Furthermore, the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 may be different when a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a big win and then the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode promotes the right hit operation when a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a big win and then the power is turned on.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and can illuminate the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies performing the initial operation in an initial highlight mode (white light). If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies not performing the initial operation can be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance, and the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating by the operation confirmation control even during recovery.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance causes the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies performing the initial operation to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), by controlling the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies to light up at a lower brightness during the fanfare performance (performance operation control) than in the mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (see FIG. 56 (B)), it becomes possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (music during a jackpot), so it is possible to notify the user that restoration is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the fanfare performance was in progress before the power failure.

In addition, the operation mode of each movable body under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of each movable body under the performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under the operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period) and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to determine whether the operation confirmation control or the performance operation control is being performed.

Form 5 (power cut just before the fanfare ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs just before the end of a fanfare performance will be described with reference to Figs. 82 to 84. Fig. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs just before the end of a fanfare performance. Fig. 83 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the operation confirmation control is executed for a fanfare performance. Fig. 84 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 82, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the jackpot fanfare effect that was started based on the reception of the jackpot start command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

In more detail, the timing immediately before the fanfare effect ends includes the timing immediately before the fanfare effect (right hit notification part) started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving a jackpot start command ends, in other words, the timing immediately before the fanfare period during which the CPU 103 waits from the time it starts controlling the jackpot until it starts controlling the round of play ends (for example, the timing approximately 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery command sent when the CPU 103 recovers and the large prize opening open command corresponding to the first time. Based on this, over the round play period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the music during the jackpot, the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner suggesting music selection, and background sound (BGM) will be output in a manner corresponding to the music during the jackpot.

When started with a hot start, if there is remaining time in the fanfare period (for example, about 1000 ms), the CPU 103 will receive a power outage recovery command based on its recovery, and then after the remaining time of 1000 ms has elapsed, the first corresponding command to specify that the large prize opening is open will be received. During the remaining time in the fanfare period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be turned off, and background sound (BGM) will not be output. The movable body LEDs may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the recovery period.

In addition, after the operation confirmation control of each movable body is started with the start of the first game, the operation confirmation control ends before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first game ends and the next round of play begins. During the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control.

After that, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command for specifying after the large prize opening is opened in the first round, and then receives a command for specifying while the large prize opening is open in the second round, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, and the movable body LED 9f on the frame emit light in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then emit light in a manner corresponding to the music during the jackpot that is output during the jackpot, and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music during the jackpot begins. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that the music during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the open state.

In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance, in the operation confirmation control that begins during the round play period, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial operation light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but because they light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control, the power consumption when the power is turned on is reduced, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while at the same time making the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies brighter than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to the difficulty.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power is cut off and then turned on just before the fanfare performance ends can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends, so even after the initial operation has ended, you can aim to win at the large prize opening without being hindered by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance, the opening control period of the special prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in the first play ends (see Figure 52 (F8) to (F9)).

As shown in FIG. 83(A), in a round game in which the big prize opening is controlled to be open for a specified period after the fanfare performance has ended, images for the round performance are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 indicating the direction in which the game ball is shot is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, and consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454 are displayed on the upper side of the display screen as round game-related displays.

Also, as shown in FIG. 83(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where only the support section 32b can overlap, the round count display 132SG451 and consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a and part of the support section 32b can overlap, and the winning ball count display 132SG452 and ball count display 132SG453 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform the initial operation will be explained with reference to Figures 84 (A) and (B).

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 83(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the presentation section 32a overlaps in front of the round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, and consecutive wins/total balls displayed 132SG454, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays. Also, the support section 32b overlaps in front of the right hit promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right hit promotion display 132SG430 (see Figure 83 (B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the middle position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but because part of the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 overlaps with the presentation section 32a on the front side, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454. However, because the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, and the number of balls output display 132SG453 do not overlap with either the presentation section 32a or the support section 32b, the player can see these displays (see FIG. 83 (C)).

When moving back from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advancement movement, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap with the right-hit prompting display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompting display 132SG430, which has a large impact on the game, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a round of play in which the big prize opening is opened to give the player an advantage, if the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball win by performing a right-hit operation while the big prize opening is open, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage, so it is preferable that the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 maintains visibility compared to other big prize information displays.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84(B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 83(A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the presentation position, and even after it has reached the presentation position, it does not overlap any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figures 83 (D) and (E)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display is the same when it returns from the presentation position to the origin position.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., the round number display 132SG451, the winning ball number display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, which has a large impact on the game, is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In addition, while the initial operation is being performed, the under-board movable body 32B does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.), so it is visible to the player.

In other words, in a round of play in which the big prize opening is opened to give the player an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or the initially operating under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball win by performing a right-hit operation while the big prize opening is open, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage. However, in this embodiment, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is difficult to see for a shorter period of time due to the initially operating on-board movable body 32A or the initially operating under-board movable body 32B, compared to other big prize information displays, so it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body performing the initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body not performing the initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance), but the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance), so it is possible to draw attention to the movable body performing the initial operation even during a round of play.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is performing its initial operation emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), and the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not performing its initial operation emits light in a mode that corresponds to the music during a jackpot (round performance). However, when the first movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a mode that corresponds to the music during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing its initial operation even during a round of play.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a round play in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power interruption occurs just before the fanfare performance ends, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) is the same as the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) in a round play in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power interruption occurs just before the fanfare performance ends. However, in the present invention, However, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play in which the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power interruption occurs just before the fanfare performance ends may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that has not been initially operated emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play in which the pachinko game machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power interruption occurs just before the fanfare performance ends. In this way, it is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

Mode 6 (power outage immediately after the start of a round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately after the start of a round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Fig. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately after the start of a round of play.

As shown in FIG. 85, after the big win fanfare ends and the round performance starts based on the reception of the big win opening command indicating that the first round of play (first round) has started, a power outage occurs immediately after which the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the big win game state is resumed.

In more detail, "immediately after the round performance has started" includes the timing immediately after the performance control CPU 120 has started the round performance based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, which indicates that the first round of play has started, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 has started to control the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately after (e.g., approximately 1000 ms later) when it has started to control the opening of the large prize opening in the round of play).

In this case, after being started with a hot start, only the power outage recovery designation command is sent with the recovery of the CPU 103, so the performance control CPU 120 cannot specify what state the game state is (whether it is in a round game period or not, etc.) until it receives the designation command after the first large prize opening. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). In addition, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing becomes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait for a while" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage is notified until the next command, the designation command after the first large prize opening, is received, that is, until the first round game period ends.

In addition, the operation check control is started during the first round of play when it is notified that the power outage is being restored, and ends before the end of the first round of play. During the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control.

Then, after receiving a command after the large prize opening is opened, which specifies that the period is when the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state, when a command during the large prize opening is opened, which specifies that the period is when the large prize opening has changed from a closed state to an open state, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first round of play has ended and the second round of play has begun, so that the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, and the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the music played during the big win, and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the big win begins. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner indicating that the music played during the big win can be selected from among multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the open state.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round performance and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, in the operation confirmation control that begins during that round play period, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial operation will light up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but they will light up at a lower brightness than when they light up in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). Therefore, while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, by making the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power is cut immediately after the start of the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play and then power is turned on can be terminated before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends, so that even after the initial operation has ended, you can aim to win at the large prize opening without being hindered by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play is started and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period of the large prize opening and the initial operation period in one round of play are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends (see FIG. 52 (F9)).

The performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control to cause the operating above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, and above-frame movable body LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light) in the cases where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on. This makes it possible to perform operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on. This can prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, the top-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power recovery, except for the movable body performing the initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, when the power is cut at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to the open state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and when the power is turned on afterwards, the image display device 5 can display the on-board movable body LED9d, the under-board movable body LED9e, the on-frame movable body LED9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are performing the initial operation in an initial highlight mode (white light). When the power is cut at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to the open state, and when the power is turned on afterwards, the on-board movable body LED9d, the under-board movable body LED9e, the on-frame movable body LED9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are not performing the initial operation can be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the control that controls the large prize opening to the open state, and the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating by the operation confirmation control even during recovery.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the round performance (music during a jackpot), so it is possible to notify that restoration is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the round performance was in progress before the power failure.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 6, if a power outage occurs immediately after the second or subsequent round of play (2R to 10R) has started, the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the above-mentioned first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) has started, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 7 (power failure just before the end of a round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the end of one round of play.

As shown in FIG. 86, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that was started based on the reception of a command to specify that the big prize opening is open, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has started, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the big prize play state is resumed.

In more detail, "just before the round performance ends" refers to the timing just before the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the first round of play has started, ends, in other words, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends control of the first round of play (for example, the timing just before the control of opening the large prize opening in one round of play ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the first round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the power outage recovery command and the first large prize opening after command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the first round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attack LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait a moment" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage recovery is notified until the next command, the second large prize opening after command, is received, that is, until the first round interval period ends.

After that, when the second big prize opening command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top board movable body LED 9d, the bottom board movable body LED 9e, and the top frame movable body LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first specified time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music during the big prize (round performance), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music during the big prize will begin. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music during the big prize can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the first round of play ends and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation check control is started during the second round of play and ends before the second round of play ends. The operation check control may be started during the round interval period in the first round of play. In addition, during the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is started during the second round of play following that round, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies are made lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period for the large prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control for the large prize opening in the second round of play is completed (see FIG. 52 (F10)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 7, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the second or subsequent round of play (2R to 10R), the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the above-mentioned first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) began, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Mode 8 (power interruption immediately after the start of a special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Fig. 87 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the large prize winning hole in all rounds of play is completed is 0.5 seconds, whereas when the jackpot type is jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize winning hole in the third round of play is completed is 30 seconds (see Figure 8), and during this special round interval period, a promotion effect (see Figures 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in Figure 87, after a power outage occurs just before the third round of jackpots C to E ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

The timing just before the third round of jackpots C to E ends includes, in detail, the timing just before the round that was started by the presentation control CPU 120 based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the third round of play has started, ends, in other words, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends the control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play (for example, the timing just before the control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), and the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the power outage recovery command and the third large prize opening after command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the third special round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage recovery is notified until the next command, the second large prize opening after command, is received, that is, until the third special round interval period ends.

After that, when the fourth big prize opening command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top board movable body LED 9d, the bottom board movable body LED 9e, and the top frame movable body LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first specified time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music during the big prize (round performance), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the music during the big prize will begin. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music during the big prize can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation confirmation control is started during the third special round interval period, and ends before the end of the third special round interval period. In addition, during the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize opening in the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation confirmation control is started during the third special round interval period, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies are made lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F29)).

In the above embodiment 8, a form in which a special round interval is set after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play is completed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round interval may be set after the opening control of the large prize opening in a round of play other than the third round is completed.

The performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control to cause the operating above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, and above-frame movable body LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light) in the cases where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and then the power is turned on. This makes it possible to perform operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and then the power is turned on. This can prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In addition, when the power is cut off at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and the movable bodies that are performing the initial operation, the LED 9d of the movable body on the board, the LED 9e of the movable body below the board, the LED 9f of the movable body above the frame, and the chance button 631B, can be illuminated in an initial highlighting mode (white light) when the power is turned on after the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state. In the case where the power is turned off at the same time that the power is cut off at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state, the LED 9d of the movable body below the board, the LED 9e of the movable body above the frame, and the chance button 631B, which are not performing the initial operation, can be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment), and the initial highlighting mode (white light) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (turned off). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating by the operation confirmation control even during the period when the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power recovery, except for the movable bodies performing the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 displays the recovery indication 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and is capable of executing an interval performance when the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during one round of play, and in the interval performance, the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B and the attacca LED 9c, can be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (interval performance), and also the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f and the chance button 631B, which are movable bodies performing the initial operation, can be illuminated in an initial highlighting manner (white lit). Then, if a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to a closed state (special round interval) during the third round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to cause the movable bodies that have not yet performed the initial operation, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c, to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery indication (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the third special round interval control, and the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval performance (music during big win). In this way, it is possible to notify that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage recovery designation command and a third large prize opening post-opening designation command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, during the third special round interval period, the image display device 5 displays the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (for example, turned off), and the background sound (BGM) is changed to a state corresponding to recovery in progress. In the above example, the display becomes silent and continues in this recovery state until the fourth large prize opening open command is received, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the interval performance is composed of an introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21)-(F23)) and a result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)-(F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control is performed before the result notification part starts. In this way, it is possible to avoid the visibility of the result notification part in the interval performance being hindered by the movable body performing the initial operation.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a movable body performance using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion performance in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and when the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance operation control in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates under the operation confirmation control, and it is preferable that sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates under the operation confirmation control, and that a sound corresponding to the movable body performance is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body performance. By doing this, it is possible to easily distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

In addition, in the movable body performance in the result notification part, an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance can be displayed, and the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B in the promotion performance (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally for a specific period, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the operation confirmation control again, and when a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state in one round game in which the interval performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and when the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance may be restricted while an effect display is displayed. In this way, it is possible to show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by the effect display while preventing the promotion performance from interfering with the operation confirmation control.

In addition, the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion performance (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under the operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advancement operation period) and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). In this way, it becomes possible to easily distinguish whether the operation confirmation control or the performance operation control is being performed.

In this embodiment, as an example of a movable body effect that is executed during the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended, the movable body 32B below the board rises to perform a promotion effect that notifies the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous for the player than a 3-round jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various movable body effects can be applied in addition to the promotion effect described above.

For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the game state after the jackpot ends becomes a probability variable state (a state in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than the normal state) based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 during a specific round of play during a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 88, as a movable body effect executed during a special round interval period, the under-board movable body 32B may rise to perform a V promotion effect that notifies the player that the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than a non-probability variable jackpot (a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot ends does not become a probability variable state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 88, if this V promotion performance is composed of an introduction part and a result notification part that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, if a power outage occurs at the same time that the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state, and then the power is turned on, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control ends before the result notification part of the V promotion performance starts.

Mode 9 (power cut immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed) <Modification>
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a promotion effect (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect as described above may be executed during a specific round play period (for example, the period during which the opening control and closing control of the large prize opening are being performed in the third round of play), as shown in FIG. 89.

In this case, the promotion effect is composed of an introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21)-(F23)) and a result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)-(F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part. If the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part notifies the player that it is a jackpot A in a promotion failure mode, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B (10R jackpot), which is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part notifies the player that it is a jackpot B in a promotion success mode. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion effect can be executed when the variable display result of the first special pattern becomes a jackpot (first hit).

As shown in FIG. 89, after a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of jackpots A and B, during which the promotion effect is executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

The timing immediately before the start of the third round performance in which the promotion performance is executed includes, in detail, the timing immediately before the end of the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on receiving the command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the second round of play has started, that is, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends the control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the power outage recovery command and the second large prize opening designation command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the second round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait a moment" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage recovery is notified until the next command, the third large prize opening designation command, is received, that is, until the second round interval period ends.

After that, when the third command to specify that the large prize opening is open is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first specified time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part) will begin. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the background music (BGM) corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part) can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacca LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation check control is started during the second round interval period (during recovery) or during the third round of play, and ends before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round of play starts. In addition, during the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the performance operation control (promotion performance).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control of opening the large prize opening in the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation confirmation control is started during the second round interval period or the third round of play, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in the performance operation control (promotion performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, by making the movable body LED provided on the movable body at a lower brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, it is prevented from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm the operation of the movable body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round of play begins.

In the above embodiment 9, an example is given of a form in which the promotion effect is executed in the third round of play, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect may be executed in a round of play other than the third round.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body performing the initial operation emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body not performing the initial operation emits light in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, since the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), it is possible to draw attention to the movable body performing the initial operation even during the promotion performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode that corresponds to the promotion performance (introduction part), making it possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the initial operation of the movable body will end before the operation prompting part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, that is, the operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B, begins, so the visibility of the operation prompting effect in the introduction part will not be obstructed by the movable body operating under the operation confirmation control.

The performance control CPU 120 also ensures that the operating mode (the mode in which the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position) is the same when performing initial operation and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance, and when performing initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlight mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is restricted, and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode, etc.), while sound effects in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) are output. This makes it easy to determine whether the initial operation or the promotion performance is being performed.

In addition, in the movable body performance in the result notification part, an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance can be displayed, and the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B in the promotion performance (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally for a specific period, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the operation confirmation control again, and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which the promotion performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and when the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance may be restricted while an effect display is displayed. In this way, it is possible to show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by the effect display while preventing the promotion performance from interfering with the operation confirmation control.

Mode 10 (power outage just before the end of the final round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Fig. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power failure occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play.

As shown in FIG. 90, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that was started based on the reception of a command to specify that the 10th round (final round) of play has started for jackpots B, D, and E, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot play state is resumed.

In more detail, "just before the round performance ends" refers to the timing just before the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the 10th round of play has started, ends, in other words, the timing just before the CPU 103 ends control of the 10th round of play (for example, the timing just before the control of opening the large prize opening in the final round of play ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the 10th round of play, etc.).

In this case, after being started with a hot start, the power outage recovery command and the 10th big prize opening after command are received with the recovery of the CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the 10th round interval period, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress. Please wait a moment" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and the power outage recovery is notified until the next command, the big prize end command, is received, that is, until the 10th round interval period ends.

After that, when a jackpot end command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom-board movable body LED 9e, and the top-frame movable body LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part) will start to be output. In addition, the chance button LED 9g and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off).

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation check control is started during the ending period and ends before the ending period ends. The operation check control may be started during the round interval period in the 10th round of play. In addition, in the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In this way, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the 10th and final round of play, operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies are made lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from becoming too bright and difficult to confirm.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the tenth and final round of play, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)) starts during the ending period, in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified.

In the above embodiment 10, the operation examples for the jackpots B, D, and E in which the final round is 10 rounds are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the jackpots A and C in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third final round play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and the initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (FIG. 52 (F13)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified starts during the ending period. In addition, the final round is not limited to the above 3 rounds or 10 rounds, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body performing the initial operation emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body not performing the initial operation emits light in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), but the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), so it is possible to draw attention to the movable body performing the initial operation even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable body performing the initial operation will light up in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating will light up in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will emit light at a low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode that corresponds to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

In addition to the movable body LED, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b are also configured to emit light at a lower brightness during the operation check control period than when they emit light in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to reduce the load by suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on without reducing the decorative effect.

Form 11 (power outage immediately after the beginning of the ending performance)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 91, after the round interval presentation in the 10th round (final round) of jackpots B, D, and E ends, a power outage occurs immediately after the ending presentation starts based on the receipt of a jackpot end command, and then the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot game state is resumed.

In more detail, "immediately after the ending presentation has started" includes the timing immediately after the presentation control CPU 120 has started the introductory part of the ending presentation based on the receipt of a jackpot end command, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 has started to control the ending period (for example, the timing immediately after the control of the closing of the jackpot opening in the final round of play has ended (for example, about 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, only the power outage recovery designation command is received with the recovery of the CPU 103, so the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine what state the game is in (whether it is in the ending period or not, etc.) until it receives the next command (for example, a customer waiting demo designation command, etc.). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). In addition, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes off, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait a moment" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

After that, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame-top movable body LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the high-base music (performance during time-saving), and the output of background music (BGM) corresponding to the high-base music (performance during time-saving) will begin. In addition, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off), and the attacca LED 9c will be turned off.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately after the beginning of the ending performance and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the operation check control is started during the ending period and ends before the ending period ends. In addition, during the operation check control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during the initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the beginning of the ending performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is started during the ending period, and the movable bodies performing the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), but emit light at a lower brightness than when they emit light during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), so while reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LEDs provided on the movable bodies are made lower in brightness than when the performance operation control is executed, preventing the movable body operation from becoming too bright and difficult to confirm due to the brightness.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified starts during the ending period.

In the above embodiment 10, the operation examples for the jackpots B, D, and E, in which the final round is 10 rounds, are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the jackpots A and C, in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and the initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (Figure 52 (F13)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified starts during the ending period.

In addition, the ending periods for jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpots) were explained above as examples, but the same operation applies to the ending periods for jackpots A and C (3-round jackpots), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and perform recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper board movable body LED9d, lower board movable body LED9e, and upper frame movable body LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting manner; white light) in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. It is possible to perform operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on, and where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. This makes it possible to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and can cause the movable bodies that are performing the initial operation, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white light). If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are not performing the initial operation can be lighted up in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (off in this embodiment) throughout the ending period, and the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (off). In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating by the operation confirmation control even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power recovery, except for the movable bodies performing the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable bodies performing the initial operation, but this light emission mode (turning off) is not used for performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). By doing this, it is possible to notify that recovery is underway when the power is turned on, even if the ending performance was in progress before the power outage.

Forms 12 and 20 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during time reduction will be explained based on Fig. 92 and Fig. 93. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when the operation confirmation control is started based on the occurrence of a power outage during time reduction and the subsequent power-on. Fig. 93 is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays (A), and the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays (B).

As shown in FIG. 92(A), when the time-saving state is B, C1, or C2, a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is executed as a time-saving effect. In the BATTLE RUSH effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a second background display 132SG320 depicting a nighttime cityscape corresponding to the time-saving state, and an image of an ally character and an enemy character facing each other. In addition, a performance mode display 132SG221 consisting of the letters "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen. In addition, the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 displays a time-saving remaining display 132SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 685) corresponding to the remaining variable display number controlled to the low probability/high base state, the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 displays a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 consisting of the characters "right hit" and a right-facing arrow, and the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 displays a consecutive number of jackpots/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, which shows the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive jackpots.

In addition, the display area 5SL at the top left of the screen displays small patterns corresponding to the first pending memory count, the second pending memory count, and the decorative pattern, and on the left side of the screen, an active display area 132SG013 and a second pending display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second pending memory are arranged in the vertical direction, for example, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and four second pending displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second pending display area 132SG012, corresponding to the value of the second pending memory count being 4.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the second hold display area 132SG012, in which the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 and the second hold display 132SG002 are displayed, is displayed in a position where only the support part 32b of the movable body 32A above the board can overlap, the display area 5SL, in which the second hold memory count display is displayed, is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a and the support part 32b can overlap, and the performance mode display 132SG221 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the consecutive number of times/total number of balls issued display 132SG454 and the time reduction remaining display 132SG201 are displayed in a position where they can overlap part of the performance part 32c and the support part 32d of the movable body 32B below the board.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 93(A) and (B). Note that in Figures 93(A) and (B), the description of the performance mode display 132SG221 and the remaining time reduction display 132SG201 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 93(A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the performance part 32a overlaps the front side of the second pending memory number display (display area 5SL), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the display (see FIG. 92 (B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the middle position and the second pending memory number display becomes visible, the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see FIG. 92 (C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but because the presentation section 32a overlaps with part of the front side of the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the second hold display 132SG002. However, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, second hold memory count display, consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, time-reduction remaining display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221 do not overlap with either the presentation section 32a or the support section 32b, so the player can see these displays (see FIG. 92 (D)).

When moving from the presentation position back to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advancement movement, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, or time-saving remaining display 132SG201, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 92(D)).

Next, while the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with any of the right hit promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), and the presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see these displays, but since the presentation part 32c and the support part 32d overlap with the front side of the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 and part of the time reduction remaining display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays (see Figures 92 (D) and (E)). Note that when returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the underboard movable body 32B overlaps with each display is the same.

In this way, if an initial operation is performed when the power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), which have a large impact on the game, is less likely to be hindered by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by right-hitting operation, which is advantageous for the player, if the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing an initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by right-hitting operation during the period in which the second start winning can be generated, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage, so it is preferable that the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) maintain their visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

In addition, while the consecutive number of times/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, the display state of the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings and advance notices. Therefore, the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B can prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which may change, from being hindered compared to the unchanged consecutive number of times/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454.

In addition, it is preferable that the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 due to the initial operation is greater than the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) due to the initial operation.By doing this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which may change, from being hindered by the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation compared to the unchanging consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454.

Also, as shown in Figures 93 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430, which has a large impact on the game, is less likely to be hindered by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by a right-hit operation, and this is advantageous to the player, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by a right-hit operation during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage, so it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains its visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

In addition, if the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to a predetermined performance operation control in the operation confirmation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the performance position), if a power outage occurs during the time-saving period, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and then restored, and an initial operation is performed, the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, while the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot. (e.g., consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454) is approximately the same as or longer than the time during which the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 overlaps with the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may be operated in such a way that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454) regarding the jackpot.

For example, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may be configured to move from the origin position to a position that overlaps with the second reserved memory number and the second reserved display 132SG002 and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 during the initial operation, and then move to an intermediate position and return to the origin position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the movable body operating during the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the second reserved memory number and the second reserved display 132SG002 and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

Also, as shown in Figures 93 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, so that each movable body is set to perform an initial operation, making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a greater impact on the game than the second reserved memory number or the second reserved display 132SG002, is hindered.

In addition, in the embodiments 12 and 20, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) was described. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control is exemplified in a form in which the total overlap time is compared with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs the initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs the initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Form 13 (power interruption immediately before the end of the change before the button notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 94, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variation pattern has started, the losing pattern combination is displayed stationary in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends just before a power outage occurs (for example, during the period when the losing pattern combination is temporarily displayed stationary, or during the pattern confirmation display period which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)). If there is a reserved memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will start.

Therefore, while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing, from when the power outage recovery designation command and the pattern determination command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received until the next command, which is the variable display start designation command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing becomes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and until the next command is received, that is, during the pattern determination display period, it is notified that the power outage is being restored.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, in the variable display preview performance decision process (step S132SG610), it is decided to execute a reach preview that teases whether or not a reach state will occur, and a button preview that prompts a button operation to decide whether or not a reach state will occur, and the variable display is started in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the decided preview performance, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the variation (background) is started. In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the performance image corresponding to the variation (background) is started.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage restoration command, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part is started, in which the result of the button preview is notified.

As shown in Figures 50 (D6) and (D7), the button preview (result notification part) notifies the player of the result of operating the chance button 631B as to whether or not the game has reached a reach state. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as the game reaching a reach state, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation that executes the button notice, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts, so that the visibility of the button notice (result notification part) is prevented from being hindered by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the button notice is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the button notice (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the button notice (result notification part) starts (see Figures 50 (D1) to (D5)).

In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed to start the next variable display, it is decided to execute the button notice in that variable display. When it is decided to execute the button notice at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the result notification part of the button notice is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., about 20 seconds). In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the button notice (result notification part) is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that the button notice is a specific fluctuation pattern in which the button notice is executed, a specific performance control command (e.g., a winning performance designation command that specifies the execution of the button notice) that specifies specific information regarding the specific fluctuation pattern is transmitted, and the performance control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the result notification part of the button notice is started.

For example, if it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a button preview is executed will be used when a start winning occurs during a specified variable display, a winning performance designation command (specific information) is sent specifying that it will be a specific variable pattern (with button preview).

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern determination command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state based on the transmission of the performance pattern determination designation command, and after the pattern determination display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern determination command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with button warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation that has a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation being performed.

In more detail, in the initial operation, the maximum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed in sequence (going back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while in the shortened initial operation, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed simultaneously (for example, returning to the origin immediately after passing the origin position). In addition, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one movable body is in the middle of a maximum advancement operation, that operation is interrupted and a retreat operation is performed, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body including the one movable body are performed simultaneously. Note that if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), switching to the shortened initial operation is not performed even if a specific variation pattern designation command is received.

For example, a light gathering effect (light gathering at the center of the screen to form a button image) can be executed immediately before the button image is displayed in the action promotion effect. Since the light gathering effect is an effect that uses a large part of the screen (an image that starts from the edge of the screen), it may overlap with the execution period of the initial action, and it is possible to conveniently notify the user that the button image will be displayed.

For example, when a button image is displayed in a motion promotion performance, the button's LED can be illuminated (red ⇔ off in 150 ms cycles), and the illumination mode in this illumination pattern is not included in the illumination pattern that highlights the movable body performing the initial operation.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts (to check the vibration motor 635E and notify the start of the initial operation), and it is also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B together with the display of a button image in the operation promotion performance (to indicate the degree of expectation of the change), and at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission mode of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the button image is displayed.

Form 14 (power interruption immediately before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start time notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start time notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 95, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variation pattern has started, the losing pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends immediately before a power outage occurs (for example, approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing pattern combination is temporarily stopped or during the pattern confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)). If there is a reserved memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will start.

Therefore, while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing, from when the power outage recovery designation command and the pattern determination command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received until the next command, which is the variable display start designation command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing becomes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and until the next command is received, that is, during the pattern determination display period, it is notified that the power outage is being restored.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview performance decision process (step S132SG610) decides to execute the start preview, the variable display starts in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the decided preview performance, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the predetermined display change in the start preview, and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the start preview starts. Also, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery command, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the performance image corresponding to the start preview (introduction part) starts.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation check control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part is started, in which the result of the start-up warning is notified.

As shown in Figures 48 (B3a) to (B6a), the start notice (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the pending display has changed and what color it has changed to. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the pending display has changed, will be hindered by the movable body operating due to the initial operation, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the start notice is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) begins, so that the visibility of the start notice (result notification part) is prevented from being hindered by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed, the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the start of the start notice (result notification part) (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed to start the next variable display, it is decided to execute the start-up notice in that variable display. When it is decided to execute the start-up notice at the start of the variable display, the time from when the variable display starts to when the result notification part of the start-up notice is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds). Therefore, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the start-up notice (result notification part) is executed, the start-up notice (result notification part) is executed. The embodiment shows an example in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a start-time notice is executed is generated when a start winning occurs, a specific presentation control command that specifies specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command that specifies the execution of the start-time notice) is sent, and the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific presentation control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part starts as a result of the start-time notice.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a start-up notice is executed is to be used, a winning performance designation command (specific information) is sent specifying that it is a specific variable pattern (with start-up notice).

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern determination command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state based on the transmission of the performance pattern determination designation command, and after the pattern determination display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern determination command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with warning at start) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with an operating period shorter than the initial operation being performed (e.g., 5 seconds).

In more detail, in the initial operation, the maximum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed in sequence (going back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while in the shortened initial operation, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed simultaneously (for example, returning to the origin immediately after passing the origin position). In addition, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one movable body is in the middle of a maximum advancement operation, that operation is interrupted and a retreat operation is performed, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body including the one movable body are performed simultaneously. Note that if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), switching to the shortened initial operation is not performed even if a specific variation pattern designation command is received.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts, and also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold changes to red in FIG. 48 (B6) (for entertainment purposes), and at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission mode of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the color changes to red. If the button vibration is performed when the color changes to red during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color changes to red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation ends.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts, and a button vibration notice (indicating a different level of expectation than the notice at the start) can be made in FIG. 48 (B1), with at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission mode of the button LED during vibration being different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration notice. If the button vibration notice is made during the initial operation, the button vibration notice is limited, and limited button vibration is made after the initial operation ends.

Form 15 (power interruption immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo consecutive announcement is executed will be described based on Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo consecutive announcement is executed.

As shown in FIG. 96, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variation pattern has started, the losing pattern combination is displayed stationary in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends (for example, approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing pattern combination is temporarily displayed stationary or during the pattern confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a reserved memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will start.

Therefore, while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the start timing, from when the power outage recovery designation command and the pattern determination command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received until the next command, which is the variable display start designation command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery (for example, silent). Also, after the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing becomes invisible, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power recovery in progress, please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 97), and until the next command is received, that is, during the pattern determination display period, it is notified that the power outage is being restored.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the variable display is started in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern (pseudo consecutive) in which the pseudo consecutive announcement indicating whether the variable display will resume is executed and the determined announcement performance (movable body announcement), and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board-top movable body LED 9d, the board-bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the background (change), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (change) is started. Also, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the performance image corresponding to the background (change) is started.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. After that, after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part is started, in which the result of the pseudo consecutive preview is notified.

As shown in Figures 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9), the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) notifies the result, such as whether the variable display has resumed, so if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the variable display has resumed, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial operation, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) starts, so that the visibility of the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) is prevented from being hindered by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) starts (see Figures 48 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, the execution of the movable object prediction is determined together with the execution of the pseudo consecutive prediction, so the movable object prediction is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display has started, but since the operation confirmation control is being executed, as explained in the first embodiment, the performance operation of the on-board movable object 32A and the chance button 631B at the timing of the execution of the movable object prediction may be restricted, and only the effect display and sound effect corresponding to the movable object prediction may be output (see FIG. 66). Also, in the first embodiment, the performance operation of the on-board movable object 32A and the chance button 631B is executed after the initial operation is completed, but since the pseudo consecutive prediction (introduction part) has started, the performance operation of the movable object prediction is restricted, but the performance operation of the movable object prediction may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, it is decided to execute a pseudo consecutive announcement in that variable display. If it is decided to execute a pseudo consecutive announcement at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the result notification part of the pseudo consecutive announcement is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) is executed, the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) is executed. The embodiment shows an example in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part (notice part) starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed is generated when a start winning occurs, a specific presentation control command (for example, a winning presentation designation command that designates the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) that specifies specific information regarding the specific variation pattern is transmitted, and the presentation control CPU 120 may change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific presentation control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part starts as a result of the pseudo consecutive announcement.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed is to be used, a winning time performance designation command (specific information) is sent that designates the specific variable pattern (with pseudo consecutive announcement).

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern determination command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state based on the transmission of the performance pattern determination designation command, and after the pattern determination display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern determination command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with pseudo-continuous warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation that has a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation being performed.

In more detail, in the initial operation, the maximum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed in sequence (going back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while in the shortened initial operation, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body are performed simultaneously (for example, returning to the origin immediately after passing the origin position). In addition, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one movable body is in the middle of a maximum advancement operation, that operation is interrupted and a retreat operation is performed, and as soon as it returns to the origin position, the minimum advancement and retreat of each movable body including the one movable body are performed simultaneously. Note that if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is immediately before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), switching to the shortened initial operation is not performed even if a specific variation pattern designation command is received.

In addition, for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation prior to the one in which the moving object announcement or pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and then the power is turned on, the performance action in the moving object announcement that was executed/limited during the initial operation is performed during the introductory part of the pseudo consecutive performance (a short initial operation is performed in Figure 49 (C4), and a performance action in the limited moving object announcement is performed in Figure 49 (C5)).

Mode 16 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power interruption occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on after that. Figure 98 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the panel and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the panel and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal game state and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

When the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed and it is detected that the player is playing with a right-handed shot based on the game ball being detected by a detection switch such as the gate switch 21 provided in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 displays a left-handed shot promotion display 132SG530 consisting of the words "Please return to left-handed shot" and a left-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in a position where a part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform the initial operation will be explained based on Figures 98 (A) and (B). Note that Figures 98 (A) and (B) show the relationship between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, and also allow comparison with the relationship with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figures 84 and 93), which is not actually displayed.

As shown in FIG. 98(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the recovery display 132SG510 or the left hit prompt display 132SG530, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 97(A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, part of the presentation part 32a and the support part 32b overlap the front side of the left hit prompt display 132SG530, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see FIG. 97(B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes and the left hit prompt display 132SG530 becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see FIG. 97(C)).

When moving from the presentation position back to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction movement than during the advancement movement, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98(A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap any of the left hit prompt display 132SG530, the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and the right hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 97(A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps with the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the left hit promotion display 132SG530, the player can see the left hit promotion display 132SG530 (see Figures 97 (D) and (E)). Note that the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display occurs the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the normal variable display, and then the initial operation is performed when the device is started up with a hot start and restored, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left hit prompt display 132SG530 when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position, and does not overlap for the period during which the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position or origin position, so the visibility of the left hit prompt display 132SG530 is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation of the left hit prompt display 132SG530.

Also, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430. However, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a time-saving state or a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing an initial operation, the player may miss an opportunity to win by performing a right-hit operation and suffer a disadvantage, so it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains better visibility than the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can display the left hit promotion display 132SG530 and output the left hit operation promotion sound as a left hit operation promotion notification. When operation check control is performed based on starting up with a cold start after a power outage, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen while the left hit operation promotion sound is restricted, and when operation check control is performed based on starting up with a hot start after a power outage, it is preferable that the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen while the left hit operation promotion sound is output. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate left hit operation promotion notification that takes into account the situation at the time of power-on.

In addition, in the normal state, when a game ball enters the gate switch 21 or the like provided on the right game area side, a left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued, and in the normal state, a special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued that has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification based on a specific number of game balls (e.g., five balls) entering the gate switch 21, and the special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued for a period longer than the period (e.g., 20 seconds) during which the movable body operates due to the operation confirmation control. This makes it possible to prevent the special left-hit operation promotion notification from being hindered by the movable body operating due to the operation confirmation control.

Forms 17 and 18 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during a big win)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot will be explained based on Figures 99 and 100. Figure 99 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and the operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on after that. Figure 100 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 99(A), when a power outage occurs during a round of play in the jackpot game state and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

In addition, when a control command indicating a jackpot game state, such as an open command or an after-open command, is received together with the power outage recovery command, the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen during the period when the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, and the player is encouraged to shoot the game ball into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where a part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform the initial operation will be explained with reference to Figures 100 (A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 100 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the recovery in progress display 132SG510 or the right hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 99 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the right hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 99 (B)).

When moving from the presentation position back to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100(A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 99(A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 99 (C)). Note that the situation where the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display occurs the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during a round of play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the power is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front of a specified area (see Figure 83 (A)) in which information corresponding to the round of play (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, so that the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be impeded. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to round play (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps with the front side of a specified area (see FIG. 83 (A)) in which information corresponding to round play is displayed is shorter than the period during which information overlaps with the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control.

In addition, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round play movable body presentation is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include the presentation operation in the round play movable body presentation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position).

In addition, if an initial operation is performed when the power is interrupted during a round of play in a jackpot play state and then started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap the front side of the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the visibility of the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 is less likely to be hindered. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which it overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which it is superimposed on the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510.

In addition, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round play movable body presentation is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include the presentation operation in the round play movable body presentation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position).

The time that the under-board movable body 32B stays in the presentation position overlapping the recovery display 132SG510 during the initial operation may be shorter than the presentation operation of the movable body presentation. For example, it is preferable that the stay time T1 of the movable body at the presentation position during the initial operation when the power is turned on after a power interruption occurs while the variable display is not being executed and the stay time T2 of the movable body at the presentation position during the movable body presentation are longer than the stay time T3 of the movable body at the presentation position during the initial operation when the power is turned on after a power interruption occurs while the variable display is being executed (T1 = T2 > T3). In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not interfere with the determination of whether or not the machine is being restored by not superimposing the recovery display 132SG510 for a long period of time on the movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on after a power interruption occurs during an advantageous state.

Form 19 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction will be described based on Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power interruption occurs during time reduction and the operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on after that.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when a power outage occurs during variable display in the time-saving state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the start timing goes invisible, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Power being restored. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at a position where a part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap (see Figure 101 (C)).

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, when the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A is started, the variable display is stopped based on the transmission of a pattern determination command, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. When the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the support part 32b overlaps with the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes through and the area where the right hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the performance position, the performance part 32a overlaps with the front side of part of the recovery display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery display 132SG510 (see FIG. 101 (B)).

When moving from the presentation position back to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, the overlap time is longer during the movement of the on-board movable body 32A moving from the presentation position to the origin position, and therefore the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101(A), when the underboard movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position and rises to the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see FIG. 101(C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display occurs the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time-saving state, and then the initial operation is performed when the device is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap the front side of the specific area (see Figure 101 (A)) in which the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed, rather than being superimposed on the front side of the specified area (see Figures 101 (B) (C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., performance mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls output display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. Therefore, when the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends and the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., presentation mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps with the right-hit prompting display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which information is superimposed on the front side of a specified area (see Figures 101 (B) (C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., presentation mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) is superimposed on the front side of the specified area (see Figures 101 (B) (C)).

In addition, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable body preview performance action (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round play movable body presentation is performed at the start of a round play, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include the presentation operation in the round play movable body presentation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position).

In addition, in the embodiments 17 to 19, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the recovery display 132SG510, and information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) was described. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control is exemplified in a form in which the total overlap time is compared with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs the initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs the initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Forms 21 to 24 (Start-up sequence when initial operation control is executed)
In the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, when power is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 (the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start or hot start committee), the special symbol lamp constituting the special symbol display device 4A, 4B and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit simultaneously. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of lighting the special symbol lamp when power is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 and the timing of lighting each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be different.

For example, as shown in Figures 102 (A) to (G), when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, first, the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 begins on the image display device 5. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds as in Figures 61 and 62) has elapsed since the start of the display of the start preparation display 132SG500, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B begin to light up (see Figures 102 (A) and (B)).

At this timing, the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized again, so that the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in the state of being deenergized. That is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time-saving state and is started with a hot start after being deenergized while no normal winning has occurred, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and is started with a hot start after being deenergized during an interval period, etc., the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are closed again. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time-saving state and is started with a hot start after being deenergized while a normal winning has occurred, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and is started with a hot start after being deenergized while the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) is open, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state.

After these special chart lamps are turned on and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in their power-off state, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) start to light up.

After this, as an initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up in an initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L, 8R start to output an initialization notification sound. After that, confirmation operations are performed for the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control (Fig. 102 (D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is not being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a cold start, as shown in FIG. 103(A), after the power is cut off, the CPU 103 first transmits a power-on command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives a power-on command) three seconds after the image display device 5 starts displaying the start-up preparation display 132SG500. At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized, which starts lighting up the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, which causes the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to go to their initial state (closed state).

The special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B at this time are initially illuminated in a manner that is in effect when the variable display result is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special pattern lamps constituting the special pattern display devices 4A and 4B at this time may be illuminated in a manner that is indicative of a variable display result other than a miss, or in a manner that is different from any of the variable display results.

In addition, after these special chart lamps are turned on and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in their initial states, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts to light up.

Then, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power-on command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 starts displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600 instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts displaying, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, board-top movable body LED 9d, board-bottom movable body LED 9e, frame-top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts emitting light in the initialization notification mode, and confirmation operations are performed for the board-top movable body 32A, board-bottom movable body 32B, frame-top movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations.

By doing this, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 makes it easy for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to recognize that the power has been turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it also makes it possible for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to check the lighting of the special chart lamp, which has a large impact on the game, without being distracted by the operation of checking each movable body.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and variable display is being executed, if power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, as shown in FIG. 103(B), after the power is cut off, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 starts to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power recovery designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery designation command). At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, which starts the lighting of the special symbol lamps that constitute these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B (and the variable display of the special symbol by the blinking of the special symbol lamps), and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, which causes the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 starts displaying the recovery display 132SG510 instead of the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After that, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, board-top movable body LED 9d, board-bottom movable body LED 9e, frame-top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up, and the board-top movable body 32A, board-bottom movable body 32B, frame-top movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are checked as initial operations.

In addition, if the variable display that was running before the power outage stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, and then a new variable display starts, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends when the new variable display stops, as shown in FIG. 103 (B).

In other words, when the number of pending memories is 0 and the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the special pattern is resumed, and if the resumed variable display stops while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, when a new variable display starts due to the occurrence of a new start winning, the start preparation display 132SG500 switches to displaying the recovery display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in FIG. 103(B), while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed and the variable display is in progress, confirmation operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are started as an initial operation.

As shown in FIG. 103(B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal state or time-saving state and variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display that has been executed before the power cut is not stopped while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display will stop after the recovery display 132SG510 starts to be displayed in place of the start preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 (at the same time, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends), as shown in FIG. 104(A).

Also, as in FIG. 103(B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal state or time-saving state and variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, and even if the variable display that was being executed before the power cut is stopped while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5, if there is pending memory when the variable display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a new variable display is started based on the pending memory while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and after the variable display is stopped. In this case, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends at the timing when the new variable display is stopped.

As described above, in the examples shown in Figures 103 (A) and (B) and Figures 104 (A) and (B), when a background image or performance image corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the image display device 5, the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not started, so it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered by the background image or performance image corresponding to the variable display on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 104(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, the power is cut off and the game is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop during the display of the start preparation display 132SG500, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as the initial operation are started simultaneously. The explanation is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as the initial operation may start at different times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal state or a time-saving state and variable display is being executed, when the power is cut off and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery being performed during the display period of the start preparation display 132SG500 (more precisely, during the two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command from the CPU 103), and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as an initial operation starts during the display period of the recovery display 132SG510.

The lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, top panel movable body LED 9d, bottom panel movable body LED 9e, top frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in a manner that corresponds to the recovery in progress may continue even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has ended, and may be ended, for example, when the confirmation operation of each movable body has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 105(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or time-saving state and variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display stops during the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 and a new variable display does not start, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the image display device 5 starts displaying a background image corresponding to the variable display being stopped from the timing when the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the background image.

In the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105, a case has been described in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving, that is, when variable display can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power outages can occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even when the gaming state is a jackpot, in which variable display is not executed.

In the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is powered down during a jackpot game and starts up in a hot start, if the power is cut off while the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning port) is in an open state due to a round game, as shown in FIG. 106(A), after the power is cut off, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 starts to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power outage recovery command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives a power outage recovery command). At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are energized, which starts lighting up the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B (and variably displaying the special symbols by blinking the special symbol lamps), and the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to the state before the power was cut off. In other words, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the special variable winning ball device 7 is open.

In addition, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage restoration command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 starts displaying the restoration in progress display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, top-board movable body LED 9d, bottom-board movable body LED 9e, top-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts lighting up in a manner that corresponds to the restoration being performed.

While the recovery display 132SG510 is still displayed, confirmation operations are performed on the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operations.

After the initial operation is completed and the round of play ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state in response to the end of the round of play. Then, in response to the start of the next round of play, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from a closed state to an open state, the image display device 5 starts displaying an image corresponding to the round of play, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) starts lighting up in a manner corresponding to the round of play.

In the example of FIG. 106(A), a power outage occurs during a round game, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round game before the power outage ends after the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 106(B), when a power outage occurs during a round game, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round game before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and the next round game starts (special variable winning ball equipment In the case where the device 7 goes from an open state to a closed state and then goes back to an open state, even after the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 has ended, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be lit in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress until the confirmation operations of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as the initial operation are completed.

As shown in Figures 106 (A) and (B), if a power outage occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (during a round of play) for a jackpot game, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, and when each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the round of play, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132 Since the confirmation operations of SG101 and the chance button 631B are not executed, it is possible to prevent the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) from lighting up in a manner appropriate to the round of play, which would interfere with the confirmation work to see whether the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are being executed normally.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 103 to 105, a case has been described in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving. However, as shown in Figure 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of Figure 107(A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command to when the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends), the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state is in a hot start state. If a game ball enters the ball device 6B, that is, if a second start winning occurs while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, after the start preparation display 132SG500 ends, the image display device 5 displays the recovery display 132SG510 until the timing for stopping the variable display corresponding to the second start winning, and while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed, the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is started as initial operation control.

In the example shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 107(A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command to when the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the variable display of a normal pattern is being executed before the power outage occurs, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, and a normal winning pattern occurs on the image display device 5 while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state as an initial operation control from the timing before the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B begins.

By executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figures 107 (A) and 107 (B) above, it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In the example of FIG. 107(A), the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 after a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the start preparation display 132SG500 may be switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 at the timing when a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

In addition, in Figures 106 (A) and (B), a case where the power is interrupted when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and starts up in a hot start is illustrated, where the power is interrupted when the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in an open state due to a round of play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 108, in a case where the power is interrupted when the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in an open state due to a round of play, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start. As a result, while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the example shown in FIG. 108, during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends), if the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state again for the next round of play, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 should start after the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends.

By executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. 108, it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In addition, in form 3, a part of the fanfare effect that started while the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed cannot be seen by the player, and when the start preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the fanfare effect can be seen from the continuation of the part that was not visible, whereas in forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display that started while the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed cannot be seen because a recovery display is displayed. In other words, the variable display is intentionally controlled so that it cannot be seen because there must be no errors in the important information related to whether or not a jackpot will be hit, whereas the fanfare effect is intentionally controlled so that it can be seen because it has an operation direction notification part to encourage right-hand hits, which are necessary for the subsequent jackpot play.

Form 25 (Relationship between the initialization notification image and the initial operation) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control will be described with reference to Fig. 110 and Fig. 111. Fig. 110 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control. Fig. 111 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by cold start processing after a power outage occurs, a power-on command, a game status background command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo command are transmitted based on the CPU 103 being restored after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing when the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5. Then, based on receiving these performance control commands, the performance control CPU 120 determines that power-on with initialization has been performed (started up by cold start processing), and causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, board-mounted movable body LED 9d, board-mounted movable body LED 9e, frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g to light up in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and starts outputting an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (see Figures 61 and 62).

In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is hidden and the first background display 132SG310 is displayed based on the game state background designation command (normal background). However, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization, the initialization notification display 132SG600 as described in FIG. 102 is displayed with the start of the initialization notification.

In this case, after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts, the initial operation by the operation confirmation control is started, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this way, it is possible to quickly confirm that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body operating by the operation confirmation control, and it is possible to prevent the movable body operating by the operation confirmation control from interfering with the confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has ended.

In addition, the period from power-on with initialization (start-up with cold start processing) until operation check control is performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (start-up with hot start processing) until operation check control is performed. This prevents the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to operation check control being performed immediately after power-on with initialization.

In addition, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (e.g., 30 seconds) and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period, and that even if a start-up winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started. This makes it possible to perform operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, if the execution period of the variable display that starts based on the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display may be continuously displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. In this way, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

In addition, after power-on without initialization (start-up with hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 may not be displayed, and the background may be displayed based on the game status background designation command. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, as in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization (startup with cold start processing), the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is started, and then the initial operation by the operation confirmation control is started, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109, if a start winning occurs after the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends and it is decided to execute the movable object notification, the movable object notification is executed, while as shown in FIG. 110, if a start winning occurs during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600 and it is decided to execute the movable object notification, as described in embodiment 1, during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, not only the performance operation due to the movable object notification, but also the output of the effect display and sound effect are restricted, and the performance operation due to the movable object notification is performed after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends.

Mode 26 (Operation Check Control) <Modification>
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 111 to 14. Fig. 111 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. Fig. 112 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the win/lose button performance as a modified example.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57 (A) to (J), when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the performance control CPU 120 executes operation check control based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start processing (or hot start processing). First, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Fig. 57 (B)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Fig. 57 (C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Fig. 57 (D)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Fig. 57 (E)). Next, the under-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), and then the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 57(G)). Next, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), and then the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) has passed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends, but the operation mode of each movable body can be changed in various ways.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111(A), when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the origin position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the origin position, the separation distance L1 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is shorter when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the performance position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the performance position, as shown in FIG. 111(B).

In this modified example, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B, which have the above-mentioned relationship, may be configured such that in the operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial operation periods overlap (see FIG. 111(B)), and then, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111(C)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111(D)), so that their respective initial operation periods do not overlap.

By doing this, it is possible to simultaneously check that the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) can operate normally in the presentation position, and that the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) can operate normally in the presentation position, simplifying the confirmation process, and at the same time making it possible to individually check the movement of the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) from the presentation position to the origin position, and the movement of the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) from the presentation position to the origin position, which are difficult to check.

In this modified example, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as their initial operation periods overlap, for example, during the period from when one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position to when it stops at the performance position, the other starts moving from the origin position to the performance position. In other words, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the advancement operation periods of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of the form in which the below-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position in the win/lose button performance, but it is also possible to use a first movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 112(A), in the win/lose button presentation, during the period during which the operation promotion presentation is being executed during the operation effective period or when the operation effective period has elapsed, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the presentation position (see FIG. 112(B)) and the below-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the presentation position to lift the on-board movable body 32A so that the presentation operation periods of the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B do not overlap (see FIG. 112(C)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may simultaneously move from the presentation position to the origin position so that the presentation operation periods of the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap (see FIG. 112(D)).

For the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform the performance action in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap) in this manner, it is preferable to execute the initial operation in the operation confirmation control in an operation mode that does not include the performance action described in Figures 112 (B) to (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are advanced separately). By doing so, it is possible to perform the operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see FIG. 2) is provided that can detect that a second movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) is positioned at a performance position, and the operation of the first movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) positioned at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134, thereby making it possible to perform the operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, in the operation confirmation control, if the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are not positioned at the origin position before the long initial operation control is started, return control is performed to move the movable bodies to their initial positions (for example, short initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101), so that the operation confirmation control can be performed optimally.

Mode 27 (operation confirmation control)
Also, as shown in Figure 57, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a are capable of executing initial operations, and when the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 57 (F)), the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position (see Figures 57 (G) to (I)).

In this way, the first movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) placed at the performance position during the operation confirmation control indicates that the operation confirmation control has not ended, and by starting the operation of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) when the first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is placed at the performance position, it is possible to prevent the operation confirmation control of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) from being overlooked.

Specifically, frame-side movable bodies such as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are easily tampered with because they can be touched by players, so if they fail to operate normally like board-side movable bodies such as the above-board movable body 32A and below-board movable body 32B, and the board-side movable body is forced to start over from its initial operation, the board-side movable body can be intentionally put into a dead-end state (see Figure 113 (A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 113(B), if the frame-side movable body cannot operate normally, the board-side movable body is withdrawn, and an error image regarding the malfunction of the frame-side movable body (for example, a caption such as "Please check the frame movable body", which is erased when the frame-side movable body can operate normally) is displayed on the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5, and if the frame-side movable body cannot operate normally even after performing the initial operation (only the frame-side movable body; the operating mode is the same as when the power is turned on) at the time of error determination up to five times (more times than the board-side movable body, and the conditions until the dead end are stricter considering that it is easily tampered with), only the frame-side movable body can be transitioned to a dead end state.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG104 (see FIG. 2) is provided that can detect that a second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) is positioned at a performance position, and the operation of a first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) positioned at a performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104, thereby enabling the operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The following describes further the form for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention based on the examples.

[Form 1-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the specific performance is executed and after the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed (see FIGS. 146 to 149, 158, 159, 165, 176, and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the types of background images are different before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even in effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed, different impressions can be suitably given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-2 is,
Both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed in one variable display,
When a specific performance is executed without a predetermined performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a specific performance is executed without a predetermined performance (see Figures 146 to 149).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-3 is,
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image that is more advantageous than the first background image;
The first predetermined part can be executed while the first background image is displayed,
A second background image is displayed during the execution of the second predetermined part;
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background teasing effect different from the predetermined effect is executed,
When the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the second background image is displayed by the second background teasing effect (see FIG. 143).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether the second background image is displayed through the predetermined effect or the second background preview effect.

[Form 1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-1 is,
In one variable display, both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed,
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
When a specific performance is performed before the specific performance is performed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific performance is not performed (see Figures 146 to 149).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by making the player expect that both the predetermined effect and the specific effect will be executed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-2 is
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
the background image includes a first background image before the decoration identification information reaches a reach state, a second background image before the decoration identification information reaches a reach state and which is more advantageous than the first background image, a third background image after the decoration identification information reaches a reach state, and a fourth background image after the decoration identification information reaches a reach state and which is more advantageous than the third background image,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed together with a second background image;
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed together with the fourth background image (see Figures 158, 159, 165, 176, and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the relationship between the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and the background image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-3 is,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the second background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized;
The fragment image in the specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a part of the fourth background image in a superimposed relationship (see FIGS. 172, 173, and 186).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second specified part and the specific performance can be improved.

[Form 1-4-4]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-4 is,
The fragment image is capable of performing a rotational movement;
When the image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the second background image superimposed on the image fragment;
When the rotation operation causes the image fragment to be at the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the second background image that is superimposed on the image fragment (see FIGS. 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-4-5]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-5 is
When a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a first angle, a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIG. 196 and FIG. 202 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-5]
The gaming machine of form 1-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
A fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a predetermined direction (see FIG. 197 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-6]
The gaming machine of form 1-6 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that does not involve a change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see FIG. 185).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-1 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
The period required for the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance to be hidden in the display area of the display means is the same (see FIG. 188 and FIG. 193 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 1-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images that are displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and the timing before the fragment images are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 188 and 193).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-3 is,
A fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a specific performance takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see FIG. 197 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
The gaming machine of form 1-8 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotational motion,
The number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is the same as the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 2-1]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
the display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when a transition is made from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the image fragments over a first period, and it is possible to visually recognize the image fragments over a second period after the first period has elapsed (see FIGS. 158, 159, 165, 176, and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image, can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, the sense of incongruity felt when a fragment image is displayed by an effect image is reduced, allowing the predetermined effect and the specific effect to be executed preferably.

[Form 2-2]
The gaming machine of form 2-2 is,
The length of the display period of the effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing are the same (see FIGS. 176 and 181 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 2-3]
The gaming machine of form 2-3 is,
The execution period of the first predetermined part is longer than the execution period of the second predetermined part,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see FIG. 176 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display of the fragment images can be started without creating an awkward feeling by using the effect image.

[Form 2-4]
The gaming machine of form 2-4 is,
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 158, 159, and 165).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 3-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner in which they change and move from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the fragment images (see FIGS. 161, 168, 178, 183, and 185).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the speed at which the fragment images are moved is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 3-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is,
In one variable display, a predetermined performance can be performed multiple times, while a specific performance can be performed once;
When the predetermined performance is executed multiple times, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined performance is executed once,
When a specific performance is executed once, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a predetermined performance is executed multiple times (see Figures 146 to 149).
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-3]
The gaming machine of form 3-3 is,
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 161(C) and FIG. 168(C)).
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-1 is
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner moving at a first speed during a first period from the start of display to a specific timing during the display period, and are displayed in a manner moving at a second speed during a second period from the specific timing to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 185 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 3-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-2 is
An effect image can be displayed at the timing when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed,
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 183, 185, and 194).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced.

[Form 3-5]
The gaming machine of form 3-5 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotational motion,
the number of rotational actions performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational actions performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 202 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 4-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in an overlapping relationship,
The fragment image in a specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see FIGS. 161, 168, 172, 173, 178, 183, and 195).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the display manner of the fragment image differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 4-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The specific effect is an effect including displaying a special image together with the fragment image,
In a specific performance, the fragment image and the special image are in a superimposed relationship,
A first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent form through which at least a part of the background image can be recognized;
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is an image in a transparent form through which at least a part of the special image can be recognized,
The third fragment image among the multiple fragment images in the specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of both at least a part of the background image and at least a part of the special image (see FIG. 195).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the display mode of the fragment images for each performance, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-1 is
The fragment images in certain effects can rotate.
When the first image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of a background image that is superimposed on the first image fragment;
When the first image fragment is rotated to the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the first image fragment (see FIGS. 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 4-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-2 is
In a specific performance, when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a first angle, a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIG. 196 and FIG. 202 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 5-1]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
A fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a predetermined direction (see FIGS. 161, 168, 178, and 183).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed, and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, thereby allowing the player to be surprised at various times; furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the period of time required for them to disappear is different, so that even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 5-2]
The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The visibility of the fragment images that are displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and the timing before the fragment images are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 190 and 194).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 5-3]
The gaming machine of form 5-3 is as follows:
A fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a specific performance takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see FIG. 197 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference can be created between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, and interest can be increased by providing a variety of presentation methods.

[Form 5-4]
The gaming machine of form 5-4 is,
All of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in a manner that they move toward the outside of the display area of the display means (for example, see FIG. 196(A) ),
A first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific performance is hidden in a manner of moving toward the outside of the display area of the display means,
A second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific performance, is hidden before moving outside the display area of the display means (for example, see FIG. 196(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the fragment images are displayed can be differentiated between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack form in response to a movement of the object image, a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from the first crack form to a second crack form in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which an object image is displayed, and in response to a movement of the object image, a plurality of fragment images are started to be displayed in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image of a first crack form is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part is executed or not executed,
The period from when the crack precursor image of the second crack type is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined effect is longer than the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from when it is displayed until when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
In a specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from when it is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 162 to 164, 172, 173, 179, and 180).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are displayed similarly can give different impressions in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
The second predetermined part has a longer execution period than the first predetermined part (see Figures 172, 173, 178, and 183).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of a given presentation from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation structure.

[Form 6-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-3 is,
When the second predetermined part is executed and then the third predetermined part is not executed, a fourth predetermined part can be executed in which the crack precursor image of the second crack form is continuously displayed for a period longer than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part (see FIG. 179 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably indicate that the third predetermined part will not be executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-1 is
The predetermined effect is an effect in which the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
a first pattern in which a predetermined effect is executed and the decoration identification information is in a reach state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
When the variable display is performed according to the first pattern, there is a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than when the variable display is performed according to the second pattern (see FIG. 179 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of a predetermined performance, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-2 is
In one variable display, both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed,
The specific performance can be executed after the third predetermined part is executed,
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of the specific performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the third predetermined part is not executed (see Figures 146 to 149).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the third specified part in the specified performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-5]
The gaming machine of form 6-5 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 162(G) and FIG. 164(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-6]
The gaming machine of form 6-6 is
The predetermined effect is an effect in which the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
The decoration identification information of the reach state can be highlighted in the third predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the period during which the decoration identifying information in the reach state is highlighted is longer than the period during which the fragment images are displayed (see FIG. 163(I) to FIG. 163(K)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to conveniently indicate that a reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-1 is,
A motion emphasis image can be displayed in the first predetermined part in accordance with a motion of the object image,
It is possible to display it in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
A motion-emphasized image is displayed at the same time as the display of the crack precursor image of the crack pattern starts (see FIG. 162(D) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack precursor image can be changed to a cracked state without creating an unnatural appearance.

[Form 6-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-2 is
A small fragment image can be displayed along with the motion-enhanced image;
The display period of the small fragment image is longer than the display period of the motion emphasis image (see FIG. 162(D) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the crack precursor image has changed to a cracked state.

[Form 6-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-3 is
An effect image can be displayed in the second predetermined part in response to the action of the object image,
When displaying an effect image, the action emphasis image is not displayed (see FIG. 162(H) and FIG. 179).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference is provided between the first and second predetermined parts, and the predetermined presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-4 is
The period required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means is different from that required for the small fragment image in the third predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 179).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently in the first and third specified parts, which can enhance interest.

[Form 6-8]
The gaming machine of form 6-8 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in a specific performance is a non-transparent image in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see Figures 172, 173, and 186).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the fragment images can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
The gaming machine of form 6-9 is
the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that does not involve a change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see FIG. 185).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 6-10]
The gaming machine of form 6-10 is
The period required from when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed until when it is hidden in the display area of the display means is longer than the period required from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until when it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 179 and 180 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference can be created between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, and interest can be increased by providing a variety of presentation methods.

[Form 7-1]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A motion detection means capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
A motion promotion effect can be executed to encourage the player to perform a motion on the motion detection means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The action prompting image can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The action promotion effect is an effect in which an action promotion image is displayed over a valid action period, and when a player's action is detected, the display state of the action promotion image is changed from the action promotion state to the action completion state,
When the action promotion image is changed from the action promotion state to the action completion state by the action promotion effect, a specific effect can be executed;
During at least a portion of the execution period of the specific performance, it is possible to visually recognize both the action prompting image of the action completion mode and the fragment image in the specific performance;
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is shorter than the display period of the action promotion image in the action promotion mode and longer than the display period of the action promotion image in the action completion mode (see FIGS. 158, 159, 168, 176, and 183).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and the specific effect displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times and further to prevent the interest of the specific effect from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation structure.

[Form 8-1]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed;
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the third predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed (see Figs. 158, 159, 161, 176, and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the first and second predetermined effects have different types of background images before and after the fragment images are displayed, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 8-2]
The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 158, 159, 161, 176, and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 9-1]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when a transition is made from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when a transition is made from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part;
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the image fragments over a first period, and it is possible to visually recognize the image fragments over a second period after the first period has elapsed (see FIGS. 158, 159, 161, 176, and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and further, the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image is displayed by the effect image can be reduced, so that the first and second predetermined effects can be executed preferably.

[Form 9-2]
The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 158, 159, and 161).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 10-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The image fragments in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that the speed of the image fragments changes from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the image fragments (see FIGS. 158, 159, 166, 167, 176, 182, and 185).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, because the speed at which the fragment images are moved is different in the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 10-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the third predetermined part transitions to a fourth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 158(G) and FIG. 166(H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-1 is
the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner moving at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and are displayed in a manner moving at a second speed over a second period from the specific timing to being hidden,
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 185 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the fragment images are displayed can be made different between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-2 is
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, an effect image can be displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 166 and 185 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced.

[Form 10-4]
The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
All of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden from view in a manner of moving out of the display area of the display means (see FIG. 196(A) ),
a first fragment image among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is hidden in a manner of moving toward the outside of the display area of the display means;
A second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is made invisible before moving out of the display area of the display means (see FIG. 196(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the fragment images are displayed can be made different between the first predetermined presentation and the second specific presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-5]
The gaming machine of form 10-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 172, 173, and 186).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-1 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction;
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see FIGS. 188 and 189 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-2 is
The visibility of the fragment images moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and before the image is hidden (see FIGS. 188 and 189).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are capable of rotating;
the number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 202 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-2 is
When the image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the image fragment;
When the image fragment is rotated to the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the image fragment (see FIGS. 196 and 202).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-3 is
When the first fragment image is at a first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIG. 196 and FIG. 202 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-8]
The gaming machine of form 10-8 is
In one variable display, both the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be executed,
The first predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
When the first predetermined performance is executed before the execution of the second predetermined performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first predetermined performance is not executed (see Figures 146 to 149).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-9]
The gaming machine of form 10-9 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack stage in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack stage in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 176 and 182).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 11-1]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in an overlapping relationship,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 161, 158, 159, 178, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, because the display manner of the fragment images differs between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions in an advantageous manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 12-1]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner moving in a plurality of directions, at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction;
the fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction;
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see FIGS. 158, 159, 166, 167, 176, and 182).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the period of time required for them to disappear is different, so that even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions and increase interest in the game.

[Form 13-1]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack form in response to a movement of the object image, a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from the first crack form to a second crack form in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined effect includes a fourth predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a third crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image in response to a movement of the object image.
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and fourth predetermined parts have different execution periods,
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part is executed or not executed,
The period from the start of the second predetermined part to the transition to the third predetermined part is longer than the period from the start of the fourth predetermined part to the transition to the fifth predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from when it is displayed until when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from when it is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 158, 159, 162, 163, 179, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment images are displayed, and the display period of the fragment images, are different between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 13-2]
The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack form according to the movement of the object image,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the third crack pre-stage state to the third crack state and displayed (see FIG. 162 and FIG. 158 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 14-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The second predetermined performance can be executed at a specific timing after the first predetermined performance is executed,
The first and third predetermined parts have the same execution period,
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part have the same length of the execution period,
When executing a second predetermined performance after the first predetermined performance, the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is made non-displayable in the display area of the display means, and then a third predetermined part is started (see Figs. 155, 156, and 174).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display a crack precursor image and a fragment image, can be executed consecutively, thereby continuously giving the player surprises, and further, since the third predetermined part starts after the fragment image in the second predetermined part has gone invisible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect caused by a new crack precursor image being displayed even when a fragment image is already being displayed.

[Form 14-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction;
The position where the display of the image fragment starts is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see FIGS. 155, 156, and 197).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-3]
The gaming machine of form 14-3 is
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part can commonly display a special image together with the fragment image,
The special image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a first manner,
The special image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (see FIG. 155(F) and FIG. 156(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special image is displayed differently between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-4]
The gaming machine of form 14-4 is
The second and fourth predetermined parts have different lengths of the display period of the fragment images, but have the same length of the display period of the special image (see FIG. 174 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-5]
The gaming machine of form 14-5 is
There is a first pattern in which the second predetermined performance is executed after the first predetermined performance is executed, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined performance is not executed after the first predetermined performance is executed,
The rate at which the game progresses according to the first pattern is controlled to an advantageous state is higher than the rate at which the game progresses according to the second pattern (see FIG. 140 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-6]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The image fragments in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that the image fragments move without any change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments (see FIG. 185 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the relevance between the first and second predetermined effects can be increased, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-1 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the third predetermined part transitions to a fourth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see Fig. 155(C), Fig. 156(C), Fig. 174).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the effects of both performances can be improved.

[Form 14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period (see FIG. 174 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the effects of both performances can be improved.

[Form 15-1]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified by the notification performance that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack form is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image are displayed;
the fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period of time until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 158, 159, 171, 176, and 184(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise; furthermore, by displaying the crack precursor image together with a fragment image that takes a different amount of time to disappear than the fragment image in the predetermined effect, it is possible to notify the player that the game is not being properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
The display period of the breakage precursor image when it is notified that the ball is not controlled to the advantageous state is longer than that of the breakage precursor image in the first predetermined part (see FIG. 176 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to effectively indicate that control is not being exercised in an advantageous state.

[Form 15-3]
The gaming machine of form 15-3 is
Among the plurality of image fragments in the second predetermined part, there is a first image fragment having the largest display size;
a second fragment image having the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images when it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
The display size of the first fragment image is larger than that of the second fragment image (see, for example, FIG. 159(J) and FIG. 171(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed differently, which can enhance interest.

[Form 15-4]
The gaming machine of form 15-4 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
When it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a part of the background image that is superimposed thereon (see FIG. 186 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed differently, which can enhance interest.

[Form 15-5]
The gaming machine of form 15-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction (for example, see FIG. 188 and FIG. 190).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way the fragment images are displayed can be made relevant, enhancing interest.

[Form 15-6]
The gaming machine of form 15-6 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part is shifted to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the game is not controlled in an advantageous state;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 158(G) and FIG. 171(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide differences in the display patterns of the effect images, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 16-1]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack mode can be displayed.
When the crack precursor image of the first crack type is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in a first light emitting pattern;
When the crack precursor image of the second crack form is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in a second light emitting pattern;
The light emission of the light emitting means in the first light emitting pattern continues until a second predetermined part is executed;
The light emission of the light emitting means according to the second light emission pattern continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the notification performance in which it is not controlled to the advantageous state ends (see FIG. 158, FIG. 159, FIG. 171, FIG. 176, FIG. 184 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, thereby giving the player a surprise, and further, by using the crack precursor image and a second light-emitting pattern that continues until a predetermined condition is met after the notification effect ends, it is possible to notify the player that the reel is not being properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack mode can be displayed.
The type of background image is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image is displayed in the second predetermined part (see FIGS. 158(A) to 158(F) and 159(I) to 159(K)).
The display mode of the background image is different before the notification of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect and when the fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state (see FIGS. 171(A), 171(B), 171(D), 176, and 184(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, thereby giving the player a surprise, and further, by using the crack precursor image and changing the display mode of the background image before it is notified whether or not control will be exercised in an advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player that control will not be exercised appropriately in an advantageous state.

[Form 18-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a second crack type, a fifth predetermined part that starts a first operation of the movable body, and a sixth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends after the fragment image becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 158, 159, 161, 176, and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, by displaying the crack precursor image and then operating the movable body to display the fragment image, it is possible to provide a powerful presentation.

[Form 18-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
The crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state in the first predetermined part,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 176 and 178).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-1 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when the fifth predetermined part transitions to a sixth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 158(G) and FIG. 161(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide differences in the display patterns of the effect images, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-2 is
The first action is an action in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
When the movable body is placed in the advanced position, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 161(C) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 18-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-3 is
The period of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 178 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
The gaming machine of form 18-4 is
A suggestion effect that suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body, which is different from the second predetermined effect, can be executed;
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a movable body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the movable body in the suggestion performance, a movable body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the movable body in the fifth predetermined part (see FIG. 178 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type together with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends before the fragment image becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 158, 159, 169, 170, 176, and 184(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image, can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and further, by operating the movable body to display the crack precursor image, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 176 and 184).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-1 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when the fourth predetermined part transitions to a fifth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 158(G) and FIG. 169(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-2 is
The second action is an action in which the movable body moves from the advanced position toward the origin position,
When the second action is started, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 169(F) );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 19-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-3 is
The period of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see FIG. 184 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 19-4]
The gaming machine of form 19-4 is
A suggestion effect that suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body, which is different from the second predetermined effect, can be executed;
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a movable body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the movable body in the suggestion performance, a movable body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the movable body in the fourth predetermined part (see FIG. 184 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 20-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image according to the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The specific performance is a performance in which, in response to a first action of the movable body, a display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
In a specific performance, the movable body can execute a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body is started after the fragment image becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 158, 159, 165, 176, and 181).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the specific effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and further, by operating the movable body to display the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-1 is
The first action is an action in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
When the first action is started, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 165(B) );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of a particular presentation.

[Form 20-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-2 is
the effect image can be displayed over a display period including the first display period and the second display period;
The length of the first operation period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are substantially the same,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 181 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the effect of the specific presentation.

[Form 20-3]
The gaming machine of form 20-3 is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a moving body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the moving body in the suggestion performance, a moving body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the moving body in the specific performance (see FIG. 181 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced by the moving body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
Even if a crack precursor image of the first crack form or the second crack form is displayed, the background image can be visually recognized together with the crack precursor image,
When the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect or the second crack aspect is not displayed, an image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer is displayed with a first visibility,
The background image when the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect is displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility,
An image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer when a crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed is displayed with the second visibility over a predetermined range, and is displayed with the first visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (see Figs. 158(E), (F), 160(C), 176, and 177).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display crack precursor images with different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at a variety of times.Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be viewed together with the crack precursor image varies depending on the type of crack pattern, even effects that display similar crack precursor images can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 21-2]
The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility higher than the first visibility and the second visibility (see the enlarged view of FIG. 160(C) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
A corresponding image corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
When the crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack mode, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 160(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the corresponding image can be suitably displayed even during execution of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 21-4]
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
The display period of the crack precursor image of the second crack form is longer than the display period of the crack precursor image of the first crack form (see FIG. 177 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the crack precursor image is displayed can be made different between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-1]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The visibility of the background image is different when the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack aspect is displayed,
The crack precursor image of the second crack type has a longer display period than the crack precursor image of the first crack type,
There are multiple types of crack precursor images for the second crack type.
The expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when a crack precursor image of the second type of the second crack mode is displayed than when a crack precursor image of the first type of the second crack mode is displayed (see Figures 157 to 159, 175, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display crack precursor images with different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, the player will be drawn to the type of crack precursor image with the second crack pattern, so that even effects that display similar crack precursor images can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 22-2]
The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
When a crack precursor image of the first type of the second crack form is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer is different from that when a crack precursor image of the second type of the second crack form is displayed (see Figures 158 and 157).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack precursor image can be displayed differently, which can increase interest.

[Form 22-3]
The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
The first and second predetermined effects can display an effect image of a specific color in common,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first predetermined performance and the second timing predetermined performance (see FIG. 158 and FIG. 157).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide differences in the display patterns of the effect images, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 23-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
A change effect can be executed to change the display mode of the corresponding image corresponding to the variable display,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A corresponding image corresponding to a variable display can be displayed in the special display layer;
The first crack precursor image can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The second crack precursor image can be displayed on a second predetermined display layer having a lower priority than the special display layer,
A special display layer having a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer can display special information related to the variable display,
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a first crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a second crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases,
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease,
When the first predetermined performance is executed, the change performance is not executed,
When the second predetermined performance is executed, a change performance can be executed (see FIGS. 158 to 160, 176, 177, and 204).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect displaying the first cracking precursor image and the second predetermined effect displaying the second cracking precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby allowing the player to be surprised at a variety of times; furthermore, even in effects that similarly display a cracking precursor image, the presence or absence of a display layer or a change effect differs, thereby giving a suitably different impression and increasing interest in the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-1 is
The change effect is an effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed and the predetermined object image performs an action that acts on the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display;
The predetermined object image can be displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 204 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the change presentation can be executed without reducing the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation to a minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-2 is
In response to the action of a predetermined object image, a change emphasis image can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer (see FIG. 204 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the change presentation can be preferably executed even during execution of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
A first predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state can be executed,
A second predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state can be executed.
After the second predetermined performance is performed, a special performance can be performed.
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The display mode of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance is different from that of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined effect includes an image in a suggestive state suggesting that a special effect will be executed,
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance (see FIG. 158, FIG. 176, FIG. 181, FIG. 205, FIG. 206).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, the display manner of the fragment images differs between the first and second predetermined effects, and it is possible to increase the correlation between the fragment images in the second predetermined effect and the effect executed thereafter, so that even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
There are two special effects: the first special effect and the second special effect.
When the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first special effect is executed,
The suggestion mode includes a first suggestion mode suggesting that a first special performance will be executed and a second suggestion mode suggesting that a second special performance will be executed (see FIGS. 205, 206, and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined performance includes a suggestive mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of a background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer can be seen,
The transparent fragment images are displayed more frequently than the suggestive fragment images (see FIG. 207 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-2 is
The fragment image is capable of performing a rotational movement;
In the second predetermined performance, the transparent fragment image has a larger rotation amount than the suggestive fragment image (see FIG. 207).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-4]
The gaming machine of form 24-4 is
The second predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part,
In the first predetermined part, a plurality of fragment images in a suggestive mode are displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed;
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image in a suggestive mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 206 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the pre-stage performance (FIG. 165(C)) can be executed.
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 193(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 193(B2) to (B5)),
The execution period of the first stage performance is longer than the display period of the cracked image of the first mode (see FIG. 181 and FIG. 193 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the preliminary effects create a build-up to the crack, and the crack image of the first mode gives a sense of speed, thereby achieving a suitable crack pattern.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the pre-stage performance (FIG. 165(C)) can be executed.
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 193(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 193(B2) to (B5)),
The combined period during which the cracked image is displayed in the first mode and the period during which it is displayed in the second mode is longer than the execution period of the first stage performance (see FIG. 181 and FIG. 193).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period during which the cracked image is in the first and second modes is made longer than the execution period of the first stage performance, thereby making the cracked pattern more memorable.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image at least partially overlap each other,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than that of the cracked image,
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the cracked image over a first period, and the cracked image is visually recognized over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIGS. 174 to 184 and 188 to 194 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image has a role of hiding the initial display portion of the cracked image, and while fulfilling this role, it prevents the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first aspect and then changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect,
The display means displays an effect image when displaying the cracked image of the first mode, and makes the effect image invisible at a timing before displaying the cracked image of the second mode (see FIGS. 174 to 184 and 188 to 194 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 192(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 192(B2) to (B5)),
The transmittance of the cracked image of the second aspect is different between the first timing and the second timing in the display period of the cracked image of the second aspect (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 192 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the dramatic effect when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 188(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 188(B2) to (B5)),
The specific performance is a performance including displaying a cracked image of the third mode (FIG. 192(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third mode to a fourth mode (FIGS. 192(B2) to (B5)),
The transmittance of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the cracked image of the fourth aspect starts (see FIGS. 176, 180, 188, 192, and 196(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed and when the cracked image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of embodiment 31 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed in a normal state, and includes displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 188(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 188(B2) to (B5)),
The specific effect is an effect that can be executed in a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state, and includes displaying a cracked image of a third mode (FIG. 192 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third mode to a fourth mode (FIGS. 192 (B2) to (B5)).
The transmittance of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the cracked image of the fourth aspect starts (see FIGS. 143 to 145, 176, 180, 188, 192, and 196(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed and when the cracked image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
A background image can be displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The light emission control means includes:
When the cracked image is displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled using the specific brightness data table;
A specific brightness data table is used to control the light emission of the light-emitting means until a specific timing during the display period of the cracked image, and after the specific timing, a brightness data table corresponding to the background image is used to control the light emission of the light-emitting means (see FIGS. 174 to 176 and 179 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably control the light emission of the light emitting means when a broken image is displayed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of embodiment 33 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image at least partially overlap each other,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see FIGS. 174 to 180 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
the sound output means, when a cracked image is displayed in the first pattern, outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 174 ), while, when a cracked image is displayed in the second pattern, does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 181 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of embodiment 35 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed in the first pattern (see FIG. 174), and outputs a sound notifying that the game is controlled to an advantageous state when the cracked image is displayed in the second pattern (see FIG. 184).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions according to the gaming status.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of embodiment 36 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
the crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed at a timing before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed in the first pattern;
the sound output means, when a cracked image is displayed in the first pattern, outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 174 ), while, when a cracked image is displayed in the second pattern, does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 181 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of embodiment 37 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The sound output means is
A predetermined sound can be output when the crack precursor image is displayed,
A specific sound can be output when a cracked image is displayed.
The specific sound output by the sound output means is a sound louder than the predetermined sound (see FIG. 201 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a contrast between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, and to favorably create an impression when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of embodiment 38 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
It is possible to display a cracking precursor image in conjunction with the motion display of the object image,
The sound output means is
When the cracking precursor image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the object image can be output;
When a cracked image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the cracked image can be output (see FIG. 201).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a contrast between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, and to favorably create an impression when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of embodiment 39 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, so that the motion speed of the fragment image of a first size in the first pattern is different from that of the fragment image of a second size smaller than the first size,
In the second pattern, the amount of variation is 0, so that the motion speed of the fragment image of the third size in the second pattern is the same as that of the fragment image of a fourth size smaller than the third size (see FIGS. 186 and 187 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first pattern is a cracking pattern in which the animation effect varies depending on the size, with small fragment images flying quickly and large fragment images being somewhat slower and falling quickly, and can be used when it is desired to show realistic movement, while the second pattern is a cracking pattern in which all fragments are affected by the animation in the same way regardless of size, flying and falling in the same way, allowing the appropriate cracking pattern to be selected depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The image of the debris is displayed in a falling manner from the beginning of the display,
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The speed at which the image fragments fall differs between the first and second patterns due to different gravity value settings (see FIGS. 186 and 187 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the parameter value and varying the speed at which the image fragments fall, a variety of patterns can be created, enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
Since the gravity direction is set differently between the first pattern and the second pattern, the moving direction of the fragment images when they are displayed is different (see FIGS. 186 and 187 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the parameter values and changing the direction in which the fragment images move, a variety of patterns can be created, enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
the first pattern includes a first parameter related to displaying the fragment image and a second parameter related to displaying the fragment image;
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern have a common value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter (see FIGS. 186 and 187 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the value of the first parameter is fixed, creating common parts for the fragment images, while the value of the second parameter is varied to create a variety of patterns, thereby making it possible to create a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment images.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
the first pattern includes a first parameter related to displaying the fragment image and a second parameter related to displaying the fragment image;
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern and the second pattern have a common value of a first parameter and different values of a second parameter,
The second and third patterns have different values of the first parameter and have a common value of the second parameter (see FIGS. 186 and 187 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating common parts for the image fragments in each pattern while using different parameter values, it is possible to construct a stable and diverse display pattern for the image fragments.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
before the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 143, 145, 158 to 160).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the cracked image is displayed in the normal state and when the cracked image is displayed in the special state, different impressions are given, which can increase interest.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first aspect and then changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state;
An effect image is displayed when the cracked image of the first mode is displayed, and the effect image is made non-displayed at a timing before the cracked image of the second mode is displayed (see FIGS. 143, 145, 158, and 159).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The crack image displayed by the first pattern and the crack image displayed by the second pattern are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The moving speed of the cracked image displayed by the first pattern is different from that of the cracked image displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 143, 145, 158 to 160).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect during the special state can be enhanced by using a display pattern of the cracked images that does not disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The degree of expectation that is controlled to be in an advantageous state when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the degree of expectation that is controlled to be in an advantageous state when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 140, 142(C), 143, and 145).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the display pattern of the cracked image, so that the display pattern of the cracked image can draw attention.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed on a predetermined display layer;
A second type of fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
a display period of the first type of fragment image and a display period of the second type of fragment image at least partially overlap each other;
The first type of fragment image is in a form in which a character is drawn,
The second type of fragment image is in a transparent state that allows recognition of at least a part of a background image displayed on a display layer lower than the specific display layer (see FIGS. 193 and 207 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images having different display modes, it is possible to provide a memorable presentation.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of embodiment 49 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed on a predetermined display layer;
A second type of fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
a display period of the first type of fragment image and a display period of the second type of fragment image at least partially overlap each other;
The first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image have different display modes,
The display period of the first type of image fragment is longer than the display period of the second type of image fragment (see FIGS. 193 and 207 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images having different display modes, it is possible to provide a memorable presentation.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
The fragment images displayed in the first area, which is a display area where the movable object is not overlapped, are displayed in a larger amount than the fragment images displayed in the second area, which is a display area where the movable object is overlapped (see Figures 193 and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragments can be displayed appropriately while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of embodiment 51 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
a first fragment image of the plurality of fragment images is displayed in a manner of moving from a first region, which is a display region where the movable object is not overlapped, to a second region, which is a display region where the movable object is overlapped;
A second image fragment of the plurality of image fragments is displayed in a manner that moves within the first area so as not to enter the second area (see FIGS. 193 and 207 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a fragment image that does not enter the area where the movable body overlaps allows the viewer to recognize that the object has broken, while a fragment image that passes through the area where the movable body overlaps provides a dynamic presentation.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
Even after the movable body overlapping the display area of the display means is moved to a position where it is not overlapped with the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see Figs. 193 and 207).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means, the image of the fragment can be displayed in an appropriate manner so that the image of the fragment is not overlooked.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of embodiment 53 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a first type of fragment image corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of second type fragment images when the crack precursor image is displayed;
The second type of fragment image takes a shorter period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see FIGS. 162 and 163 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect of displaying the fragment images can be improved.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 158, 159, and 164).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the specific character appears in common in the display patterns of the multiple cracked images, the specific character attracts more attention.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of embodiment 55 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A specific character can be displayed on a third display layer having a lower priority than the second display layer,
A fourth display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed when the specific character makes an action;
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed when the specific character makes an action,
The display means is
When the first type of cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character, and the effect image is made non-displayable at a predetermined timing after the first type of cracked image is displayed;
When the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is made non-displayable at a specific timing after the second type of cracked image is displayed (see Figs. 158, 159, and 164).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of embodiment 56 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of fragment image is displayed in multiple images in response to an action of a specific character;
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of fragment image is displayed in multiples in response to an action of a specific character,
the first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that changes and moves from a first speed to a second speed over a display period of the first type of fragment image,
The second type of image fragments are displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the second type of image fragments (see FIGS. 158, 159, and 164).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the speed at which the fragment images move can be changed depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment images, thereby improving the dramatic effect.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is different when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 158, 159, 162, and 163).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the expectation for the specific character is heightened, and interest is enhanced by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after the specific character is displayed.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 114 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided at the top left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-hit notification image that encourages the player to perform a right-hit operation, the time-saving remaining display that indicates the number of times the time-saving function is remaining, etc. may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer) the presentation images (object images) such as characters to prevent the presentation images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbol, and the error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer) the presentation images to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the presentation images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. The reserved displays and active displays are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern reserved memory display area in which a first reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern reserved memory display area in which a second reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a reserved display corresponding to the first special pattern when the game state is in a normal state, and is a display area that displays a reserved display corresponding to the second special pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 115). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can be changed between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 114, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 115), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 114). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 114), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also called "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are composed of LEDs (see FIG. 149). The various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 115).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 115).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 115. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a payout device 006SG031 that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on receiving a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 006SG032 that is provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 006SG031 pass, and it is possible to stop driving the payout device 006SG031 depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032.

The payout control board 006SG030 is also connected to a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls a launching device 006SG033 capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether the touch ring 006SG35 is being detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device 006SG033 are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

As shown in FIG. 116, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, so the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image drawing area, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image drawing area, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 117, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as an image of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as an image of layer 2, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as an image of layer 3, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a precursor image of cracking (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as described later as an image of layer 4, a glass plate image 006SG301A as an image to be cracked that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a fragment image 006S resulting from the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken as an image of layer 5. A layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging G302, a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an action effect image described later as an image of layer 6, a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303 described later as an image of layer 7, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an operation prompt image described later as an image of layer 8, a layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a variable display compatible display (reserved display and active display) as an image of layer 9, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a right hit notification image as an image of layer 10. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

The glass plate image 006SG301 drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area is an image that makes the player realize that the display area of the image display device 5 has been cracked by the action of the character or movable object 32, and the glass plate image 006SG301A drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image that makes the player realize that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken. The broken piece image 006SG302 is an image in which a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is changed and displayed to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken by the action of the character or movable object 32.

The glass plate image 006SG301 is an image that is not displayed at the start timing (the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, which will be described later. The glass plate image 006SG301A is also an image (the image to be cracked) that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 at the start timing (the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, which will be described later.

Furthermore, as described below, the start timing of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is such that the switching between the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not visible to the player due to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 with the crack displayed can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, so it is possible to realize a crack (moving display of the fragment image 006SG302) that would not be expected from the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301, and it is possible to make a strong impression of the cracking effect on the player.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in these layer 1 image drawing area to layer 10 image drawing area. Also, as shown in Figures 117 and 118, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the lowest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Images drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area. Also, if a layer 11 image drawing area is further placed in the VRAM area, images drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area.

That is, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image displayed at the lowest level in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5. Furthermore, if a layer 11 image drawing area is further disposed in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area in the image display device 5. Also, while it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a layer 1-3 image drawing area may be provided instead of the layer 1 image drawing area. In this case, the layer 1-1 image drawing area can draw a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) described later, the layer 1-2 image drawing area can draw a chance background image (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), a normal reach background image, a super reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088), and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) described later, and the layer 1-3 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322), a large It is possible to draw a hit notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085), and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 116 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 116 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 119(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 119(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 119(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that a cold start refers to a state in which the data is initialized when the power is turned on, without restoring the data before the power is turned on, and the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that a hot start refers to a state in which the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed based on the backed-up data when the power is turned on. A hot start is also called a power-on without initialization, since no initialization is involved. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor high probability control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but high probability control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability control are performed (high probability high base state, high probability state). Note that the high probability high base state may simply be referred to as the "high probability state".

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, and the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden jackpot). Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the random number value used to judge the variation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other (normal reach)".

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 119(A) are just an example, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 120 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 120, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 121 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table 22, when the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when the pachinko game rr is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 122 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 122(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which after the jackpot gaming state ends, probable variable control and time-saving control are executed to transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "non-probable variable jackpot", in which after the jackpot gaming state ends, only time-saving control is executed to transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The variable probability control and time-saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C are ended on the condition that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, the time-saving control that is started after the end of the non-variable probability jackpot game state is ended on the condition that 100 variable displays are ended, or that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state before the 100 variable displays are ended. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is any of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C, the variable probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot game state ends, so that the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is called a consecutive state. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays unless the variable display result becomes a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 122(A), the allocation of the determination values for the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, while when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 122(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A", which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

123(A) and 123(B) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) and when the time-saving state or the probability change state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is "miss" when the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and for the case where the variable display result is "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the miss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a super reach is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), the following super reach variation patterns are provided: a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop of the decorative symbol and a re-variable display is executed once during the variable display, and then the reach performance of Super Reach α is executed via a normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-2, PB1-2); a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed and the reach performance of Super Reach β is executed via a normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-3, PB1-3); and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, and then the reach performance of Super Reach β is executed via the reach performances of normal reach and Super Reach α, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-4, PB1-4). In this embodiment, the reach effect of Super Reach α corresponds to the Weak S reach effect described below, and the reach effect of Super Reach β corresponds to the Strong S reach effect A and Strong S reach effect B described below.

When the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the super reach variation pattern includes a variation pattern (PA2-6, PB1-6) in which the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed via the normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-7) in which the reach effect of the super reach δ is executed via the normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot. In addition, the reach effect of the super reach γ in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach effect described later, and the reach effect of the super reach δ corresponds to the strong S reach effect A and the strong S reach effect B described later.

As shown in FIG. 123, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 124 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 124(A) to 124(D), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number MR3, if the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3, and if the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table C and the value of the random number MR3. Also, when the game state is time-saving state or high probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table D and the value of the random number MR3. Then, as shown in FIG. 124(E) and FIG. 124(F), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number value MR3, and when the game state is time-saving state or high probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number value MR3.

For example, as shown in FIG. 124(A), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern after executing one pseudo consecutive performance. If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that goes through a normal reach and ends up with a miss on the Super Reach β, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) that goes through a pseudo consecutive performance twice, followed by a normal reach and a Super Reach α and then a miss on the Super Reach β.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124(B), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach after executing one pseudo consecutive performance. If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that goes through a normal reach and results in a miss of the super reach β, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) that goes through a normal reach and super reach α after executing two pseudo consecutive performances and then results in a miss of the super reach β.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124(C), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach after executing one pseudo consecutive performance. If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that goes through a normal reach and results in a miss of the super reach β, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) that goes through a normal reach and super reach α after executing two pseudo consecutive performances and then results in a miss of the super reach β.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a short non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5), and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 551 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-6), If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5); if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach followed by a super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-6); if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach followed by a super reach delta miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-7).

Also, as shown in FIG. 124(E), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) that results in a super reach α jackpot after one pseudo consecutive performance via normal reach, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) that results in a super reach β jackpot after a normal reach, and if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) that results in a super reach β jackpot after two pseudo consecutive performances via normal reach and super reach α.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124(F), when jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) that results in a super reach γ jackpot via a normal reach, and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) that results in a super reach δ jackpot via a normal reach.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of multiple variable patterns for jackpots may be different depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, the player can pay attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, which can increase the interest in the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 115 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 006SG150 as shown in FIG. 125 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 006SG150 shown in FIG. 125 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 006SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 006SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 006SG151C, a game control flag setting section 006SG152, a game control timer setting section 006SG153, a game control counter setting section 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 006SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151A stores the reserved data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started but in which a start winning (first start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, in the order of winning.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151B stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 006SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 006SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 006SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 006SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 006SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 006SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 006SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 115 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 115 is provided with a performance control data holding area 006SG190 as shown in FIG. 126(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 006SG190 shown in FIG. 126(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 006SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 006SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A as shown in FIG. 126 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), a pattern designation command, and a variable category command, are sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, reserved memory number notification command, pattern designation command, and variable category command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A in this embodiment, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display is set, and a continuous break effect flag that can identify whether or not the player is the target of the continuous break effect described below can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart hold memory and the second special chart hold memory.

In addition, in the hold display effect determination process described later, if the execution of the hold display effect is not determined, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal hold display display pattern, and if the execution of the hold display effect is determined, a "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special form (e.g., square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display form is set. After the hold display effect determination process is executed, the hold display update process described later is executed, so that the active display and hold display are displayed in a display form according to each hold display flag (e.g., if the hold display flag value is "0", a white circle (○), if the hold display flag value is "1", a square (◇), and if the hold display flag value is "2", a star (☆) is displayed. In addition, the value of the continuous break effect flag is set in the continuous break effect setting process (see FIG. 139) described later.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the variable category command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the variable category command are stored in sequence in the storage areas corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A shown in FIG. 126(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 126(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 127 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 127, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (step S8). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was fluctuating, it is sufficient if the fluctuating special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, the process enters into a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 128. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 128 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and if necessary, it is possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 128. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 128.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 129. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (006SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (006SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) or not (006SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 006SGS102 is not the upper limit (006SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 006SGS101 (006SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 006SGS102 (006SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (006SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (006SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 006SGS105 (006SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "2" (006SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 006SGS103 and 006SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 006SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 (006SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random numbers extracted in this way and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (006SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 006SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (006SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 128 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step 006SGS112), and then performs settings for sending a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (006SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 128 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of 006SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is started. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. In this way, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Random value judgment process when winning)
FIG. 131 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 006SGS112 of FIG. 130 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 006SG, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, a determination is made by a special symbol normal process described later as to whether or not the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In addition, in a variable pattern setting process described later, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of step 006SGS112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on the result of this determination, the performance control CPU 120 or the like will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 131(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the probability variable flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 (step 006SGS121). When the probability variable flag is on, the CPU 103 identifies the probability variable state (high probability, high base state), when the probability variable flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving state (low probability, high base state), and when both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off, the normal state (low probability base state).

Following the processing of step 006SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 121 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the special chart display result judgment extracted in step 006SGS109 of FIG. 130 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 006SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table selected by the processing of step 006SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 006SGS123; N), the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 006SGS128), is executed, and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on or not, i.e., whether the current game state is either the time-saving state or the guaranteed bonus state (step 006SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C are prepared in advance according to the number of reserved memories. As shown in FIG. 124, among these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, a determination value of 1 to 660 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C, a determination value of 1 to 700 and 1 to 750 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. On the other hand, in miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, a determination value of 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination.

For this reason, in step 006SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 131(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type is determined to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type is executed (step 006SGS133), i.e., the second symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command in the case of a non-variable jackpot, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set according to the game state as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. In addition, in the processing of step 006SGS135, if the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is a time-saving state or a sure jackpot state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is set.

In the processing of step 006SGS138, the variable category is determined according to the range of determination values that includes the random number value MR3, using each variable pattern determination table set in each step and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variable pattern (step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that has a variable display mode of "non-reach" regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that has a variable display mode of "super reach", and an "other" variable category that has a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), are provided, and it is sufficient to be able to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 006SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS132), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 129 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 132, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 006SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 121 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150). In addition, in this step 006SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of winning is low and the probability flag is off (in this embodiment, the probability is low and the probability is high), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the result of the special chart display falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table selected in step 006SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 006SGS150, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is judged (determined) with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 122(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot type the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as a variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is to be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, it is set to "3". After processing step 006SGS155, proceed to step 006SGS156.

Also, if step 006SGS150 determines that the result is a miss (step 006SGS150; N), step 006SGS156 is executed without executing steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "high probability jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 129 as the variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 133, the CPU 103 selects a variable pattern determination table according to the state (step 006SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is in the normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is one, the miss variable pattern determination table A is selected, if the game state is in the normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is two, the miss variable pattern determination table B is selected, if the game state is in the normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is three, the miss variable pattern determination table C is selected, and if the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the miss variable pattern determination table D is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is in the normal state, the jackpot variable pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the jackpot variable pattern determination table B is selected.

Then, based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in a fluctuation random number buffer, the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of multiple types (step 006SGS162).

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS162, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 006SGS163). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS163, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts to change (step 006SGS164). For example, when the special symbol change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 006SGS164, the special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS165). The special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game to the fixed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), being displayed stationary. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special pattern variation process (step 006SGS166), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS166, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 128 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 129 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol by turning on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S113 (step 006SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 006SGS182).

When the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 006SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 006SGS187). The number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4", which corresponds to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS191, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0". If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving counts, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS194). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off (step 006SGS195) to end the time-saving control, and then sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the sending of a game state designation command is set according to the state of the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 006SGS197).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S117 of FIG. 129 as a jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag and time-saving flag are turned on (step 006SGS207, step 006SGS208). In addition, the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is set to be sent according to the type of jackpot (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting up the sending of a game state designation command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (step 006SGS216).

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 136. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 136 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, the operation of displaying the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of lighting the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the operation of driving the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various performance devices. In addition, the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update processing (step S77), a demo performance control processing (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display update processing (step S79) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control can be executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of a specific effect (for example, a background change effect or a reach effect, which will be described later) during the variable display or a change in the game state.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes a process for adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and a process for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command until the customer waiting demo performance starts, and may start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 136 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 137, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a reserved display performance determination process that determines the display mode of the reserved display displayed in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F (step S160). In addition, a reserved display update process (step S161) that updates the display mode of the reserved display in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the display mode of the active display in the active display area 5F is executed. The reserved display update process is also a process for newly starting the display of the reserved display or the active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the reserved display performance determination process. After the reserved display update process is executed, for example, one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 as follows is selected and executed according to the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Hold display performance determination process)
Fig. 138 is a determination ratio of the display mode of the reserved display and active display in the reserved display performance shown in Fig. 137. In the reserved display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 006SGS194A shown in Fig. 126 (B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set. If there is an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the pattern designation command in the entry, and the variable category is identified from the variable category command in the entry, and based on these identified variable display results and variable category, the presence or absence of the reserved display performance and the performance pattern, i.e., the display mode of the reserved display and active display are determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 138, when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 70% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 0% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is a 75% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 20% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, there is a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in effect pattern α, and there is a 10% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in effect pattern β.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold display effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "0" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "1" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern α, and sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "2" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern β.

In this embodiment, as described above, after setting a value between 0 and 2 to the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display update process (step S61). When the pending display flag value is set to "0", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white circle (○), when the pending display flag value is set to "1", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white square (◇), and when the pending display flag value is set to "2", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

With these settings, when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A or a white star in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white circle, and when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white star in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A, so that the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, i.e., whether or not a pending display effect is executed and the effect pattern, can be used to draw the player's attention.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 139 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 137. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 006SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 006SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as even symbols as the stopping symbol. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the system determines a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a miss such as "767" (a losing symbol) according to the variation pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 006SGS276, the performance control CPU 120 executes a continuous breaking performance setting process (step 006SGS277) for executing a continuous breaking performance during the variable display, a dialogue preview performance setting process (step 006SGS278) for executing a dialogue preview performance during the variable display, a background change performance setting process (step 006SGS279) for executing a background change performance during the variable display, a reach suggestion performance setting process (step 006SGS280) for executing a reach suggestion performance during the variable display, and a cut-in performance setting process (step 006SGS281) for executing a cut-in performance during the variable display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS282), and starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 006SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous Breaking Effects Setting Processing)
Fig. 140 (A) is a flow chart showing the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 139. In the continuous break effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the game state is normal or not (step 006SGS311). If the game state is normal (step 006SGS311; Y), it refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A, identifies the presence or absence of an entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag ("0" or "1") is not set (step 006SGS312), and judges whether there is an entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set (step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the continuous break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), proceed to step 006SGS318. If there is an entry with the value of the continuous break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), determine whether or not to execute the continuous break effect based on the designation command and variable category command stored in the entry (step 006SGS314). Note that in the normal state in this embodiment, the continuous break effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display result of the target variable display will be a jackpot by executing it over multiple variable displays on a variable display that has not yet been executed (see FIG. 143).

When the game state is normal, in step 006SGS314, as shown in FIG. 140(B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 20% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 80%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 80% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 20%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 60% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 40%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 50% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 50%.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, in step 006SGS314, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 30% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 70% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 30%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a normal reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 50% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 50%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 40% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 60%. Thus, in this embodiment, the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state when the continuous break presentation is executed, that is, the expectation of a jackpot, is different between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability change state.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute the continuous break effect in the processing of step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it has decided to execute the continuous break effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous break effect flag for the entry to "1" and proceeds to step 006SGS318. If it has decided not to execute the continuous break effect (step 006SGS315; N), the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous break effect flag for the entry to "0" and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1", that is, whether the execution of the consecutive break presentation has been decided (step 006SGS318). If there is no entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" (step 006SGS318; N), the consecutive break presentation setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" (step 006SGS318; Y), it further determines whether the entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, whether it is an entry stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set to "1" is not an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; N), the execution setting of the first continuous break effect is performed in response to the fact that the variable display is not a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS320). If the entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display is a variable display due to a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display due to a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous break effect setting process is terminated, and if the variable display is a variable display due to a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321; N), the execution setting of a second continuous break effect is performed in accordance with the variable display being a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is decided to execute a continuous break effect when the game state is normal, the first continuous break effect is executed in the variable display prior to the variable display that is the target of the continuous break effect. Then, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous break effect, if the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variable pattern, the second continuous break effect is not executed, whereas if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variable pattern, the second continuous break effect is executed.

If the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state (step 006SGS311; N), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the continuous break effect according to the variable display fluctuation pattern and ends the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the presentation control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the continuous break effect according to the variable display fluctuation pattern. At this time, if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous break effect is determined at the lowest rate, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous break effect is determined at the highest rate (execution rate of the continuous break effect for each fluctuation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). Then, when it is decided to execute the consecutive break effect, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach, the variable display is set to execute the consecutive break effect (first consecutive break effect) once or twice, and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a normal reach or super reach, the variable display is set to execute the first consecutive break effect twice and one second consecutive break effect after the two first consecutive break effects.

In other words, the continuous breaking effect during the time-saving state or the probability bonus state in this embodiment is an effect that can be executed multiple times within one variable display, and it is an effect that suggests a reach depending on the number of times it is executed.

(Dialogue preview performance setting process)
Fig. 141 (A) is a flow chart showing the dialogue preview performance setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 139. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue preview performance setting process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of non-reach without shortening, normal reach, and super reach (step 006SGS331; N), the presence or absence of execution of the dialogue preview performance and the performance pattern are determined according to the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in FIG. 141(B), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 70%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 30%. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 60%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 35%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern B at a rate of 5%. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 40%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 10%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern B at a rate of 20%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern C at a rate of 30%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be performed at a rate of 10%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern A at a rate of 5%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern B at a rate of 10%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern C at a rate of 75%.

As shown in FIG. 141 (C), presentation pattern A is a presentation pattern in which the line "Chance?!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance, presentation pattern B is a presentation pattern in which the line "Hot!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance, and presentation pattern C is a presentation pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141(B), when the dialogue preview performance is executed during variable display, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the dialogue preview performance is not executed (not executed). Furthermore, when the dialogue preview performance is executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set highest when the dialogue preview performance is executed in performance pattern C, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set lowest when the dialogue preview performance is executed in performance pattern A (jackpot expectation depending on whether the dialogue preview performance is executed and the performance pattern: performance pattern C > performance pattern B > performance pattern A > not executed).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in FIG. 139 will be described. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7. If the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7, the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A is referenced.

When the game is in the normal state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A does not store a pattern designation command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserved memory for a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will not be executed with a probability of 60%, and the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will be executed with a failure pattern (if the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed with a failure pattern, and if ...2, PA2-3, PB1-2, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed with a failure pattern. A failure pattern of background change performance B is executed if the change pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a change in the background image and an execution of a successful pattern of the background change performance (a successful pattern of background change performance A is executed if the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, and an execution of a successful pattern of background change performance B is executed if the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4) is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, when the game state is in the time-saving state/probable bonus state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, in other words, if there is no reserved memory for a jackpot, it will decide not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect 50% of the time, not to change the background image and to perform the background change effect in a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, it will perform the background change effect in a failure pattern A) 45% of the time, and to perform the background image change and to perform the background change effect in a success pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, it will perform the background change effect in a success pattern A) 5% of the time.

In addition, when the game is in the normal state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserved memory for a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), the background image will not be changed and the background change presentation will not be performed with a probability of 30%, and the background image will not be changed and the background change presentation will be performed with a failure pattern (if the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change presentation will be performed with a failure pattern of background change presentation A, and the variable display The execution of a change in the background image and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance A; if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance B) is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of a change in the background image and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance A; if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance B) is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A stores a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is a reserved memory for a jackpot, the game determines not to change the background image and not to execute the background change effect at a rate of 20%, not to change the background image and to execute the background change effect in a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, execute the background change effect in a failure pattern A) at a rate of 0%, and execute the background image change and execute the background change effect in a success pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, execute the background change effect in a success pattern A) at a rate of 80%. In this way, in this embodiment, the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot when the background change effect is executed is different between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state, i.e., the probability of winning.

When it is decided to execute a background change effect using one of the effect patterns, an execution setting according to the effect pattern of the background change effect is made, and the background change effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting. When it is decided to change the background image (when it is decided to execute a background change effect using a successful pattern), a background image change setting is made. The background image change can be executed in the background display update processing (step S79) shown in FIG. 136.

(Reach suggestion performance setting process)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006SGS280) shown in Fig. 139 will be described. In the reach suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3. If the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, it determines whether or not to execute the reach suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect according to the change pattern of the variable display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 142(B), when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the reach suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 80% of the time, and the reach suggestion effect is determined to be executed in a failure pattern 20% of the time. Also, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, the reach suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 30% of the time, and the reach suggestion effect is determined to be executed in a success pattern 70% of the time. In other words, in this embodiment, when the reach suggestion effect is executed, the reach (normal reach or super reach reach effect) is set to be executed at a higher rate than when the reach suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the reach suggestion effect is executed, the player is notified that the reach will not be reached because the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern, while the player is notified that the reach suggestion effect will be reached because the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern.

When it is decided to execute one of the reach suggestion effect patterns, an execution setting is made according to the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect, and the reach suggestion effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) shown in Fig. 139 will be described. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7. If the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7, it determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect according to the variable display result of the variable display.

For example, when the game state is normal, as shown in FIG. 142(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in effect is determined not to be executed 65% of the time, the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern X 30% of the time, and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern Y 5% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern X 20% of the time, and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern Y 70% of the time.

That is, in this embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set to be controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set to be controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern Y (whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the jackpot expectation of the effect pattern: effect pattern Y> effect pattern X> no cut-in effect). Also, when the game state is in the time-saving state/probability change state, if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 70%, the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern X at a rate of 30%, and the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern Y at a rate of 0%. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%, the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern X at a rate of 15%, and the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern Y at a rate of 75%. In this embodiment, the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state when a cut-in effect is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation rate, differs between the normal state and the time-saving/high probability state.

The cut-in effect in this embodiment is an effect that displays different images (for example, an image of the letters "Hot!!" or an image of the letters "Chance!") depending on the effect pattern, and the proportion of the effect that is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on which image is displayed (which effect pattern is executed) (in this embodiment, effect pattern X is an effect pattern that displays an image of the letters "Chance!", and effect pattern Y is an effect pattern that displays an image of the letters "Hot!!").

When it is decided to execute a cut-in effect using one of the effect patterns, an execution setting corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is made, and the cut-in effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting.

In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is exemplified as an effect accompanied by a cracking effect (see Fig. 144 and Fig. 168), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect may have an effect pattern accompanied by a cracking effect and an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect. For example, the effect pattern Y with a high expectation of a jackpot may be an effect pattern accompanied by a cracking effect, and the effect pattern X with a low expectation of a jackpot may be an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect. Furthermore, when the effect pattern X is set as an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect in this way, when the effect pattern X of the cut-in effect is set as an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect, the display mode of the strip-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 may be determined from a plurality of modes according to the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined in different proportions from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or not). In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is accompanied by a cracking effect, and when the cut-in effect is not accompanied by a cracking effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the image that is further displayed.

(Description of the production)
As described above, in this embodiment, at the start of the variable display, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the cut-in effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the cut-in effect, multiple effects can be executed during the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. 144, when the game state is normal, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. Note that the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect may be set as effects that cannot be executed in the normal state and can be executed only in the time-saving state or the probability change state. In this case, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determination ratios of FIG. 140 (B) and FIG. 142 (C). In this way, different types of crack effects can be performed in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the special state.

As shown in Figures 143 to 145, the first continuous cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 as the image to be cracked, is cracked from the start timing of the variable display, and cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack has occurred breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The first continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, while the first consecutive break effect is an effect that may be executed in a variable display prior to the variable display that is the pre-read target, in a time-saving state or a probability-change state, it is an effect that may be executed multiple times during the execution of one variable display, and depending on the number of times it is executed, it is also an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

The second continuous cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked is executed from the start of the variable display, and a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurs is cracked (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The second continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the pre-read target.

The dialogue preview performance is a performance in which an operation promotion image urging the player to operate push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion performance, and then in response to the operation of push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurred breaks (the broken area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The line preview effect is an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area subject to the crack effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the crack effect) and the other display areas, and one of the lines "Chance!", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!" is displayed in the cracked area (area subject to the crack effect), and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the line displayed (the displayed line suggests the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (the expected probability of a jackpot)).

The background change performance A is a performance that may change the background image by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 and executing a crack performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. Note that the background change performance A may be executed in a successful pattern in which the character's action causes cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the background image to change as the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in its entirety, or in a failed pattern in which the character does not appear and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break), and the background image does not change.

The background change effect B is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, thereby changing the background image. Background change performance B may be performed in a success pattern in which two stages of cracks appear on the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to crack, changing the background image, or in a failure pattern (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) in which the first stage of cracks appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 but the second stage of cracks does not occur and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack, or the first and second stage of cracks appear on the glass plate image 006SG301 but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack, so the background image does not change.

The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance in which, when the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a specific combination during execution of the variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a crack performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in its entirety. In addition, in this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive performance is executed up to two times during one variable display, and the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A broken in the first pseudo consecutive performance is different from the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A broken in the second pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 123 and 124, the more times the pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state). In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of winning) depending on the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the broken performance executed as part of the pseudo consecutive performance.

The reach suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the achievement of a reach during variable display, and may result in the achievement of a reach when a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. The reach suggestion effect may be executed in a successful pattern in which a reach is achieved by causing a crack to appear in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of a character, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to break, or in a failed pattern in which a reach is not achieved because the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break) despite the crack occurring due to the action of a character.

The weak development effect is an effect in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and a glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, thereby informing the player of the transition to a Super Reach α reach effect if the game state is in a normal state, and informing the player of the transition to a Super Reach γ reach effect if the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state. The weak development effect is also an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken without any cracks being generated by the action of the character.

When the game state is in the normal state, the strong development effect A is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach β by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 after the reach effect of the super reach α, and executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.When the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state, the strong development effect A is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach δ by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 after the reach effect of the normal reach, and executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.

The strong development performance B is also a performance in which cracks occur without the action of a character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. During the reach performance of Super Reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby notifying the transition to the reach performance of Super Reach β. This is a performance in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without cracks occurring regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of a character.

The cut-in effect is an effect in which, after an operation prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the push button 31B, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked without any cracks occurring due to the movement of the movable body or the action of the character. In addition, the cut-in effect is an effect in which different cut-in images are displayed according to the effect pattern from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the cut-in image displayed (the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state (the expected probability of a jackpot) is suggested by the cut-in image displayed).

The result notification effect is an effect in which an operation prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect, urging the player to operate the push button 31B, and then in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby notifying the player that the game has been controlled to a jackpot game state. The result notification effect may be executed in a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 after the movable body has been moved is cracked, thereby notifying that the game is in a jackpot game state, or in a failure pattern in which the movable body does not move, the glass plate image 006SG301 does not crack, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), thereby notifying that the game is in a jackpot game state, i.e., that the variable display result is a miss. The result notification effect of this embodiment may be executed exceptionally in the variable display of PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach jackpot or non-reach miss variable patterns, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state (see FIG. 149).

(Performance timing for each variation pattern)
Next, the rough execution timing and execution period of each variation pattern of the effects in this embodiment will be explained. First, the variable display when the game state is normal will be explained. As shown in Fig. 146 (A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-1, which is a variation pattern of no shortening and no reach loss, the first continuous break effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 146 (B), when variable display is executed in PA1-2 and PA1-3, which are shortened non-reach missed variable patterns, the first consecutive break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 146(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-1 or PB1-1, which is the variable pattern for a normal reach jackpot or a normal reach miss, a short time after the start of the variable display, the dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and normal reach reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the effect period.

As shown in FIG. 146(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach α jackpot and the Super Reach α miss, the second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, the first pseudo consecutive effect, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, and the Super Reach α reach effect can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach α reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the Super Reach α reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 147(A), when the variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach β jackpot and the Super Reach β miss, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, the Super Reach α reach effect, the strong development effect A, and the Super Reach β reach effect can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In particular, the characters displayed in the background change effect A begin to be displayed after the dialogue in the dialogue preview effect (display of the cracked area of the display area of the image display device 5) has gone invisible, so a new crack effect will not occur when a new crack effect has already occurred, preventing the player's attention from being scattered across multiple crack effects, thereby preventing a decrease in the effectiveness of each crack effect.

As shown in FIG. 147(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach β jackpot and the Super Reach β miss, the second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo consecutive effect, second pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, Super Reach α reach effect, strong development effect B, and Super Reach β reach effect can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 146 to 148, the variable display in which the background change effect B is executed and the variable display in which the dialogue preview effect is executed are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect may be executable effects during the same variable display. Furthermore, in this case where the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect are executable effects during the same variable display, when the execution of the background change effect B is decided, the execution period of the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect may not overlap. In this way, for example, it is possible to prevent the player who has executed the crack effect as the background change effect B from mistaking it for the crack effect to be executed as the dialogue preview effect while a crack is occurring as the background change effect B, that is, the player from mistaking it for the background image to be changed.

Next, we will explain the variable display when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state. As shown in Figures 148(A) and 148(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, if it is decided to execute the continuous crack effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss and non-reach jackpot fluctuation patterns, the first continuous crack effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, and if it is decided to execute the background change effect as a pre-reading targeting PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot fluctuation pattern, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, for the variable display of PB1-5, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, a performance in which cracks gradually expand in the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display prior to the variable display as a pre-reading preview performance may be executed, and a performance in which a cracking performance is executed at the start of the variable display of PB1-5 and a jackpot pattern is displayed (a so-called instant win performance, special continuous cracking performance) may be executed. In addition, since this performance is an instant win performance, the moving speed of the fragments displayed as the cracking performance may be made faster than the fragments displayed as other cracking performances.

As shown in Figures 148(C) and 148(D), when variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, if it has been decided to execute a consecutive break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss and non-reach jackpot fluctuation patterns, the first consecutive break effect can be executed twice individually from the start timing of the variable display, and when it has been decided to execute a background change effect as a pre-reading targeting PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot fluctuation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 149(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variable pattern, if it is subject to the consecutive break effect and if the execution of the background change effect has not been determined as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot variable pattern, and when the variable display is executed in PB1-5, which is a non-reach jackpot variable pattern, the first consecutive break effect is executed three times individually from the start timing of the variable display, and then the result notification effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 149(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variable pattern for a normal reach miss, no effects are executed except for the variable display of the decorative pattern from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing, and only the reach effect of the normal reach is executed from the reach timing.

As shown in FIG. 149(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-6, PB1-6, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach γ jackpot or the Super Reach γ miss, no effects are executed except for the variable display of the decorative pattern from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing, and from the reach timing, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, and the Super Reach γ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the Super Reach γ reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 149(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7, PB1-7, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach δ jackpot or the Super Reach δ miss, the background change performance A can be executed during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing. In addition, from the reach timing, the normal reach reach performance, the strong development performance A, and the Super Reach δ reach performance can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach δ reach performance, the cut-in performance and the result notification performance are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach δ reach performance.

(Super Reach Alpha presentation flow)
Next, the flow of presentation in Super Reach α will be described with reference to Figures 150 to 152. Figure 150 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. Figure 151 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. Figure 152 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α.

As shown in FIG. 150 (A1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach α starts, the first background image (for example, an image showing a daytime cityscape) is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, the second continuous cracking performance starts. Specifically, when the second continuous cracking performance starts, a cracking precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in a cracked form by displaying a crack in a part of the cracking precursor image (see FIG. 150 (A2)), a part of the crack target image that replaces the cracking precursor image is cracked, and a cracking performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed. In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed on the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance starts. After that, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the type of character image displayed suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see FIG. 150 (A3)). After the second continuous crack performance ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the second consecutive crack performance, the dialogue preview performance begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the dialogue preview performance begins, an operation prompting image that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed (see FIG. 150 (A4)). The operation prompting image is composed of a button image that resembles the push button 31B, a text image that reads "PRESS!!", an indicator image that indicates the valid operation period, and an effect image.

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation valid period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the crack precursor image, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 150 (A5)), a part of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image breaks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect starts. After that, a text image saying "Chance!?" is displayed in a partially cracked area (specific range) of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image, and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot (see FIG. 150 (A6)). After the dialogue preview effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the dialogue preview performance ended, the background change performance A starts. Specifically, after an effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 150 (A7)), if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see FIG. 150 (A8)). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the motion of the character image (for example, the motion of the character kicking), and after a crack is displayed in a cracked form by displaying a crack in a part of the crack precursor image (see FIG. 150 (A9)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 150 (A10)). In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed on the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image (for example, a special zone image showing a wilderness landscape) is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 150 (A11)). After background change performance A ends, variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect begins. Specifically, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 150 (A12)). Next, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a mallet), and a crack is displayed on the left side of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a first crack state (see FIG. 150 (A13)). Then, a crack is displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a mallet), causing the crack precursor image to change from the first crack state to a second crack state (see FIG. 150 (A14)). Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C with a mallet) (FIG. 150 (A15)), if a crack has been determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 150 (A16)).

In addition, after the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a specified period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, decorative symbols of the same number are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N reach effect begins.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, the weak development effect starts. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 150 (A17)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the character image's action (for example, the character moves toward the front side of the display screen to punch the glass plate) (see FIG. 151 (A18)), and the entire area of the break target image that replaces the breakage precursor image is broken without any cracks being displayed in a part of the breakage precursor image, and a breakage effect is executed in which multiple fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 151 (A19)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect A (for example, a bowling match between a friendly character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 151 (A20) to (A22)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance A starts. Specifically, after the development pattern with the word "development" displayed in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 151 (A23)), a cracking precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a performance position overlapping with the approximate center position of the display screen), and a cracking performance is executed in which the entire area of the cracking target image that replaces the cracking precursor image is cracked without any cracks being displayed in a part of the cracking precursor image, and multiple fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 151 (A24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a reach title image is displayed and a strong S reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 151 (A25) to (A27)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the strong S reach performance, the cut-in performance begins. Specifically, an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the strong S reach performance (see FIG. 151 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation effective period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a cracking precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a cracking performance is executed in which the entire area of the cracking target image that replaces the cracking precursor image is cracked without displaying any cracks in a part of the cracking precursor image, and multiple fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance begins. After that, a text image that reads "Heat!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see FIG. 151 (A29)). After the cut-in performance ends, the strong S reach performance is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, the result notification effect begins. Specifically, first, an image of an ally character delivering a final blow is displayed (see FIG. 152 (A30)), and then the ally character's action is displayed in slow motion and the image is faded out (see FIG. 152 (A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 152 (A32)), and then a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a predetermined performance position between the origin position and the performance position), and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (for example, a form in which a crack appears downward from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 152 (A33)).

Next, in response to the action of the movable body (for example, a return-to-origin action in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined performance position above the display screen to the origin position), the entire area of the target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 152 (A34)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, the determined decorative patterns of the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character. In addition, the background image is displayed as the fifth background image 006SG085 for a jackpot (e.g., a rainbow-style image), the movable lamp 9d is lit in a predetermined light color (e.g., rainbow), a predetermined sound effect is output, and it is announced that the jackpot game state has been controlled (see FIG. 152 (A35)), after which the background image returns to the first background image and the fixed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is displayed stationary (see FIG. 152 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss display result, an image of an enemy character's punch hitting an ally character is displayed (see FIG. 152 (A37)), and then a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed without the movable body 32 moving, and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (for example, a form in which a crack appears in the center of the display screen), and a gray image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 152 (A38)).

Next, after a white-out image (effect image) is displayed (see FIG. 152 (A39)), the transparency of the white-out image increases, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is temporarily stopped, and it is announced that the friendly character has been defeated in a battle with the enemy character (FIG. 152 (A40)). In addition, after it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, the background image returns to the first background image, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 152 (A41)).

(Super Reach β performance flow)
Next, the flow of the presentation in the super reach β will be described with reference to Figures 153 and 154. Figure 153 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in the super reach β. Figure 154 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 153 (B1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach β starts, the first background image is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. When a predetermined time has passed since the variable display started, the background change performance B starts. Specifically, when the background change performance B starts, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed at the bottom left of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 153 (B2)), and then the crack display area is displayed in two places on the right side of the crack precursor image, so that the crack state of the crack precursor image changes stepwise (see FIG. 153 (B3)), and if a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 153 (B4)). In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 153 (B5)).

After the background change performance A ends, the variable display is executed again, and after a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 153 (B6)), a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, causing the variable display mode to become a reach mode (see FIG. 153 (B7)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect begins. Specifically, in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive pattern with the word "NEXT" displayed, indicating that the re-variable display will begin, is displayed decelerating just before the stop display position (see FIG. 153 (B8)).

Next, after the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 153 (B9)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 153 (B10)), and then, in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position above the display screen to a performance position overlapping with the approximate center position of the display screen), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 153 (B11)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack performance. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "x2" indicating the number of times the re-variable display is performed is displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (see FIG. 153 (B12) to (B13)).

In the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive pattern passes through the stop display position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern tentatively displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R is displayed, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see FIG. 153 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive performance of a triple pattern, the pseudo-consecutive performance with the word "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-consecutive performance is decelerated and displayed in front of the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 153 (B14)). After the pseudo-consecutive performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 153 (B15)), a cracking prediction image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the cracking prediction image, the cracking prediction image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 153 (B16)), the entire area of the cracking target image that replaces the cracking prediction image is cracked according to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to the performance position overlapping with the approximately center position of the display screen), and a cracking performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 153 (B17)). After the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a certain period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "x3" is displayed, indicating the number of times the variable display can be resumed, and then the variable display resumes (see Figure 154 (B18)-(B19)).

After the variable display is resumed for the second time in the case of a pseudo consecutive performance of a two-row pattern, or for the third time in the case of a pseudo consecutive performance of a three-row pattern, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed temporarily stopped (see FIG. 154 (B20)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in an N reach (see FIG. 154 (B21)), and the N reach performance begins.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, the weak development effect starts. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 154 (B22)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 154 (B23)) in response to the character image's action (for example, the character moves toward the front side of the display screen to punch the glass plate), and a breakage effect is executed in which the entire area of the break target image that replaces the breakage precursor image breaks without any cracks being displayed in a part of the breakage precursor image, and multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 154 (B24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect (for example, a bowling match between a friendly character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 154 (B25) to (B26)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance B starts. Specifically, when the strong development performance B starts, a cracking premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the cracking premonition image, the cracking premonition image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 154 (B27)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the cracking premonition image is cracked, and a cracking performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 154 (B28)). In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a development pattern with the word "development" displayed in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 154 (B29)), and then a reach title image is displayed, and the strong S reach performance B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 154 (B30)). Furthermore, the Strong S reach performance B is an S reach performance with a higher expectation than the Strong S reach performance A. Also, since the Strong S reach performance B is an S reach performance with a higher expectation than the Strong S reach performance A, the cut-in performance described below is more likely to be executed in performance pattern Y. In other words, the Strong S reach performance B is a performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 described below is more likely to be displayed than the Strong S reach performance A.

Strong S Reach Performance B is almost the same as Strong S Reach Performance A of Super Reach α, except for the type of enemy character, etc., so we will not go into detailed explanation of the flow up until the end of the variable display.

(Examples of various effects)
Next, examples of the operation of the cracking effects in various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to Figures 155 to 171.

In addition, the following explanation will explain an example of the expression used to indicate the display mode.

A "fade-out display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image increases over time, whereas a "fade-in display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image decreases over time.

An "animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame earlier, and visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transparency of the displayed image different from that of the image one frame earlier. In other words, an "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement, such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display", and "frame-out display", but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display", in which the display mode, such as color tone, changes. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) in which the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous image, and the display mode does not change at all.

As shown in Figures 155 to 171, the decorative patterns (for low base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display section consisting of a circular number base section when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section, a character display section displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" on the number display section, an information display section consisting of a rectangular information base section when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base section, and a roughly rectangular base display section displayed so as to surround the periphery of the number display section, character display section, and information display section (see Figure 114, etc.).

Although no detailed explanation will be given, when the game state is a high base state or in other presentation modes, decorative patterns with a different display mode from the decorative patterns for the low base state described above may be variably displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, as an example of the variable display mode of the decorative patterns for the low base state, a vertical scrolling display from the top to the bottom of the display screen has been given, but other variable display modes may be used, or the variable display mode may differ depending on the game state or presentation mode.

The display area 5S provided in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern. The small pattern consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but it is not necessary that all the numbers of both patterns correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern may be numbers "1" to "5", which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" of the decorative pattern, or may be symbols or figures different from the numbers of the decorative pattern.

The special pattern pending memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending display 006SG101 (see FIG. 204) and the second pending display (not shown) corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen displays the active display 006SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed. Note that the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, the small pattern, the special pattern pending memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common in all performance modes.

<First consecutive break effect and second consecutive break effect>
Details of the operation example of the first and second consecutive break effects will be described with reference to Fig. 155 and Fig. 156. Fig. 155 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the first consecutive break effect. Fig. 156 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the second consecutive break effect.

As shown in FIG. 155 (A), when the game state is normal, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R and the second continuous cracking performance is started, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility which is lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out (see Figure 155 (B)). In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability-changing state, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the second continuous cracking performance starts, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a cracking precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area higher than the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability-changing state, and cracks are displayed to radially expand from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative symbols displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while they are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the cracking state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken (the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state), and a broken effect is executed in which a plurality of broken images 006SG302 larger than the small broken image 006SG302A scatter. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the broken effect starts (see FIG. 155(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 become visible (see FIG. 155(D)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 155(E)).

Thereafter, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314, which are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A, are displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is completed (see Figure 155 (F)), and then the glass plate image 006SG301A, character image 006SG305, and background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see Figure 155 (G)). Here, the background effect image 006SG314 when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed is displayed with the second visibility in a predetermined range other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, and is displayed with the first visibility, which is higher than the second visibility, in the crack display area 006SG304 (specific range). In other words, because the visibility differs between the non-cracked area and the part visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156, the second continuous breaking effect is almost the same as the first continuous breaking effect except for the type of character that appears, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Note that in this embodiment, the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect are illustrated as being almost the same in terms of their operation examples, but the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect may be different in terms of their operation examples.

For example, the first and second consecutive cracking performances may use the same cracking pattern D, and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions may be the same, but the position at which the fragment image 006SG302 begins to display when cracking begins may be different, for example, by displaying the crack on the right side in FIG. 155(B) and the crack on the left side in FIG. 156(B). In this way, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the first and second consecutive cracking performances.

In addition, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image can indicate whether the first or second continuous breaking effect will be executed. Also, the crack patterns can be made different between the first and second continuous breaking effects. In particular, for the second continuous breaking effect, the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed can be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

In addition, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous cracking effect, and a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect, and either may be output together with the cracking sound when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voice may be output after the cracking sound has been output when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited.

<Dialogue preview performance>
Details of an operation example of the dialogue preview performance will be described with reference to Fig. 157. Fig. 157 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 157(A), when the dialogue preview performance starts while the decorative pattern is being displayed variably in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, an operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 (see FIG. 157(B)).

Next, when push button 31B is operated, or when the effective operation period ends without push button 31B being operated, the operation prompting image 006SG310 is hidden and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a precursor image of cracking in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked form. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 157(C)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a broken effect is executed in which a plurality of broken images 006SG302 larger than the small broken image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the broken effect starts (see FIG. 157 (D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making it possible to see the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 157(E)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 157(F)).

Thereafter, in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished, a text image 006SG306 indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, and a dialogue background image 006SG087 that serves as the background for the text image 006SG306 are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301A (see FIG. 157(F)). Here, the dialogue background image 006SG087 and the text image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with the first visibility, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the area other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with the second visibility that is lower than the first visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the portion visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the serif background image 006SG087, and the text image 006SG306 are hidden (see FIG. 157(H)).

157(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks (e.g., a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image can indicate which of the dialogue text images 006SG306, "Chance!?", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!", will be displayed. Also, the crack pattern can be made different depending on the type of dialogue text (such as the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302. In particular, when "Super Hot!" is displayed, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in slow motion to increase the level of attention), and the position of the crack (e.g., the closer to the center the higher the expectation) or the range of the crack (e.g., the wider the range of the crack the higher the expectation) can be changed while using a common crack pattern. Additionally, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305, and either may be output together with a crackling sound when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voice may be output after the crackling sound has been output when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crackling sound may be limited.

<Background change effect A>
Details of an operation example of background change presentation A will be described with reference to Fig. 158 and Fig. 159. Fig. 158 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change presentation A. Fig. 159 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change presentation A.

As shown in Figure 158 (A), when the game state is normal, when background change performance A is initiated while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, an effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 and is gradually enlarged (see Figures 158 (B) and (C)), after which the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed (see Figure 158 (D)). Also, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, when the background change performance A starts while the decorative pattern is being displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the 6th background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability change state, and after gradually enlarging, the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

The effect image 006SG320 displayed in FIG. 158(B) is a presentation that teases whether or not the character image 006SG305 will be displayed in FIG. 158(D). In the case of a successful pattern, the display moves to FIG. 158(C). In the case of an unsuccessful pattern, the display does not move to FIG. 158(C), and the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in a reduced size and then becomes hidden, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 will not be displayed.

Next, when the game is in the normal state, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and then, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking towards the front, cracks are displayed spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a pre-crack state (see Figure 158 (E)), after which the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state (see Figure 158 (F)). In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility which is lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out. Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state/high probability state, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image, and then, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the front, cracks are displayed spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that after the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state, the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state. In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, when the game state is in the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see FIG. 158 (G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 158(H) and FIG. 159(I)). As the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 159(J)), and then the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 159(K)). In this way, the crack effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, so that the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural. In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken in its entirety, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area, in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, in a breaking effect that is executed. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breaking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time-saving state/high probability state, increases. Then, when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and then the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the sixth background image to the seventh background image, the change from the sixth background image to the seventh background image can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural.

For example, a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed as a background image than the second background image 006SG082 may be displayed, and the action mode of the character image 006SG305 (action such as punching or kicking) may suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed. Also, by making it possible to display a character other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed.

<Background change effect B>
Details of an operation example of the background change presentation B will be described with reference to Fig. 160. Fig. 160 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change presentation B.

As shown in FIG. 160(A), when the background change performance B is started while the decorative pattern is being displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 160(B)). After that, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, so that the crack state of the glass plate image 006SG301 changes stepwise (see FIG. 160(C)).

In this way, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked state, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, so that the cracked state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Also, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 160(C), the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with the second visibility in areas other than each crack display area 006SG324, while being displayed with the first visibility, which is higher than the second visibility, in each crack display area 006SG324. In other words, since the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the part visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see FIG. 160(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 160(E)). Then, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 160(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 160(G)). In this way, by executing a crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural.

Also, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may suggest the expected degree of development of the performance. Specifically, when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is likely to end at the first stage (see FIG. 160(B)), and when the display color of the effect image is green, it is likely to end at the second stage (see FIG. 160(C)), and it is preferable that red is most likely to develop into a cracked performance compared to blue and green. Also, as shown in FIG. 177(B), when the effect image ends at the first stage in failure pattern 1, the transparency gradually increases and the display becomes invisible (fade-out display) 1500 ms after the start of the background change performance B, and as shown in FIG. 177(C), when the effect image ends at the second stage in failure pattern 2, the transparency gradually increases and the display becomes invisible 3000 ms after the start of the background change performance B.

In addition, while background change performance B is being executed, it is possible to restrict the change performance for the active display and pending display, which are images displayed in the layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, while not restricting the performance using images (such as mini character images) displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the cracking performance.

<Pseudo consecutive performance>
Details of an operation example of the pseudo consecutive performance will be described with reference to Fig. 161. Fig. 161 is a diagram showing details of a part of an operation example of the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 161 (A), after the pseudo consecutive performance has begun, when the pseudo consecutive pattern with the word "NEXT" displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the re-variable display will begin, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopped display position, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 161 (B)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to the performance position, and in response to this action, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 161 (C)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance begins (see Figure 161 (D)). Additionally, as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area.

The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see Figure 161 (E)). Then, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends due to the transparency reaching 100%, an action effect image 006SG321 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, in order to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (see Figures 161 (F) and (G)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 has ended, the movable body 32 starts moving from the performance position toward the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see FIG. 161 (G)), and then stops at the performance position after all of the fragment images 006SG302 are no longer displayed, completing the return operation to the origin position (see FIG. 161 (H)).

The return operation of the movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position may be started after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 has ended and then the display of the background effect image 006SG322 has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped and the re-variable display begins in the pseudo consecutive performance, but the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the first variable display may be blue, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the second variable display may be green, and the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the third variable display may be red, for example. Also, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be different, for example, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may become gradually larger each time the re-variable display is performed.

In this case, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of times the re-variable display is performed, but it is preferable that the crack pattern is common. In this way, by making the crack pattern common in gaming machines that perform a variety of crack effects, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance has been performed. In addition, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common between the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, the display mode of the crack pattern may be different between the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, for example, the size of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different, the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed may be different, or the movement speed of the fragment images 006SG302 may be different.

<Reach suggestion effect>
Details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to Fig. 162 and Fig. 163. Fig. 162 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect. Fig. 163 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in Figure 162 (A), when the reach suggestion performance is initiated while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 162 (B)), and then a character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 162 (C)). Next, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a mallet, a crack appears on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in the first crack form, and an action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 162 (D)).

Next, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a mallet, a crack appears on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to change to a second crack state, and an action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 162 (E)).

Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C with a mallet (see FIG. 162 (F)), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 162 (G)), and then the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 162 (H)).

Also, as shown in Figures 162 (D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Also, as shown in FIG. 162(H), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. Next, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern, the fragment image 006SG302, and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 163(I)). Then, the transmittance reaches 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged and highlighted (see FIG. 163(J)), after which the decorative patterns are reduced in size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 163(K)).

In the various effects that accompany the cracking effect in this embodiment, for example, as shown in the flow of Figures 163(J) to 163(K), the effect progresses after the fragment image 006SG302 is completely removed from the display area of the image display device 5 and becomes invisible during the cracking effect (for example, progressing from a reach suggestion effect that accompanies a cracking effect to a reach effect that does not accompany a cracking effect).

In addition, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack may be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate the likelihood of a reach developing. Specifically, if the effect image has display modes of blue and red, it is sufficient if the effect image is displayed in red, making it more likely to result in a reach than when it is displayed in blue.

In the case of a failure pattern, after a white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C with a mallet (see Figures 162 (G) and (H)), a character image 006SG305 looking disappointed is displayed in the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, after which the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 are hidden, the losing pattern stops, and the variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
Details of an operation example of the weak development performance will be described with reference to Fig. 164. Fig. 164 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the weak development performance.

As shown in FIG. 164(A), regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving/probable bonus, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R becomes a reach state and the weak development effect starts, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, and a character image 006SG305 is displayed in the approximate center of the layer 6 image drawing area above it (see FIG. 164(B)). After the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is displayed in slow motion while expanding as if it is moving toward the front of the display screen (see FIG. 164(C)). Note that the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R move to the upper right corner of the display screen and are displayed in a reduced size.

Next, when the game state is normal, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state, but the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect starts (see FIG. 164 (D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 increases (see FIG. 164(E)). After the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 164(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see FIG. 164(G)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect (see FIG. 164(H)). In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 increases. When the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the weak S reach effect is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 173 and FIG. 186 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is non-transparent, but this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is displayed in a transparent mode with transparency (for example, a transmittance of 70% or more) in FIG. 192 (B1) to (B3) described later, and then in FIG. 192 (B4) and (B5) it is displayed in a non-transparent mode with no transparency (for example, a transmittance of less than 10%). In other words, at the first timing corresponding to FIG. 192 (B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent mode, and at the second timing corresponding to FIG. 192 (B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a non-transparent mode.

In this way, by executing the crack effect when the N reach effect progresses to the weak S reach effect, the change from the N reach effect image to the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 can be made to look natural, so the change in effect can be made to look natural.

<Strong Development Performance A>
Details of an operation example of the strong development effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 165. Fig. 165 is a diagram showing details of a part of an operation example of the strong development effect A.

As shown in FIG. 165(A), in the weak S reach performance, a development symbol with the word "Development" displayed is temporarily stopped and when the strong development performance A starts, the movable body 32 starts to fall from the origin position to the performance position, and when this falling action starts, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in approximately the center of the layer 7 image drawing area, and the movable body 32 falls (see FIG. 165(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance starts.

In addition, as a preliminary effect before the cracking effect, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and when the movable body 32 moves to the effect position, a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the weak S reach effect image 006SG088, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a cracking effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area (see FIG. 165 (C)).

The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and since the transmittance remains at 0% until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 165(C)). As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 165(D)). Next, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transparency becomes 100%, an action effect image 006SG325 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, in order to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (see FIG. 165 (E)).

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the fragment image 006SG302 goes invisible, after which the movable body 32 starts moving from the performance position to the origin position (see FIG. 165(F)). Then, the return operation to the origin position ends, and the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, progressing to a strong S reach performance (see FIG. 165(G)).

<Strong Development Performance B>
Details of an operation example of the strong development performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 166 and Fig. 167. Fig. 166 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the strong development performance B. Fig. 167 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the strong development performance B.

As shown in FIG. 166(A), when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance and the strong development performance B starts, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the weak S reach performance image 006SG088, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 166(B)). In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the weak S reach performance image 006SG088 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, so that the cracked state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 166(C)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 166(D)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 166(D), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 increases (see FIG. 166(E)). Next, the transmittance becomes 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. After the decorative pattern in which the development pattern with the word "development" is displayed is temporarily stopped in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 166(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 166(G)).

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 166 (H)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around and is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time, with the development symbols not being displayed (see FIG. 167 (I)). Then, as the transparency gradually increases over time, the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach performance increases (see FIGS. 167 (J) and (K)).

In this way, by executing a cracking effect when progressing from a weak S reach effect to a strong S reach effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 has cracked and changed into the reach title image 006SG326, making the change in reach effect look natural.

<Cut-in effects>
Details of an operation example of a cut-in effect will be described with reference to Fig. 168. Fig. 168 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 168(A), when a cut-in effect starts a predetermined period of time after the start of the strong S reach effect, an operation prompting image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084 for the strong S reach effect (see FIG. 168(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the operation valid period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a cracking effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. In addition, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed as if the button had been pressed by operation, and an operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, and is enlarged as time passes (see Figures 168 (C) and (D)).

In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and when the display starts, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken piece image 006SG302 displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 168 (C)). Note that the operation prompt image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area higher than the whiteout image 006SG303, and therefore are displayed while maintaining the same first visibility as the first visibility when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed.

Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible (see FIG. 168(D)). Furthermore, the operation prompting image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 become hidden, while the text image 006SG307 saying "Heat!!" becomes visible (see FIG. 168(E)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 168(F)), the fragment image 006SG302 becomes hidden (see FIG. 168(G)).

In this embodiment, both cut-in effect patterns X and Y are described as effect patterns that include a cracking effect, but as a cut-in effect effect pattern, the effect pattern Y with a high probability of winning may be a chance effect pattern that includes a cracking effect, and the effect pattern X with a low probability of winning may be an effect pattern that does not include a cracking effect. In such a case, in the effect pattern that does not include a cracking effect, a band-shaped cut-in image (not shown) may be displayed on the fourth background image 006SG084.

＜Result notification (jackpot)＞
Details of the operation example of the result notification effect (jackpot) will be described with reference to Fig. 169 and Fig. 170. Fig. 169 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. Fig. 170 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 169(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect begins. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the image fades out in slow motion, after which a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 169(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an object image 006SG308 is displayed in which an attack from an ally character hits an enemy character (see FIG. 169 (C)), and then the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to a predetermined performance position, and in response to this falling motion, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the object image 006SG308, and cracks are displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 so as to spread downward from the movable body 32, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the object image 006SG308, which is displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 169 (D)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then is hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 begins to be displayed in a position adjacent to the bottom of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 169 (E)). In response to the start of a return-to-origin operation in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined performance position to the origin position, the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads downward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 169 (F)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 169(F), when the return-to-origin operation of the movable body 32 is started and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is entirely shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and when the display starts, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see Figure 169 (G)).

Next, the transparency becomes 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the fifth background image 006SG085 and the final decorative pattern of the jackpot combination are displayed (see FIG. 169(H)), after which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 170(I)), and the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the final decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is displayed in a static state (see FIG. 170(J)).

In addition, after the cracking effect starts in response to the start of the upward movement of the movable body 32 to return to the origin, the upward movement of the movable body 32 returning from the specified effect position to the origin position ends before the display of the fragment image 006SG302, which has become visible due to the increased transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303, ends (becomes invisible), allowing the player to be notified quickly that a jackpot has been hit.

<Result announcement (loss)>
Details of an operation example of the result notification effect (loss) will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Fig. 171 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 171(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect begins. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the image fades out in slow motion, after which a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 171(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a miss-display result, the movable body 32 does not move and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen in the layer 7 image drawing area for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 171(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301 and character image 006SG305 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area.

Then, in the layer 4 image drawing area above the character image 006SG305, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked form. The character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the gray background image 006SG313 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, causing the cracked form to be displayed prominently (see FIG. 171 (D)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Thus, although the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the cracked state is maintained and no cracking effect is performed in which the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, which indicates that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked form, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again over the entire layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 171(E)), and then the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed (see FIG. 171(F)), after which the background image reverts to the first background image 006SG081 and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is displayed stationary (see FIG. 171(G)).

(Details of the performance)
Next, each of the effects that can be executed in this embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in Fig. 172, Fig. 174, Fig. 155, and Fig. 156, in the first and second continuous crack effects, first, a first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (first stage crack display period). Next, when the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack comes, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Also, after a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken (whiteout display early period), a whiteout image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that of the whiteout display early period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the first and second continuous broken effects of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 600 ms period including the later whiteout display period following the earlier whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as this is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, second-stage cracks are displayed around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area for the break effect) for 3000 ms (second-stage crack display period). Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first and second continuous break effects are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the first and second continuous cracking effects, the cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period described above, and the cracking sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking (crack sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound output are the same in the first and second continuous cracking effects, but in the first continuous cracking effect, a first character voice corresponding to the character in FIG. 155(E) is output together with the cracking effect sound, and in the second continuous cracking effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character in FIG. 156(E) is output together with the cracking effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first and second continuous cracking effects. Furthermore, the cracking sound is louder than the cracking sound and is easier for players to recognize, but the first character voice and the second character voice are output at an even louder volume than the cracking sound and have a longer output period than the cracking sound, making them easier for players to recognize than the cracking sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination is not primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and for the 800 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the breaking presentation by using the illumination data table for the breaking presentation (whiteout 800 ms). After the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking presentation ends, illumination is again performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) by using the normal background image illumination data table. The light emission data table for the cracked effect (whiteout 800 ms) is a data table for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light at high brightness for 400 ms, which corresponds to the early period of the whiteout display, and for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light alternately at high and low brightness for 400 ms, which corresponds to the later period of the whiteout display.

As shown in Figures 172, 175 and 157, the dialogue preview performance begins with an operation promotion image being displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B (operation promotion performance execution period). When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation promotion performance or when the operation promotion performance execution period ends, a first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms from that timing (first stage crack display period). Next, when the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break arrives, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, causing the fragment image 006SG302 to be displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the dialogue preview performance of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 400 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 600 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, second-stage cracks are displayed for 5000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the area targeted by the break effect). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue preview effect are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the dialogue preview performance, cracking sounds corresponding to the display of the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period of the first stage described above (crack sound output period), and cracking effect sounds corresponding to the cracking effect are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (cracked effect sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sounds and cracking effect sounds output are the same in the dialogue preview performance and the first and second continuous cracking effects, and in the dialogue preview performance, after the cracking effect sound is output (when the cracking effect sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of text image 006SG306 is output. This prevents the dialogue voice sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the cracking effect sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, the normal background image illumination data table is used until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, and illumination that does not mainly emit white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed, and for the 800 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the timing when the whiteout display latter period ends, the illumination data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 800 ms) is used, and illumination that mainly emits white light in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect is performed. After the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect ends, the normal background image illumination data table is used again to emit illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081).

As shown in Figures 172, 176(A), 176(B), 158, and 159, the background change performance A of the successful pattern begins with a pre-stage action in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and an image of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (pre-stage action period). From the end of the pre-stage action (character action), a crack is displayed for 2000 ms (crack display period).

As shown in FIG. 176(B), the 2000 ms crack display period is made up of a 1000 ms early crack display period and a 1000 ms late crack display period following the early crack display period. During the early crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's action is displayed for 100 ms from the start of the early crack display period, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed at that time is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see FIG. 159). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the background change presentation A of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms period that includes the late whiteout display period following the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as this is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during background change presentation A in a successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the background change performance A in the successful pattern, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the pre-crack display period described above (cracking sound output period), and a character voice corresponding to the character's action is output, and a cracking performance sound corresponding to the cracking performance is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 2500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cracked performance sound output period). The cracking effect sound in the background change effect A is a sound exclusive to the background change effect A, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. During the output period of 2500 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is continuously output for 1500 ms. In addition, the output period of the cracking sound is set to 500 ms, but it may be set to 2000 ms corresponding to the crack display period, or a sound according to the progress of the cracking may be output for 2000 ms. In addition, the action effect sound is output for 100 ms corresponding to the action effect display period, overlapping with the cracking sound. The action effect sound is output at a louder volume than the crackling sound, and the crackling sound is difficult to hear when the action effect sound is output, but because the output period of the action effect sound is shorter than that of the crackling sound, the crackling sound can be heard after the action effect sound is output.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, a normal background image illumination data table is used until the start of the crack display period, and illumination is not primarily white light in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and for the 2000 ms from the start of the crack display period to the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, an illumination data table for the crack display period that mainly causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light is used, and illumination is in a manner that corresponds to the display of a crack. Furthermore, for the 1000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked to the end of the later whiteout display period, an illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used, and illumination is primarily white light in a manner that corresponds to the crack effect. After the light emission in the mode corresponding to the cracking effect is finished, the light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) without mainly white light emission by using the light emission data table for the chance background image. The light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is a data table for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light at high brightness for 500ms corresponding to the early period of the whiteout display, and for 500ms corresponding to the late period of the whiteout display, the game effect lamp 9 emits white light alternately at high brightness and low brightness. Although an example of using the light emission data table for the normal background image in the early operation period has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using the light emission data table for the early operation mainly including green light emission corresponding to the character in FIG. 158(D) during the early operation period. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in Fig. 158(D) until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, but after the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. In this way, a difference is created between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, so that the presentation effect of the background change presentation A can be further enhanced. Both the light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed without a blinking pattern.

As shown in FIG. 176(C), in the background change performance A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-stage operation. In other words, in the background change performance A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed, so the cracking performance is not executed, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 158(B) and (C), although a teasing performance is performed as to whether or not the character will be displayed, since neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the normal background image light emission data table is used as the light emission data table.

As shown in Figures 172, 177(A), and 160, the background change presentation B of the successful pattern first displays a first-stage crack for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (first-stage crack display period). During the first-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms from the start timing of the first-stage crack display period.

In addition, from the timing when 1500 ms have elapsed in the first-stage crack display period, second-stage cracks are displayed in a wider area of the display area of the image display device 5 than during the first-stage crack display period for 1500 ms (second-stage crack display period). Note that even during the second-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms from the start timing of the second-stage crack display period. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A during the first stage crack display period and the small fragment image 006SG302A during the second stage crack display period have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 186, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image, but because the parameter value for "gravity" is the same, they are both displayed out of the frame in a downward direction.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed at that time is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see FIG. 160). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the background change presentation A of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 750 ms including the late whiteout display period following the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as this is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change presentation B in the successful pattern are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the background change performance B in the successful pattern, a first stage crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the first stage crack display period (first stage crack sound output period), a second stage crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the second stage crack display period (second stage crack sound output period), and a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 150 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (crack effect sound output period). The cracking effect sound in the background change performance B is a sound exclusive to the background change performance B, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image. During the output period of 1250 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image is output continuously for 250 ms. The volume of the cracking in the background change performance B is the loudest for the cracking effect sound, and the volume of the first stage cracking sound and the second stage cracking sound may be the same, or the second stage cracking sound may be louder than the first stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, the illumination is not primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, by using the illumination data table for the normal background image, and for the 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the timing when the whiteout display latter period ends, the illumination is primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect, by using the illumination data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms). After the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect ends, the illumination is in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by using the illumination data table for the chance background image.

As shown in Figures 177 (B) and 177 (C), the background change presentation B in failure pattern 1 is a presentation pattern in which a first-stage crack is displayed for 1500 ms and a small fragment image corresponding to the first-stage crack is displayed for 200 ms, but a second-stage crack is not displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, while the background change presentation B in failure pattern 2 is a presentation pattern in which a first-stage crack is displayed for 3000 ms and a small fragment image is displayed for 200 ms, and a second-stage crack is displayed for 1500 ms from the timing when 1500 ms has elapsed during the first-stage crack display period and a small fragment image corresponding to the second-stage crack is displayed for 200 ms, but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In these failure patterns, in background change performance B, the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, so the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed.

As shown in Figures 172, 178, and 161, the pseudo consecutive performance first temporarily stops the "left" decorative pattern, the "right" decorative pattern, and the "middle" decorative pattern in that order in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, from the timing when the pseudo consecutive performance, which is the "middle" decorative pattern, stops, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms (crack display period). During the crack display period, the falling operation of the movable body 32 is performed for 1500 ms as a preliminary operation (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1500 ms has passed), it is the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. Note that the cracks during the crack display period of the pseudo consecutive performance and the cracks during the crack display period of the background change performance A are designed to appear differently. For example, the cracks in the background change effect A are displayed in such a way that the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 progress in stages over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period, whereas the cracks in the pseudo consecutive effects are displayed in such a way that the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the later whiteout display period of 500 ms, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. In addition, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the pseudo consecutive performance are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the speakers 8L and 8R output a breaking sound corresponding to the breaking effect (breaking sound output period). In addition, the breaking sound in the pseudo consecutive performance is a sound dedicated to the pseudo consecutive performance, and is a sound composed of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32. During the output period of 3000 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is output continuously for 2000 ms. After that, after the output period of the breaking sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, so that various sounds are output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout display period, i.e., the end of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rise period).

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table until the start timing of the crack display, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and for the 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, illumination that mainly consists of white light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the crack display by using the illumination data table for the crack display. And for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination that mainly consists of white light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the crack display by using the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms). After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect, the illumination is performed in the manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, by using the illumination data table for the pseudo consecutive performance corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, for 2000 ms. For example, when the first pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in green in response to the first pseudo consecutive performance, and when the second pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in red in response to the second pseudo consecutive performance. After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the illumination data table for the normal background image or the illumination data table for the chance background image is used again to illuminate in the manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). Both the light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed without a blinking pattern.

As shown in Figures 176 and 178, the present embodiment illustrates an example in which the crack display period is different between background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the crack display period may be the same between background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in Figures 172, 179 (A), 162 and 163, the reach indication performance for a successful pattern is as follows: first, as a pre-stage operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, an image acting on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and an image acting on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in sequence over a period of 10,000 ms (pre-stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 8000 ms (left crack display period), and further, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 4000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start of the right crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 186, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image, but because the parameter value for "gravity" is the same, they are both displayed out of the frame in a downward direction.

When the previous operation period ends due to the character acting on the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 during the previous operation period, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that was displayed up until that time is updated to a normal reach background image corresponding to the reach performance of the normal reach. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the reach suggestion performance of the successful pattern of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 500 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 1500 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 viewable period.

Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout display period, the decorative symbols are highlighted for 3000 ms to inform the player that a win has been reached, for example by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols (decorative symbol highlighting period).

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the reach suggestion performance in a successful pattern are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the reach suggestion performance in the successful pattern, a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the left crack display period described above (left crack sound output period) and a first character voice corresponding to the character's first action action is output, a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the right crack display period described above (right crack sound output period) and a second character voice corresponding to the character's second action action is output, and a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 2000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (crack effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the reach suggestion effect (success pattern) is a sound dedicated to the reach suggestion effect, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect of highlighting the decorative pattern to inform the player that the reach has been reached by temporarily enlarging the decorative pattern, etc., and the highlighting sound effect is output together with the cracking sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 1000 ms out of the output period of 3000 ms, and then the highlighting sound effect is output continuously for 2000 ms. After that, after the output period of the cracking effect sound ends, the BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image is output. In addition, when an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is performed, and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination that mainly consists of white light in a manner corresponding to the breaking presentation is performed by using the illumination data table for the breaking presentation (whiteout 1000 ms). After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking presentation, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image is performed by using the normal reach background image illumination data table.

As shown in FIG. 179(B), the reach suggestion effect in the failure pattern is a preliminary operation in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, an image of the character acting on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and an image of the character acting on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed in sequence for 14,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preliminary operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 12,000 ms (left crack display period), and further, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 8,000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start of the right crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302 in failure patterns are displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment images 006SG302 in success patterns, so the player cannot tell whether it is a success pattern or a failure pattern by looking at the speed at which the small fragment images 006SG302 scatter or the size and number of each small fragment image, so it is possible to favorably infer whether a normal reach will be executed or not.

In the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern, the left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above (left crack sound output period), and the right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the right crack display period described above (right crack sound output period). Furthermore, from the same timing as the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach suggestion performance of the success pattern (the timing when 10,000 has passed from the start of the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000 ms (whiteout display period). The whiteout display period is a period during which other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are made invisible to the player by the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, when an action effect corresponding to a character's action is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

In the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern, until the start timing of the whiteout display period, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the chance background image, and then during the whiteout display period, light is emitted mainly in white in a manner corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the light emission data table for whiteout. Then, from the end timing of the whiteout display period, light is emitted mainly in white in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach will not be reached (the reach suggestion performance is a failure pattern) using the light emission data table for failure notification. In addition, light emission in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach will not be reached (the reach suggestion performance is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display stops. The light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms), the light emission data table for the whiteout, and the light emission data table for the failure notification are all light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout and the light emission data table for the failure notification is executed without a blinking pattern. Also, while the game effect lamp 9 is emitting light based on the light emission data table for the failure notification (until the variable display ends due to the stopping of the variable display), no effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 173, 180, and 164, the weak development presentation is first performed by displaying a character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-stage operation, and displaying an image of the character acting on the center of the display area of the image display device 5 for 4000 ms (pre-stage operation period). Note that although the pre-stage operation period is set to 4000 ms, a separate pre-stage operation period (2000 ms) pattern may be set, and when indicating to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot, it may be determined that the weak development presentation is executed more frequently using the pre-stage operation period (2000 ms) pattern than the pre-stage operation period (4000 ms) pattern.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach effect of the normal reach that had been displayed up until that point is updated to a weak development effect background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development effect, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, causing the display of the fragment image 006SG302 for 3,500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than that in the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 3000 ms including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the weak development effect background image corresponding to the weak development effect that was displayed up until that time is updated to the Super Reach α background image corresponding to the reach effect of the Super Reach α.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the weak development effect are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Although the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development effect are not transparent, this is the final display mode of the fragment images 006SG302, and the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development effect are displayed in a transparent mode with transparency (e.g., a transmittance of 70% or more) for 1500 ms from the start of display during the fragment image display period of 3500 ms, and then gradually change to a non-transparent mode with no transparency (e.g., a transmittance of 70% to 10%) for 1000 ms, and then are displayed in a non-transparent mode with no transparency (e.g., a transmittance of less than 10%) for 1000 ms.

In addition, in the weak development effect, a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (cracked effect sound output period). In addition to the cracking effect sound, a weak development effect sound is also output for 3500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image cracks. Note that the cracking effect sound is louder than the weak development effect sound, making it easier for players to recognize.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the normal reach background image until the start timing of the previous stage operation, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image, and for the 4000 ms from the start timing of the previous stage operation to the timing of the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the weak development presentation by using the illumination data table for the weak development presentation, and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white in a manner corresponding to the break presentation by using the illumination data table for the break presentation (whiteout 1000 ms), and for the 2500 ms from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the fragment image display period, illumination is again in a manner corresponding to the weak development presentation by using the illumination table for the weak development presentation. Furthermore, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect has ended, the light emission data table for the Super Reach α background image is used to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (Weak S Reach effect image 006SG088).

In the weak development performance of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. In this way, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout illumination data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed from a timing before the fragment image display period ends (for example, 500 ms before the end), in which case the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will start before the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed out of the frame.

As shown in Figures 173, 181, and 165, in the strong development performance A, first, as a preliminary operation, the moving body 32 falls for 1000 ms (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the moving body 32 is completed (1000 ms has passed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) that has been displayed up until that point in time and corresponds to the Super Reach α reach effect is updated to the Strong Development Effect A background image (background effect image 006SG322) that corresponds to the Strong Development Effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period).

After the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1500 ms from the timing of the falling of the movable body 32 to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (whiteout display early period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the strong development performance A of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 1500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 500 ms of the whiteout display late period following the whiteout display early period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance A are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

And when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the strong development performance A background image corresponding to the strong development performance A that was displayed at that time is updated to the Super Reach β background image corresponding to the reach performance of the Super Reach β. The movable body 32 that fell as the previous operation is placed at the falling position during the fragment image display period described above, and rises to the initial position of the movable body 32 for 1500 ms from the end timing of the fragment image display period (movable body rising period). Note that from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to rise (start timing of the movable body rising period), a sound corresponding to the strong development performance A (strong development performance A performance sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 2500 ms. Note that in the strong development performance A, unlike the weak development performance, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so you can enjoy the breakage performance unique to the strong development performance A. Also, in the strong development performance A, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the strong development performance A performance sound high.

In addition, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the Super Reach α background image illumination data table until the timing of the falling of the movable body 32, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach presentation image 006SG088), and by using the Strong Development Presentation A illumination data table for 2500 ms from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to fall to the timing when the fragment image display period ends, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the Strong Development Presentation A. In addition, from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to rise (the timing when the fragment image display period ends), illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) by using the Super Reach β background image illumination data table.

In the present embodiment, the strong development performance A shows an example in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as the early whiteout display period of 1500 ms from the timing of the falling of the movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the early whiteout display period of the strong development performance A may be a period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

As shown in Figures 173, 182, 166, and 167, in the strong development performance B, first, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 without any movement of the movable body 32 or action of the character (crack display period). From the start timing of the crack display period, small fragment images 006SG302A, which are smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, are displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment images 006SG302A in the strong development performance B and the small fragment images 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance, etc. have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in Figure 186, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image.

When 1500 ms has passed and the crack display period has ended, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach performance that has been displayed up until that time is updated to Strong Development Performance B corresponding to the Strong Development Performance B. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the strong development performance B of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 2500 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are displayed in slow motion after starting to be displayed at the normal moving speed, normal rotating speed, and normal falling speed.

And when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the strong development performance B background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the strong development performance B that was displayed at that time is updated to the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the reach performance of the Super Reach β. In addition, in the strong development performance B, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period described above (crack sound output period), and a sound corresponding to the strong development performance B (strong development performance B performance sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking to the end timing of the fragment image display period. In addition, in the strong development performance B, unlike the weak development performance, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking is not output, so you can enjoy the cracking performance unique to the strong development performance B. Additionally, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output during strong development performance B. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the strong development performance B sound high.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image until the start timing of the crack display, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (image 006SG088 for weak S reach presentation), and by using the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B for the 1500 ms from the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the strong development presentation B, and by using the illumination data table for the break presentation (whiteout 1000 ms) for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white in a manner corresponding to the break presentation, and by using the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B for the 2000 ms from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the fragment image display period, illumination is in a manner corresponding to the strong development presentation B. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the strong development performance B has ended, the illumination data table for the Super Reach B background image is used to illuminate the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) in a manner that does not primarily consist of white light.

In the strong development performance B of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. When the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image in this way, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout illumination data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. In this case, the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the whiteout are both light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout is executed without a blinking pattern. Also, although the crack display period for the strong development effect B is set to 1500 ms, the crack may be displayed for a period longer than 1500 ms until the cracking timing. For example, the crack may be displayed so that the crack gradually expands at the first timing, second timing, and third timing between the start timing of the super reach α and the cracking timing.

As shown in Figures 173, 183, and 168, the cut-in effect begins with an operation prompting image being displayed for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B (operation prompting effect execution period). In particular, during the execution period of the operation prompting effect in this embodiment, the operation prompting image is displayed as a pre-operation state image in which the push button 31B is in a protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation state image display period).

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation prompting effect, or when the execution period of the operation prompting effect ends, the timing is set as the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break until the timing for the end of the cut-in effect (for 5000 ms from the timing for the break), a suggestive image according to the effect pattern is displayed, and after a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the cut-in performance of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. In addition, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in effect are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through the fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are displayed in slow motion after starting to be displayed at the normal moving speed, normal rotating speed, and normal falling speed.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a post-operation state image, which is the state after the push button 31B is operated by the player, is displayed for 1000 ms (post-operation state image display period). Since the post-operation state image is an image that is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303, the player can view the operation state image for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

In addition, in a cut-in performance, a cut-in performance sound corresponding to the cut-in performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cut-in performance sound output period). Note that, unlike weak development performances, the cut-in performance does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, so you can enjoy the breaking performance that is unique to cut-in performances. Also, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output in the cut-in performance, in which case the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the cut-in performance sound high.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is performed, and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used, and for the period from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the suggestive image display period, illumination data table for the cut-in effect is used, and for the period from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the suggestive image display period, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the cut-in performance is used. Furthermore, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cut-in performance ends, the light emission data table for the Super Reach β background image is used again to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

As shown in Figures 173, 184(A), 169, and 170, the result notification performance of the successful pattern begins with a preliminary operation in which the movable body 32 falls for 500 ms (movable fall resistance period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (500 ms has passed), a crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (crack display period). During this crack display period, from the start of the crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is displayed for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance, etc. have different parameter values of "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 186, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (failure pattern) have different parameter values of "strength" and "repetition", so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach performance or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the Super Reach β reach performance that had been displayed up until that time is updated to a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1,500 ms (fragment image display period). Although not specifically shown in FIG. 184(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) after 10,000 ms has elapsed (before the variable display of the variable display stops), and then is updated to the jackpot game background image according to the jackpot game status from the time when the variable display of the variable display stops.

After the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the result notification performance of the successful pattern of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 500 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 1000 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification performance for successful patterns are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

The rise of the movable body 32 to its initial position takes place over a period of 1,500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the movable body rise period).

In addition, in the result notification performance in the success pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (jackpot confirmation sound output period) to notify that a jackpot has been confirmed. Note that, unlike the weak development performance, the result notification performance (success pattern) does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, so that it is possible to conveniently notify that a jackpot has been confirmed. In addition, the result notification performance (success pattern) may output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, and in this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the jackpot confirmation sound high.

In addition, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the Super Reach α background image illumination data table or the Super Reach β background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the whiteout display latter period, illumination that mainly consists of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the breaking performance by using the illumination data table for the breaking performance (whiteout 1000 ms). Furthermore, after the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking performance, illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the big win notification background image is performed by using the big win notification background image illumination data table. Furthermore, from the timing when the variable display stops, the light emission data table for jackpot play is used to emit mainly rainbow-colored light in a manner that corresponds to the display of the jackpot play background image.

As shown in FIG. 184(B), in the result notification performance in the failure pattern, the movable body 32 does not fall, and no cracks are displayed due to the fall of the movable body 32. Instead, cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5,500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A in the success pattern breaks (crack display period). Also, from the start of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, is updated to a monochrome miss notification background image, which is an image indicating that the variable display result is a miss. The display of the miss notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, at which point it is updated to a color eye-catching image. The display period of the eye-catching image is, for example, 1000 ms, and after the display period of the eye-catching image ends, the display of the normal color background image (first background image 006SG081) starts, which is the same color as the eye-catching image. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification performance in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by displaying a monochrome failure notification background image, the eye-catching image, which is a color image, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) are displayed.

In addition, in the result notification performance for the failure pattern, crack effect sounds corresponding to the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period described above (crack effect sound output period).

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start timing of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image illumination data table or the Super Reach β background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and from the start timing of the crack display period to the stop timing of the variable display, the loss notification background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that primarily consists of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the loss notification background image. Furthermore, from the stop timing of the variable display, the normal background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the miss notification background image are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for whiteout is executed without a blinking pattern.

In the present embodiment, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are exemplified as starting to display the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start to be displayed from a timing earlier than the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed).

(Speed of the pieces when the shattering effect is performed)
Next, an explanation will be given of the display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when a breaking effect is executed as the above-mentioned first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, or result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 185(A), among these effects, the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed when the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the break effect as the result notification effect are executed is displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion) throughout the fragment image display period, which includes the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed when a strong development performance B or a broken performance as a cut-in performance is executed is displayed moving at a speed V1 over the 1000 ms between the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, while during the fragment image display period after the late whiteout display period (2000 ms for strong development performance B and 1500 ms for a cut-in performance), it is displayed moving at a speed V0 (slow motion) which is slower than speed V1. In addition, in FIG. 185, the strong development performance B and the cut-in performance are shown as performances in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a speed of V0, but as described below, in the background change performance B and the strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 is also displayed moving at a speed of V0, and when it is suggested to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot, it is decided that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance B and the strong development performance A will be displayed moving at a speed of V0 at a rate higher than the speed V1.

(Details of the cracking effect)
Next, details of the cracking effect will be described with reference to Fig. 186 and Fig. 187. Fig. 186 is a diagram showing the cracking patterns in the cracking effect. Fig. 187 is a diagram showing display examples of each cracking pattern.

As shown in FIG. 186 and FIG. 187, in the breaking effect executed in various effects, at a predetermined breaking timing, some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area, and the breaking image is animated to show a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A scattering in the layer 5 image drawing area. In other words, the breaking effect is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area changes to a fragment image 006SG302, so that the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state (fragment state). In this embodiment, the breaking is started by a sphere colliding with the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A from the rear.

The animation display of a glass plate breaking and scattering fragment images is actually composed of a number of still images (e.g., about 30 to 100 frames) according to the period during which the fragment images are displayed, but in Figure 187, five still images are extracted from the multiple still images that compose the animation display of the fragment images from the start to the end of the breaking performance and arranged in chronological order. Also, in Figure 187, the five frames of images for each breaking pattern are not five consecutive frames, and in reality, multiple frames of fragment images (not shown) are arranged between each frame.

There are various ways in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and multiple types of breaking patterns (e.g., breaking patterns A to G) are preset, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a breaking performance based on a preset breaking pattern according to the type of performance to be executed.

Specifically, breaking pattern A is a pattern that corresponds to the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, breaking pattern B is a pattern that corresponds to the background change effect B and the strong development effect B, breaking pattern C is a pattern that corresponds to the pseudo consecutive effect and the result notification effect (jackpot), breaking pattern D is a pattern that corresponds to the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect and the dialogue preview effect, breaking pattern E is a pattern that corresponds to the weak development effect, breaking pattern F is a pattern that corresponds to the strong development effect A, and breaking pattern G is a pattern that corresponds to the cut-in effect.

Each crack pattern A to G is a pattern that differs in at least one of the following items: "acting agent," "crack type," "crack range," and "fragment image display type." Note that the display period and display timing are as explained in Figures 172 and 173, so explanations will be omitted below.

"Action subject" refers to the subject of action on the glass plate image 006SG301A, with crack patterns A and E resulting in a crack effect in response to the movement of the "character," while crack patterns C and F result in a crack effect in response to the movement of the "movable body," and crack patterns B and D result in a crack effect at a predetermined timing regardless of the action subject. "Crack appearance" refers to whether the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack appearance before it is broken, with crack patterns A to D resulting in a crack appearance after the "crack appearance" is displayed, and crack patterns E to G resulting in a crack appearance without the "crack appearance" being displayed. Note that "crack appearance" includes multiple types of appearances that differ in the display position, number of displays, and shape of the crack on the display screen. "Crack range" refers to the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, with crack patterns A to C and E to G representing the "whole" display screen, and crack pattern D representing "part." "Fragment image display mode" indicates whether fragment image 006SG302 is transparent or not, with part of fragment pattern B and fragment pattern E being "non-transparent" and the other fragment patterns being "transparent."

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated with light (illumination) from the front side of the approximate center position of the display screen. Therefore, the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area, and the "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 does not reflect light at a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is 45 degrees to 90 degrees) and is therefore easy to transmit, making it easy to see the lower layer image drawing area, while at a second angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), it reflects light and is therefore difficult to transmit, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area (see FIG. 196). For example, among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and then, as the multiple fragment images 006SG302 move over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the first angle. Note that the type, intensity, color, top/bottom/left/right position, depth position, and other settings of this light can be changed in various ways, and light setting values may be changed depending on the crack pattern.

The multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks include multiple fragment images 006SG302 with different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, etc. Each fragment image 006SG302 moves in various directions while rotating at various speeds in various orientations during the display period from when the display starts to when it ends and becomes non-display. Specifically, some are displayed moving in the X-axis direction (left-right direction), some in the Y-axis direction (up-down direction), and some in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and some have different moving speeds, rotation speeds, rotation numbers, display periods, etc. The moving direction includes not only one of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, but also multiple axial directions (e.g., XY-axis and XY-axis directions) of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis.

In other words, in addition to the above-mentioned "acting agent," "crack type," "crack range," and "fragment image display type," each of the crack patterns A to G is a pattern that differs in at least one of the display types of at least some of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 when they scatter, such as the shape, size, rotation speed, number of rotations, movement direction [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period.

Furthermore, crack patterns A to G are animations of cracks created, for example, using the shutter function of a specific animation creation software, and the created crack patterns A to G have different values for at least some of the multiple parameters shown below.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in Figure 186, "gravity" allows you to set gravity and adjust the acceleration at which the scattered fragments gradually fall. Since it is gravity, it is not constant, but gradually accelerates downwards. "Gravity direction" allows you to set the direction in which gravity is applied, and you can specify up, down, left, and right directions based on 0 degrees (upward). "Gravity gradient" allows you to adjust gravity more in the Z-axis direction (front to back), and the value set with this parameter is combined with "gravity direction". All directions in 3D space, including front to back, up, down, left and right, can be specified. Note that values of "-90" and "90" are in the Z-axis direction, so "gravity direction" is essentially disabled. "Strength" allows you to adjust the momentum of the scattered fragments, and increasing the value will increase the speed at which the fragments fly off. "Variation" allows you to adjust the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. Normally, in the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, it takes more energy to move a large, heavy object, so when the same impact is applied, small fragments move and rotate faster, and large, heavy fragments move slower. The difference in physical animation due to the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0 to 100%. At 0%, size and weight are not taken into account, so small fragments and large fragments move the same without distinction. The default setting of 30% is considered to be a value close to the physical laws of nature. "Repetition" allows you to adjust the size of the fragments that break. Increasing the value will make each fragment smaller and increase the number of fragments. "Viscosity" allows you to set the resistance to the movement of the fragments. Increasing the value will speed up the time it takes for the movement and rotation to stop due to resistance. In addition, resistance is applied to gravity as if it were attached to a sticky substance, so the falling speed will also be slower. In other words, if the "viscosity" value is adjusted to a large value, the movement of the fragments will be in slow motion. Note that Figure 186 shows crack patterns B, E, and F as crack patterns in which the "viscosity" value has been adjusted to be greater than normal, but as described below, the "viscosity" value for crack pattern G has also been adjusted to be greater than normal.

The above parameters are just examples, and other parameters that can be set include "force", which indicates the force applied at the moment that causes the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, "position", which allows adjustment of the position in the X-axis and Y-axis directions in which the force is applied, "depth", which allows adjustment of the position of the force in the Z-axis direction (depth direction), "rotation speed", which allows setting the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and "randomness", which allows setting the randomness of the movement of each fragment image 006SG302.

Next, we will briefly explain the main characteristics of the movement (mainly the scattering pattern) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern.

For example, for crack patterns A, C to F, the "gravity direction" value is set to "180°", so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks, scatters around, and then falls downward naturally, whereas for crack patterns B and G, the "gravity direction" value is set to "0°", so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks, scatters around, and then is less likely to fall downward than crack patterns A, C to F.

In this way, the "gravity direction" setting is different between crack patterns A, C to F (first patterns) and crack patterns B, G (second patterns), and the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves when displayed is different, which is "180°" for crack patterns A, C to F. This allows for a variety of patterns to be created, which adds to the fun.

In addition, for crack patterns A, C to F, the "variation amount" value is set to "30%", so that small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly and large, heavy fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates slowly, while for crack patterns B and G, the "variation amount" value is set to "0%", so that small and large fragments of fragment image 006SG302 move and rotate in the same manner without any distinction, making them crack patterns with a high degree of animation.

In other words, crack patterns A, C to F are affected by the animation differently depending on their size, with small fragment images 006SG302 flying quickly and large fragment images 006SG302 being slightly slower and falling quickly, making them suitable for use when you want to show realistic movement, while crack patterns B and G are all affected by the animation in the same way, flying and falling in the same way regardless of size, allowing you to select the appropriate crack pattern for the scene.

In addition, the "gravity direction" setting is the same for crack patterns A and C (first patterns) and crack patterns D to F (second patterns), but the "gravity value" setting is different, which results in different speeds at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls. By varying the value of the parameter "gravity value" in this way and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be created, which adds to the fun. More specifically, the numerical value is larger for crack patterns D to F, so the fragment image 006SG302 falls faster.

In addition, in the case of crack patterns A-C, E, and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0" or more, so that the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in the X-axis and Y-axis directions while moving in the Z-axis direction, i.e., toward the front, while in the case of crack patterns D and F, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0", so that the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving only in the X-axis and Y-axis directions, without moving in the Z-axis direction. In addition, in the case of crack patterns A-C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving toward the front, the fragment image is displayed gradually expanding, so that it is emphasized that it is approaching the front. In particular, in the case of crack patterns B and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "90", so that the fragment image is displayed moving even further toward the front.

Furthermore, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is common to crack pattern A (first pattern), crack pattern B (second pattern), and crack pattern C (third pattern), being "0", while the second parameter of "strength" is different, being "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter to create a variety of patterns, it is possible to create stable and diverse display patterns for fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, for example, crack pattern E (first pattern), crack pattern F (second pattern), and crack pattern G (third pattern) have a common first parameter of "gravity" of "0" for crack pattern E and a different second parameter of "strength" of "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F, whereas crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) have a common first parameter of "gravity" of "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and a common second parameter of "strength" of "5". In this way, by creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302 in each pattern while being configured with different parameters, a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

In this embodiment, multiple types of breaking patterns A to G with different numerical values of various parameters are stored in advance, and the breaking effect is executed based on the breaking pattern A to G corresponding to the type of effect to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the type of effect to be executed by the effect control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the numerical values of various parameters may be determined according to the determined type of effect and the expected probability of a jackpot, and breaking animation data based on the determined numerical values may be created, and an animation display of a glass plate breaking may be displayed based on the created breaking animation data.

(Example of crack pattern display)
Next, the details of the display examples of the crack patterns A to G will be described with reference to Figs. 188 to 194. Fig. 188 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern A. Fig. 189 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern B. Fig. 190 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern C. Fig. 191 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern D. Fig. 192 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern E. Fig. 193 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern F. Fig. 194 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern G.

In each of Figures 188 to 194, (A1) to (A5) are display examples of a crack pattern that displays the whiteout image 006SG303, and (B1) to (B5) are display examples of a crack pattern that corresponds to (A1) to (A5) but does not display the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, these are figures comparing the case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the case where it is not displayed at the start of the cracking effect. Specifically, in (A1) in each figure, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is set to 0%, and the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3), until the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is 100% in (A4).

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of Figures 188 to 194, in the animation display of a glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in the frame where the breaking begins (for example, (B1)), the breaking is set up so that an impact (force) is applied to the glass plate image 006SG301A at approximately the center thereof as if a sphere were colliding from behind, thereby causing the glass plate image 006SG301A to start shattering from the fragment image 006SG302 located approximately near the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the many surrounding fragment images 006SG302 have not yet started to shatter. In other words, when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed across the entire display screen in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the time of the breakage, begins to change into a broken state, a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed so as to fill up almost the entire display screen, making it almost impossible to see the images displayed in the display layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302.

Therefore, as shown in (B1), when the cracking effect starts, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill almost the entire display screen over several frames, changes to a cracked state and a large number of broken images 006SG302 are displayed, making it difficult to see the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started. In particular, it is fine when the cracking effect starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked state, as in cracking patterns A to D, but when the cracking effect starts suddenly without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, as in cracking patterns E to G, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill the display screen, suddenly changes to a cracked state and a large number of broken images 006SG302 are displayed, as if wiping out the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started, which may give the player an unnatural impression.

Therefore, at the beginning of the cracking, as shown in the early whiteout display period of (A1), by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303 in the display layer 7 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302 and hiding many of the fragment images 006SG302, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Also, as shown in the later period of the whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), by gradually increasing the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 by fading it out rather than suddenly making it invisible, the fragmented image 006SG302 becomes visible after it has spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery to a certain extent, so that the fragmented image 006SG302 breaking and scattering can be made to look natural and unnatural.

As shown in Figure 188, in crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 188 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 188 (B2)), then falls downward and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 188 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 189, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 189 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 move in a normal motion to spread radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 189 (B2)). Since they are unlikely to fall downward, they move radially from the center in slow motion and are displayed out of the frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see Figures 189 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 190, in crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 190 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 190 (B2)), then falls downward and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 190 (B3) to (B5)).

In this embodiment, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as the background image when the pseudo consecutive performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, or cut-in performance is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not specifically shown, for example, a background image with a different display mode according to the type of performance may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 191, in crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 191 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) or the Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 191 (B2)), then fall downward and are displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 191 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Fig. 192, in crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 192 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) with normal motion movement (see Fig. 192 (B2)), then falls downward with slow motion movement and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figs. 192 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to Figs. 192 (B3) to (B5), and more specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figs. 192 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Also, in Fig. 192 (B1), the movable body 32 is not shown in order to make it easier to see when the glass plate image 006SG301A begins to break. Also, the fragment image 006SG302 in the break pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from Fig. 192 (B3), and since it takes time to frame out, the fragment image 006SG302 may be whited out while it is moving in slow motion so as not to disrupt the tempo of the performance progression, and a super reach α performance may be performed.

As shown in Fig. 193, in crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 193 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 move in normal motion and scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) or Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Fig. 193 (B2)), then fall downward in slow motion and are displayed out of the frame mainly from the bottom side (see Figs. 193 (B3) to (B5)). Also, the small fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate quickly and therefore fall and are displayed out of the frame first, whereas the large, heavy fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate quickly and therefore are displayed out of the frame later than the small fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during a strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern in the upper right corner of the display screen for the reach mode may be made invisible for a moment, and then displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in that cracking effect becomes invisible. In this way, displays that are not closely related to the cracking effect can be eliminated as much as possible, and the effect of the cracking effect can be enhanced. In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during the execution of other reach effects such as a weak S reach effect, not limited to a strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern for the reach mode may be made invisible for a moment, and then displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in that cracking effect becomes invisible.

As shown in Fig. 194, in the crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 194 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) with normal motion movement (see Fig. 194 (B2)). Since it is difficult to fall downward, it moves radially from the center in slow motion and is displayed out of the frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see Fig. 194 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in the crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1", which corresponds to Fig. 194 (B1) and (B2), and more specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Fig. 194 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4".

(Details of the debris image)
Next, details of the fragment images will be described with reference to Fig. 195 and Fig. 196. Fig. 195 shows fragment images displayed in a pseudo consecutive performance (A) and a cut-in performance (B). Fig. 196 shows fragment images displayed in a background change performance (A) and a strong development performance (B). Note that the fragment images shown with dotted lines in Fig. 196 indicate that they are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 195(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo consecutive performance is a non-transparent image (e.g., 0% transparency) that makes it difficult to recognize at least a portion of the overlapping background effect image 006SG322, while as shown in FIG. 195(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is a transparent image (e.g., 100% transparency) that makes it possible to recognize at least a portion of the overlapping background effect image 006SG322 and text image 006SG307. This gives a suitably different impression even in a performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 195(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a cut-in effect is a transparent image (the background is visible) through which at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 can be recognized, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the characters are visible) through which at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 (special image) can be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the background and characters are visible) through which both at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 can be recognized. By varying the display mode of the fragment images for each effect, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(A), all of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A are hidden by moving downward toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5 and being displayed as a frame-out display, while as shown in FIG. 196(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 among the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is hidden by moving up, down, left, and right toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen and being displayed as a frame-out display, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby creating a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, which can increase interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 196(A), when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the light irradiated on the glass surface is between 45 degrees and 90 degrees, such as an angle where the flat surface faces the front side), it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle smaller than the first angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the light irradiated on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as an angle where the end surface faces the front side), it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 196(A), when a first fragment image among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, a second fragment image is at a second angle, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Effects of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variably displayed special symbols and decorative symbols, it is possible to control the game to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes an image display device 5 for displaying images, and a performance control CPU 120 which is a control means for executing the first consecutive break performance, the second consecutive break performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, the result notification performance, and the like, which are performances that suggest that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state during the variably displayed state. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 116 to 118, the pachinko game machine 1 has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas for drawing images with different display priorities in the VRAM area in the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, the VRAM area may include a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as an image of layer 2, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as an image of layer 3, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an image of a precursor to cracking (such as glass plate image 006SG301) as an image of layer 4, a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 5, a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 7 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 5, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 9 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 6, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 11 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 7. It has a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an action effect image as an image, a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303 as an image of layer 7, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an operation prompt image as an image of layer 8, a layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a variable display compatible display (reserved display and active display) as an image of layer 9, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a right hit notification image as an image of layer 10. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

In addition, except when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image with a higher display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. an image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and an image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Also, although it has been described that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, there may be a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a layer 1-3 image drawing area instead of the layer 1 image drawing area. In this case, the layer 1-1 image drawing area can draw a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), the layer 1-2 image drawing area can draw a chance background image (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), a normal reach background image, a super reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088), and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and the layer 1-3 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-4 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG423), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-5 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG524), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-6 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG525), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-7 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG526), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-8 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG527), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-9 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG528), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-10 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-11 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-12 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-13 image drawing area can draw a background effect image It is possible to draw an image (fifth background image 006SG085), and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area.

Here, as shown in Figures 146 to 149, background change performance A and strong development performance A are performances that can be executed at different times. Also, as shown in Figure 176, background change performance A has a crack display period in which a crack is displayed by the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a fragment image display period in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. As shown in Figure 181, strong development performance A is a performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked by the movement of the movable body 32 in a period shorter than the background change performance, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, the background change performance A is a performance in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different before a crack appears in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, and the strong development performance A is a performance in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different before the strong development performance A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A begins. In other words, in this embodiment, the background change performance A, in which cracks and fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the strong development performance A, in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed without any cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, because the types of background images displayed before and after the fragment image 006SG302 are different in both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, even though the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, different impressions can be given to the player in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-2]
In addition, when background change presentation A and strong development presentation A can be executed during variable display 1, the probability of being controlled to a big win game state may be higher when background change presentation A is not executed and strong development presentation A is executed than when background change presentation A is executed and strong development presentation A is executed (for example, see Figures 146 to 149). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of background change presentation A and strong development presentation A, and to increase interest.

[Form 1-3]
In addition, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via the background change performance A, a case where the background image changes via a chance background teasing performance different from the background change performance A may be provided (FIG. 143). Also, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the background change performance A, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state may be higher than when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the chance background teasing performance. In this way, it is possible to draw attention to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed via the background change performance A or the chance background teasing performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-1]
In addition, when background change presentation A and strong development presentation A can be executed during variable display of 1, the probability of being controlled to a big win game state may be higher when background change presentation A is executed before strong development presentation A than when background change presentation A is not executed before strong development presentation A (for example, see Figs. 146 to 149). By doing so, it is possible to increase interest by making players look forward to both background change presentation A and strong development presentation A being executed during variable display of 1.

[Form 1-4-2]
176 and 181, during the variable display, the background change effect A is an effect executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbol, and the strong development effect A is an effect executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbol. Also, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) suggesting that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot before the reach, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) indicating that the reach effect of the super reach α is being executed, and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) indicating that the reach effect of the super reach β is being executed. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is an image displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is an image displayed together with the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), so that the player can be drawn to the relationship between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Also, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A has transparency, so that it is possible for the player to recognize at least a part of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302, and since the background image displayed in the strong development performance A has no transparency, it is impossible for the player to recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302, so that the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle by the rotation, the player can recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302, whereas when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle by the rotation, the player may have difficulty recognizing at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 1-4-5]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when a first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, a second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 1-5]
197, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves in a plurality of directions including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction may take a longer time to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the X-axis direction. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance A are both displayed moving without any change in speed from the timing when the display starts to the timing when the display ends, so that in these background change performance A and strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally and without any awkwardness.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 188 and 193), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A take a common period of time before becoming invisible on the display screen, which increases the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, thereby enhancing the performance effects of both.

[Form 1-7-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when the display starts and before it is hidden on the display screen (see Figs. 188 and 193). Specifically, it is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it is hidden, which can enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) takes a longer time to disappear from the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in background change performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the number of rotations from when the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be the same as the number of rotations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the relevance between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A is increased, and the performance effects of both can be improved.

[Form 2-1]
176 and 181, in both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts. The display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in these background change performance A and strong development performance A is composed of an early whiteout display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, since the background change performance A and the strong development performance A can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings, and in addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed by the whiteout image 006SG303, and to execute these background change performance A and strong development performance preferably.

[Form 2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 176 and 181, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the background change performance A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the strong development performance A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms. Therefore, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 enhances the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, and since the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the performance effects of both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
176, the crack display period may be longer than the fragment image display period in the background change performance A, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. In this way, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started without any awkwardness due to the whiteout image 006SG303.

[Form 2-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 158 and 165, the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are images displayed in the same manner, so that the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner, can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the performance effects of both.

[Form 3-1]
178 and 183, the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed moving at a speed V1 regardless of the progress of the performance, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance changes speed from speed V1 to a slow speed V0 according to the progress of the performance, so that even if the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, it is possible to give the player a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 3-2]
Also, as shown in Figures 146 to 149, in the case where the pseudo consecutive performance can be performed multiple times in one variable display while the cut-in performance can be performed only once, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed multiple times than when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed only once, and the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the cut-in performance is performed once than when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed multiple times. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, and to increase interest.

[Form 3-3]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance changes from a cracked state to a broken state (glass plate image 006SG301A) and in the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is displayed, a whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the first timing, and is displayed over the entire display screen at the second timing (see Fig. 161 (C) and Fig. 168 (C)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form 3-4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185, the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in performance is displayed and moves at a speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and from the timing when the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, it is displayed and moves at a speed V0 which is slower than the speed V1, thereby enhancing the performance effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance.

[Form 3-4-2]
In addition, in a case where a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a cut-in effect as shown in Fig. 183, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V1, but may not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V0, as shown in Fig. 185. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effect of the cut-in effect from being reduced.

[Form 3-5]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are made rotatable, the number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 4-1]
178 and 183, the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 172 and 173, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the pseudo consecutive performance are not transparent, so that the player cannot see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the cut-in performance are transparent, so that the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, even if the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the same way in the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, the player can be given a different impression and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 4-2]
The first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 can be recognized, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image through which at least a part of the character image 006SG307 can be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is a transparent image through which both at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a part of the character image 006SG307 can be recognized (see FIG. 195). By thus varying the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each performance, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are made rotatable, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle, it may be possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the first fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle, it may be difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 4-3-2]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is made rotatable, when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle in the cut-in effect. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 178 and 183, the pseudo-consecutive effects and cut-in effects of this embodiment have different execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, with regard to these pseudo consecutive performances and cut-in performances, the cut-in performance is a performance in which the display of multiple fragment images 006SG302 begins in a period shorter than the crack display period from when a crack appears in the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance to when a fragment image 006SG302 imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are commonly displayed in a manner moving in multiple directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 197), and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a manner moving in the Z-axis direction may take a longer period to become hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a manner moving in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when the display starts and before it is hidden on the display screen (see Figs. 190 and 194). Specifically, it is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it is hidden, which can enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) takes a longer time to disappear from the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in background change performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 5-4]
It is preferable that all of the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance are hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 196(A)), and the first fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302 different from the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 196(B)). In this way, the way in which the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be made different between the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-1]
Also, as shown in Fig. 179 and Fig. 180, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect in this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, for these reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be longer than the previous operation period in the weak development effect, and the length of the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect and the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be different (see Fig. 179 and Fig. 180). By doing so, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed in the effect, it is possible to give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
Also, in the reach suggestion effect, the right crack display period may be longer than the period until the right crack display period starts in the left crack display period (see FIG. 179). In this way, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach suggestion effect from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation configuration.

[Form 6-3]
In addition, the reach suggestion effect in this embodiment can be executed in a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after a crack is displayed, or in a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break because the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed after a crack is displayed. When the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L as the right crack display period for 6000 ms, which is longer than the 2000 ms display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 when the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern, so that it is possible to suitably show the player that the reach suggestion effect is not executed in the success pattern, i.e., that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form 6-4-1]
In addition, while the reach suggestion effect is an effect that notifies the player that a reach will occur when it is executed in a successful pattern, it is an effect that suggests that a reach will not occur when it is executed in a failed pattern, that is, that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is lower than in the case of a reach. Therefore, the reach suggestion effect can draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be executed and whether or not it is executed in a successful pattern, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
Also, as shown in Figures 146 to 149, in the case where both the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be executed during the variable display of 1, the weak development effect can be executed after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts, and the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts before the weak development effect is executed than when it is not. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect and increase interest.

[Form 6-5]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the reach suggestion performance changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the first timing, and is displayed over the entire display screen at the second timing (see Fig. 162 (G) and Fig. 164 (D)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the reach suggestion performance and the weak development performance, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form 6-6]
In the reach suggestion performance, it is possible to highlight the decorative symbols in the reach state, and by making the period during which the decorative symbols in the reach state are highlighted during the fragment image display period longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 163 (I) to 163 (K)), it is possible to appropriately indicate that the reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
In the reach suggestion performance, in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, an action effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in a layer 6 image drawing area higher than the fragment image 006SG302, and by displaying the action effect image 006SG323 at the timing when the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 starts (see Figure 162 (D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without any sense of incongruity.

[Form 6-7-2]
Also, as shown in FIG. 179, in the reach suggestion presentation, depending on the action of the character, the timing at which a crack appears in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed for a longer period of time than the action effect image 006SG323 from the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby effectively indicating to the player that a crack has appeared in the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 6-7-3]
179, in the reach suggestion effect, when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts, but when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the action effect image 006SG323 is not displayed. Therefore, depending on the action of the character, when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the presentation mode of the reach suggestion effect is made different, and it is possible to prevent the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
Also, as shown in FIG. 179, in the reach suggestion effect, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period during which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (small fragment image display period), so that a difference can be made in the presentation mode of the reach suggestion effect between when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when a character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-8]
Also, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as reach suggestion effects have transparency, so the player can see the background image through these fragment images 006SG302, whereas the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as weak development effects do not have transparency, so the player cannot see at least a part of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, a difference can be made in the display mode of the fragment images 006SG302 between reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect are both displayed moving without changing in speed from the start timing to the end timing of the display, so that these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form 6-10]
In addition, the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be longer than the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect (see Figs. 179 and 180). In this way, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be differentiated, and the interest can be increased by the diverse presentation.

[Form 7-1]
176 and 183, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 183, when the cut-in effect is executed, first, a pre-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion effect, and the cut-in effect is executed when the push button 31B is operated by the player or when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and during the display period of the white-out image 006SG303, the post-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in priority to the white-out image 006SG303. Here, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is 2500 ms, the display period of the pre-operation image of push button 31B is 3000 ms, and the display period of the post-operation image of push button 31B is 1000 ms, the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance (cut-in image display period) is shorter than the display period of the pre-operation image of push button 31B (pre-operation image display period) and longer than the display period of the post-operation image of push button 31B (post-operation image display period), so it is possible to prevent the cut-in performance from becoming monotonous and reducing the interest of the cut-in performance.

[Form 8-1]
As shown in FIG. 176 and FIG. 178, the background change effect A and the pseudo consecutive effect in this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. The background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive effect may be an effect in which the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a random combination, but after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination according to the pseudo consecutive effect). By doing so, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, a different impression can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 8-2]
176 and 178, in the case where the first-stage cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then changed to second-stage cracks for display, the period during which the first-stage cracks change to second-stage cracks in the background change performance A and the period during which the first-stage cracks change to second-stage cracks in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different in length. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form 9-1]
176 and 178, the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the period during which the cracks are displayed in the background change performance A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period during which the cracks are displayed in the pseudo consecutive performance (crack display period) is 1500 ms, so the lengths are different. In both the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of these whiteout images 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period during which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period during which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Therefore, the whiteout image 006SG303 reduces the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance can be executed preferably.

[Form 9-2]
176 and 178, in the case where a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the first-stage crack is changed to a second-stage crack and can be displayed, the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form 10-1]
176 and 182, the background change performance A and the strong development performance B of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is displayed moving without changing the speed from the start of display to the end of display, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed moving at a speed V1 from the start of display to the end of display of the whiteout image 006SG303, and is displayed moving at a speed V0 slower than the speed V1 during the transition, so that even if the performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is similar, a different impression can be suitably given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 10-2]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from a cracked state to a broken state in the background change performance A and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development performance B, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see Fig. 158 (G) and Fig. 166 (H)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed and moved at speed V0 is longer than the period during which it is displayed and moved at speed V1, so that there is a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed and moved at a speed V1 is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V0, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the strong development performance B.

[Form 10-4]
All of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A are hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 196(A)), and the first fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302 different from the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 196(B)). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed differently between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, which can increase interest.

[Form 10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are both images with transparency, so that the performance effect can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in common (see Figs. 188 and 189), and it is preferable that the period required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A to become invisible on the display screen is the same for the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B. In this way, the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B is increased, and the performance effects of both can be improved.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs between when the display starts and when it is not displayed on the display screen (see Figs. 188 and 189). Specifically, the visibility is difficult when the display starts and easy before it is not displayed, which can enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, the number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 10-7-2]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle by the rotation, it may be possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle by the rotation, it may be difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 10-7-3]
202, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 may be at the second angle. In this way, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at the second angle.

[Form 10-8]
146 to 149, when both background change presentation A and strong development presentation B can be executed during variable display of 1, the background change presentation can be executed before the reach and the strong development presentation B can be executed after the reach, and the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the background change presentation A is executed before the strong development presentation B is executed than when it is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the background change presentation A and increase interest.

[Form 10-9]
176 and 182, in the case where the first stage cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then changed to second stage cracks for display, the length of the period during which the first stage cracks change to second stage cracks in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first stage cracks change to second stage cracks in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form 11-1]
176 and 178, the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 172, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is not transparent, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is transparent, so that even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, a different impression can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 12-1]
176 and 182, the background change performance A and the strong development performance B of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, the length of the crack display period in the background change performance A and the crack display period in the strong development performance B may be made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B may be displayed in a manner that moves in at least a plurality of directions, namely, the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and is displayed in the Z-axis direction takes a longer period to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and is displayed in the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and is displayed in the Z-axis direction in the strong development performance B takes a longer period to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and is displayed in the Z-axis direction in the background change performance A. By doing this, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, a different impression can be given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 13-1]
176 and 179, the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion performance is 4000 ms, while the crack display period in the background change performance A is 2000 ms, and the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is 1500 ms, while the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is 20000 ms. Therefore, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, different impressions can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 13-2]
In the first specified part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the first crack state in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth specified part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state and displayed (see Figures 162 and 158), thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the crack state.

[Form 14-1]
In addition, the first and second consecutive crack effects of this embodiment shown in FIG. 174 are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the second consecutive crack effect can be executed at a timing after the first consecutive crack effect, and the first and second consecutive crack effects have the same length of the crack display period and the same length of the fragment image display period. When the second consecutive crack effect is executed after the execution of the first consecutive crack effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive crack effect is temporarily hidden, and then the crack display period of the second crack effect begins. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of ...

[Form 14-2]
197, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first and second consecutive cracking effects may be displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, and the position at which the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed may be different between the first and second consecutive cracking effects. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed differently between the first and second consecutive cracking effects, which can enhance the interest.

[Form 14-3]
In both the first and second consecutive breaking performances, a character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 in the first consecutive breaking performance is displayed in a first manner (e.g., a Jam character image) and the character image 006SG305 in the second consecutive breaking performance is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (e.g., a MuMu character image) (see Figures 155 (F) and 156 (F)). This allows for a difference in the way the special image is displayed between the first and second predetermined performances, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-4]
174, the length of the fragment image display period is different from that of the first and second cracking effects, while the length of the display period of the character image 006SG305 displayed as the result of the first and second cracking effects may be the same. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed differently in the first and second cracking effects, which increases the interest.

[Form 14-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 140, in this embodiment, there are a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is not executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed. Since the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed than when the second continuous breaking effect is not executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second continuous breaking effect and increase interest.

[Form 14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185, the fragment images 006SG302 in the first and second consecutive breaking effects are both displayed moving without changing speed from the display start timing to the display end timing, thereby enhancing the correlation between the first and second consecutive breaking effects and increasing interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
174, a white out image 006SG303 may be displayed in common from the start timing of displaying the fragment image 006SG302, and the display pattern of the white out image 006SG303 displayed in the first consecutive cracking effect and the white out image 006SG303 displayed in the second consecutive cracking effect may be the same. In this way, the relevance between the first consecutive cracking effect and the second consecutive cracking effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be improved.

[Form 14-7-2]
In addition, since the length of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is the same for the first and second consecutive breaking effects shown in FIG. 174, the correlation between the first and second consecutive breaking effects is strengthened, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 15-1]
176 and 184, the background change performance A and the result notification performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as a result notification performance when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. And, since the time required for the broken piece image 006SG302 in the background change performance A to disappear and the time required for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear during the result notification performance when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state to disappear are different, the player can be appropriately notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Form 15-2]
Also, as shown in FIG. 176, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change presentation A takes 2500 ms to disappear, and in the result notification presentation when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, it takes 5500 ms for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear, so that the player can be properly notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Form 15-3]
Among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A, there is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) having the largest display size, and among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the result notification performance (miss), there is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) having the largest display size, and it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) has a larger display size than the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) (for example, see FIG. 159(J) and FIG. 171(D)). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed differently, which can increase interest.

[Form 15-4]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image it is superimposed on to be recognized, and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result announcement performance (miss) is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image it is superimposed on to be recognized (see Figure 186), thereby creating a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and increasing interest.

[Form 15-5]
It is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (miss) are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., Z-axis direction) in common (see, for example, Figs. 188 and 190). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in a related manner, which enhances interest.

[Form 15-6]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state (display of the glass plate image 006SG301A) and in the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the result notification performance (miss) is displayed, a whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed over the entire display screen in the first timing, and may be displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery in the second timing (see FIG. 158(G) and FIG. 171(C)). In this way, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change performance A and the result notification performance (miss), thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 16-1]
As shown in FIG. 176 and FIG. 184, the background change performance A and the result notification performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. In addition, during the crack display period in the background change performance A, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the result notification performance of the failure pattern, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the result notification performance of the failure pattern. Furthermore, the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A may continue until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, while the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the result notification performance of the failure pattern may continue until a predetermined condition such as the stop of the variable display after the result notification performance of the failure pattern is finished or the start of the next variable display is satisfied. In this way, the player can be notified that the game is not appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
When the result notification effect notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a second cracked form, and the type of background image differs between before the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form in the background change effect A and when the fragment image 006SG302 in the broken effect is displayed (see Figures 158(A) to 158(F), 159(I), and 159(K)), and the display form of the background image differs between before the result notification effect notifies whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state or not and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed when it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figures 171(A) to 171(B), and 171(D)).

In this way, it is possible to execute background change presentation A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state, which can give a surprise to the player, and further, by using the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and changing the display mode of the background image before it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state appropriately.

[Form 18-1]
The background change performance A includes a first predetermined part displaying a character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first cracked state in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a third predetermined part displaying a plurality of broken pieces images 006SG302 imitating at least a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The pseudo consecutive performance includes a fourth predetermined part displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second cracked state, and a fourth predetermined part displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second cracked state in response to the movement of the movable body 32 starting to fall. This presentation includes a fifth specified part which begins with a fifth action and a sixth specified part which displays a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 which imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the execution timing is different between the background change presentation A and the pseudo consecutive presentation. In the pseudo consecutive presentation breaking presentation, the movable body 32 begins a second action which is different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body 32 ends after the fragment images 006SG302 are no longer displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figures 158, 159 and 161).

By doing this, the background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken piece image 006SG302, and the pseudo consecutive effect can be executed at different times, so it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, by displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and then operating the movable body 32 to display the broken piece image 006SG302, it is possible to provide a powerful effect.

[Form 18-2]
In addition, for the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance shown in Fig. 176 and Fig. 178, after a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first-stage crack may be changed to a second-stage crack and displayed. In this case, the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack may be different in length from the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack. In this way, the performance effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form can be improved.

[Form 18-3-1]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see FIG. 158(G) and FIG. 161(C)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first action is a falling action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and when the movable body 32 is placed at the performance position, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 161(C)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
Also, as shown in FIG. 178, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the movable body falling period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period). Here, the fragment image display period may be longer than the movable body falling period. In this way, the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be improved.

[Form 18-4]
Also, as an effect different from the pseudo consecutive performance shown in FIG. 178, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the movable body 32 is controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body operates as a pseudo consecutive performance, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. In this way, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
As shown in Fig. 176 and Fig. 184, the background change effect A and the result notification effect in this embodiment are effects that are executed at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 184, the result notification effect of the successful pattern is an effect in which cracks are displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the rise of the movable body 32 begins during the fragment image display period, and the rise ends before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 to display cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
In addition, for the background change performance A and the result notification performance shown in Fig. 176 and Fig. 184, after a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first-stage crack may be changed to a second-stage crack and displayed. In this case, the length of the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack may be different from the length of the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the result notification performance until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack. In this way, the performance effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form can be improved.

[Form 19-3-1]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the result notification performance (jackpot) is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see Fig. 158 (G) and Fig. 169 (E)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the result notification performance (jackpot), and interest can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the performance position toward the origin position, and when the second action starts, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 169(F)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
Furthermore, with regard to the result notification display shown in FIG. 184, the movable body rising period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the fragment image display period is longer than the movable body rising period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the result notification display.

[Form 19-4]
Also, as an effect different from the result notification effect shown in FIG. 184, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state by moving the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body 32 moves as a result notification effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effect of the result notification effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 20-1]
As shown in Fig. 176 and Fig. 181, the background change performance A and the strong development performance A in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the strong development performance A is a performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is shorter than the fragment image display period in the background change performance A. Furthermore, in the strong development performance A, the movable body 32 can rise toward the upper position of the image display device 5, which is the origin position, after the fall, and the movable body 32 starts to rise after the fragment image display period ends, so that a powerful performance can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and when the first action starts, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 165(B)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in FIG. 181, in the strong development performance A, a whiteout early display period and a whiteout late display period are provided. Here, the length of the whiteout early display and the falling period of the movable body 32 (movable body falling period) may be approximately the same, and the fragment image display period may be longer than the movable body falling period. In this way, the performance effect of the strong development performance can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
Also, as a different effect from the strong development effect A shown in FIG. 181, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the movable body 32 is controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body 32 operates as the strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the strong development effect A from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
In background change performance A and background change performance B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the background image can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked state, the images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, are displayed with the first visibility. In background change performance A, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the first background image 006SG301 is displayed with the first visibility. 6SG081 is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility, and images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the specified display layer when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in background change performance B, are displayed with the second visibility over a specified range, and are displayed with the first visibility over a specific range different from the specified range (for example, the crack display area 006SG324) (see Figures 158 (E) and (F) and Figure 160 (C)).

By doing this, background change performance A and background change performance B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 in different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even performances that display the glass plate image 006SG301 in the same way can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 21-2]
The boundary between the specified range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility that is higher than the first visibility and the second visibility (see enlarged view of Figure 160 (C)), thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the background change presentation B.

[Form 21-3]
In the layer 9 image drawing area, which has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to display a first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and an active display 006SG103 (corresponding image), which are compatible with variable display, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed in a specified range and not superimposed in a specific range (see Figure 160 (C)), so that the corresponding image can be displayed preferably even while the background change performance B is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
177, the second-stage crack display period may be longer than the first-stage crack display period. In this way, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed differently between the background change performance A and the background change performance B, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 22-1]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176, the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. The crack display period in the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance may have different visibility of the background image. Furthermore, the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance may be longer than the crack display period in the background change performance A, and multiple types of crack modes may be provided in the dialogue preview performance (see FIG. 158 and FIG. 157), so that the proportion of the game being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type of second crack mode is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type of second crack mode is displayed. By doing this, the player will pay attention to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the dialogue preview performance, and even in a performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a different impression can be given in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type having the second crack form is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer is different from that when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type having the second crack form is displayed (see Figs. 158 and 157). In this way, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a different way, which can enhance interest.

[Form 22-3]
A whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color can be displayed in common for the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, and it is preferable that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 be different between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance (see, for example, Figs. 158 and 157). In this way, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be differentiated to enhance interest.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 is capable of displaying a corresponding image (e.g., a first hold display 006SG101 (second hold display) or an active display 006SG103) corresponding to a variable display in a special display layer (e.g., a layer 9 image drawing area), is capable of displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first predetermined display layer (e.g., a layer 9-1 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the special display layer, and is capable of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second predetermined display layer (e.g., a layer 4 image drawing area) having a lower priority than the special display layer, Special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) which has a higher priority than the layer, and when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first specified display layer in background change performance A, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases, and when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the second specified display layer in background change performance B, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease, and when background change performance A is executed, a change performance is not executed, and when background change performance B is executed, a change performance can be executed (see FIG. 204).

By doing this, background change performance A and background change performance B can be executed at different times, which allows the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, even in the same performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and whether or not the change performance is executed differ, so that different impressions can be given in an appropriate manner, which can increase interest in the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The change effect is an effect in which a character image 006SG305 is displayed and the character image 006SG305 performs an action that acts on the corresponding image to change the display mode of the corresponding image, and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a display layer (e.g., layer 3 image drawing area) that has a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 204). In this way, the change effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the background change effect B to a minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
In response to the operation of character image 006SG305, a change emphasis image (e.g., effect image 006SG330) can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer (see Figure 204), so that the change performance can be executed preferably even while the background change performance B is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A includes an image of a suggestive mode (e.g., fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N) that suggests that a strong S reach performance (special performance) will be executed, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A (see Figures 158, 205, and 206).

By doing this, background change performance A and strong development performance A can be executed at different times, which allows the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, the display manner of the fragment image 006SG302 differs between background change performance A and strong development performance A, and the correlation between the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development performance A and the performance executed thereafter can be increased, so that even performances in which the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (e.g., strong S reach effect J, N) and a second special effect (e.g., strong S reach effect A, B), and when the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the first special effect is executed, and the suggestive mode includes a first suggestive mode suggesting that the first special effect will be executed and a second suggestive mode suggesting that the second special effect will be executed (see Fig. 205, Fig. 206, Fig. 207). By doing so, it is possible to increase the attention level to the fragment image 006SG302 (e.g., fragment image 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N) in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-3-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A includes a suggestive mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible, and the transparent mode fragment image 006SG302 is displayed more than the suggestive mode fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 207). In this way, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and in the strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent state preferably rotates more than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestive state (see FIG. 207). By doing so, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development performance A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a suggestive mode are displayed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the first predetermined part, and in which a single fragment image 006SG302 in a suggestive mode is displayed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the second predetermined part (see FIG. 206). In this way, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form 25]
In addition, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 183 is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is made invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is made transparent, and further, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is ended, thereby making it visible. The period during which the operation prompting effect is executed before the cut-in effect is longer than the early whiteout display period during which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is invisible in the cut-in effect, so that the operation prompting effect builds up to the broken effect, and a sense of speed is created during the fragment image display period, thereby realizing an ideal broken pattern.

[Form 26]
183, the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is made invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is made transparent, and further, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is terminated, so that the glass plate image 006SG301A can be made visible. The fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the operation prompting effect execution period. In this way, the crack pattern can be impressed.

[Form 27]
As shown in Fig. 174 to Fig. 184, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, at least a part of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is a period shorter than the fragment image display period. In addition, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period and a late whiteout display period. In addition, the late whiteout display period may be a period longer than the early whiteout display period. In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 conceals the beginning of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, while preventing the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 28]
As shown in FIG. 174 to FIG. 184, in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 starts to crack, and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed is hidden from the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden on the condition that a predetermined time has passed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable due to the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 29]
174 to 184, in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 in the early whiteout display period and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed are hidden from the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303, and the fragment image 006SG302 can be seen by the player in the later whiteout display period in which the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is increased. Therefore, in the later whiteout display period, the effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that has been moved and displayed after a sufficient amount of time has passed since the start of display can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
In the background change performance A and the weak development performance shown in Fig. 176 and Fig. 180, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts from the execution timing of the crack performance, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be moved. Here, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the whiteout display later period in the background change performance A and the whiteout display later period in the weak development performance. In this way, the performance effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the weak development performance can be improved.

[Form 31]
In addition, in the background change performance A and the weak development performance shown in FIG. 176 and FIG. 180, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts from the execution timing of the crack performance, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be moved. Here, the background change performance A may be a performance that can be executed when the game state is in the normal state, and the weak development performance may be a performance that can be executed when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state. Furthermore, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the whiteout display later period in the background change performance A and the whiteout display later period in the weak development performance. In this way, the performance effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the weak development performance can be improved.

[Form 32]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 174 to 184, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 using a light emission data table for the break effect over the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and from the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 using a light emission data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so that the light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks can be performed appropriately.

[Form 33]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 174 to 184, in the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least partially, and the speakers 8L, 8R output the breaking effect sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 from the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 34]
As shown in FIG. 174 to FIG. 184, the performance patterns (crack patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the crack performance in the first continuous crack performance, the second continuous crack performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, and the result notification performance include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed once and then the glass plate breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate breaks without being displayed. Here, whether or not a sound corresponding to the crack performance (a sound corresponding to the fragment image 006SG302 being displayed) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R may differ depending on whether or not the crack performance is performed in the first pattern and in the second pattern. In this way, it is possible to provide different impression patterns in each crack performance.

[Form 35]
As shown in FIG. 174 to FIG. 184, the performance patterns (the cracking patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking performance in the first continuous cracking performance, the second continuous cracking performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, and the result notification performance include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed once and then the glass plate breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate breaks without being displayed. Here, when the cracking performance of the result notification performance of the successful pattern can be actually executed in the second pattern, a sound corresponding to being controlled to a jackpot game state may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the cracking performance of the result notification performance of the successful pattern. In this way, it is possible to provide a pattern of the cracking performance with a different impression depending on the state.

[Form 36]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, when the breaking effect is executed in the above-mentioned first pattern, a breaking effect sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in response to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are images replacing the glass plate image 006SG301, whereas when the breaking effect is executed in the above-mentioned second pattern, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and the breaking effect sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in response to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, it is possible to provide breaking patterns with different impressions.

[Form 37]
As for the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect shown in Fig. 174 to Fig. 184, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a sound effect (cracked sound effect) corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be output at a volume louder than the sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. In this way, a difference is created between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the cracking pattern is impressed.

[Form 38]
As shown in Fig. 201, as the cracking effect in the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a character voice can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R as a sound corresponding to the displayed character, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a cracking effect sound can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R as a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, a difference is created between when a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the cracking pattern is impressed.

[Form 39]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B and G). In the first pattern, the amount of fluctuation is a specific value (e.g., "30%), so that the movement speed of a first-sized fragment image 006SG302 in the first pattern is different from that of a second-sized fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the first size. In the second pattern, the amount of fluctuation is 0 (e.g., "0%), so that the movement speed of a third-sized fragment image 006SG302 in the second pattern is the same as that of a fourth-sized fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the third size (see Figures 186 and 187).

In this way, the first pattern is affected by the animation differently depending on the size, with small fragment images 006SG302 flying quickly and large fragment images 006SG302 being slightly slower and falling quickly, making it possible to use this cracking pattern when you want to show realistic movement, while the second pattern is affected by the animation in the same way for all fragments regardless of size, causing them to fly and fall in the same way, making it possible to select the appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts, and there are a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A and C) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns D to F) as display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302, and by setting different gravity values between the first pattern and the second pattern, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls differs (see Figs. 186 and 187). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be constructed, which increases interest.

[Form 41]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns B, G), and the direction of gravity is set differently between the first and second patterns, so that the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves when displayed is different (see Figs. 186 and 187). In this way, by changing the parameters and changing the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, a variety of patterns can be constructed, improving interest.

[Form 42]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern B), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern C), and for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" common to the fragment pattern A, the second parameter of "strength" is "5" for the fragment pattern A, "3" for the fragment pattern B, and "7" for the fragment pattern C (see Figs. 186 and 187). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302 while varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

[Form 43]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., a crack pattern E), a second pattern (e.g., a crack pattern F), and a third pattern (e.g., a crack pattern G). For example, the first parameter of "gravity" of the crack pattern E (first pattern) and the second pattern of "strength" of the crack pattern E (second pattern) are common to the crack pattern E (first pattern) and the crack pattern F (second pattern), and the second parameter of "strength" of the crack pattern F (second pattern) and the crack pattern G (third pattern) are common to the crack pattern E (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern), and the first parameter of "gravity" of the crack pattern E (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern) are common to the crack pattern E (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern), and the second parameter of "strength" of the crack pattern F (second pattern) are common to the crack pattern E (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern) (see FIG. 186 and FIG. 187). In this way, by creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302 while being configured with different parameters, a stable and diverse display pattern of the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

[Form 44]
As the display pattern of the cracked image (e.g., the fragment image 006SG302), there are a first pattern (e.g., the cracked pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., the cracked pattern A). The cracked image by the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state, and the cracked image by the second pattern can be displayed in a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state. Before the cracked image by the first pattern is displayed, and after the cracked image by the first pattern is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different. Before the cracked image by the second pattern is displayed, and after the cracked image by the second pattern is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is preferably different (e.g., see FIG. 158 and FIG. 159). By doing so, when the cracked patterns A to G are used in the normal state and when the cracked patterns A to G are used in the special state, different impressions are given, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form 45]
The background change performance A is a performance including changing a cracked image (e.g., a fragment image 006SG302) to a second mode after displaying the cracked image in a first mode, and the image display device 5 displays an effect image (e.g., a whiteout image 006SG303) when displaying the cracked image in the first mode in both the normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability-changing state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, and makes the effect image non-displayable at the timing before displaying the cracked image in the second mode (e.g., see Figs. 158 and 159). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an awkward feeling.

[Form 46]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may be displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction in common. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may move at different speeds. In this way, the effect of the performance during the time-saving state or the probability-changing state can be enhanced by a cracking pattern that does not disrupt the tempo of the time-saving state or the probability-changing state.

[Form 47]
As shown in Figures 174 to 184, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, and the proportion of the state controlled to the big win game state may be made different when the first pattern of the cracking effect is executed and when the second pattern of the cracking effect is executed. In this way, the proportion of the state controlled to the big win game state differs depending on the cracking pattern, so that the cracking pattern can be more noticeable.

[Form 48]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer, and a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the specific display layer. In the specific display layer, special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed, the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 at least partially overlap, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is in a form in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is in a transparent form in which at least a part of a background image displayed in a display layer lower than the specific display layer can be recognized (see FIG. 207). In this way, by displaying the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 having different display forms overlapping each other, a memorable performance can be provided.

[Form 49]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer, and a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer. In the image drawing area, special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed, the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 at least partially overlap, the display modes of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are different, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 207). In this way, by displaying the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 having different display modes in an overlapping manner, a memorable presentation can be provided.

[Form 50]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information (e.g., small patterns) related to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer, the movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area where the movable body 32 does not overlap, are displayed in a larger amount than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps (see FIG. 207). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed appropriately while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form 51]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., a layer 5-1 image drawing area or a layer 5-1 image drawing area), and special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., a layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer. The movable body 32 can perform an operation of being superimposed on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the movement of the movable body 32 can be controlled by the user. The production period and the production period overlap at least partially, and a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner moving from a first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap to a second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps, and a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner moving in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2 (see FIG. 207). In this way, a dynamic performance can be provided by providing the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the area where the movable body 32 overlaps, while allowing the viewer to recognize that the movable body 32 has broken.

[Form 52]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information (e.g., small patterns) related to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer, and the movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 at least partially overlap, and the fragment image 006SG302 continues to be displayed even after the movable body 32 superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 moves to a position where it is not superimposed on the display screen (see FIG. 207). In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed suitably while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the fragment image 006SG302 is not overlooked.

[Form 53]
In the reach suggestion performance, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the image display device 5 can display a plurality of second type of fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302A), and the second type of fragment images 006SG302 take a shorter time to disappear from the display screen than the first type of fragment images 006SG302 (see Figs. 162 and 163). In this way, the performance effect of the performance using the crack pattern A can be improved.

[Form 54]
There are a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern E) as display patterns for a broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern, and the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 158, 159, 162 to 164). By doing this, a specific character (e.g., character image 006SG305) appears in common to multiple cracking patterns, thereby increasing the attention paid to the specific character.

[Form 55]
There are a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern E) as display patterns of a broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. When displaying a broken image according to the first pattern, the image display device 5 displays a When a cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of the character image 006SG305, and the effect image (e.g., the whiteout image 006SG303) is made non-displayable at a specific timing after the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figs. 158, 159, 162 to 164). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing the fragment image 006SG302 from giving an uncomfortable feeling.

[Form 56]
There are a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern E) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) as display patterns of a broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of broken images of a first type are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of broken images of a second type are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it moves at a speed that changes from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302. The second type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it moves without changing speed over the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 162, 163, 158, and 159). By doing this, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed depending on the type of crack pattern, enhancing the presentation effect.

[Form 57]
As the display pattern of the broken image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), there are a first pattern (for example, a broken pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, a broken pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. When a broken image is displayed by the first pattern, the expectation level controlled to the big win state is different from when a broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIG. 158, FIG. 159, FIG. 162, FIG. 163). In this way, the expectation for the character image 006SG305 is increased, and interest is increased by focusing on the type of the broken pattern after the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the speed of the fragment image 006SG302 after the whiteout display pre-period of each effect is all constant (V1 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, result notification effect, and V0 for the strong development effect B and cut-in effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a first variant example, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may have different progression speeds (display speeds) in the left-right direction (also referred to as the X-axis direction), up-down direction (also referred to as the Y-axis direction) and forward direction (Z-axis direction) toward the player in the display area of the image display device 5.
The degrees may be different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 197(A), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect may include a fragment image 006SG302A moving at a speed Vx1 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction, a fragment image 006SG302B moving at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction, and a fragment image 006SG302C moving at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed Vz1 in the Z-axis direction, as well as a fragment image 006SG302 moving in two of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and a fragment image 006SG302 moving in three directions.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 197(B), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effects of the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect may include fragment images 006SG302A moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of Vx2, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction, fragment images 006SG302B moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of 0, Vy2 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction, and fragment images 006SG302C moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of 0, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz2 in the Z-axis direction, as well as fragment images 006SG302 moving in two of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 moving in three directions.

Note that moving the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means that the fragment image 006SG302 is enlarged and displayed, so the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the Z-axis direction is also referred to as the enlargement display speed.

Comparing fragment image 006SG302A, which progresses only in the X-axis direction, fragment image 006SG302B, which progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in each performance, as shown in FIG. 197 (C), in this variant example 1, fragment image 006SG302C is simply enlarged and displayed toward the player, unlike fragment image 006SG302A and fragment image 006SG302B, and therefore the period from the start of display to the end of display is set longer than fragment image 006SG302A and fragment image 006SG302B. In other words, in the cracking effect of each effect, the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C is displayed, which creates a sense of three-dimensionality for the player, and the fragment image 006SG302A continues to create a sense of three-dimensionality even after the display of fragment image 006SG302B has ended, enhancing the presentation effect when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 197 (D), the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect are grouped as effect group X, and the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the cut-in effect are grouped as effect group Y, and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the break effect of effect group X and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the break effect of effect group Y are In comparison, in this variant example 1, the Z-axis direction progression speed Vz1 of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group X is set to be faster than the Z-axis direction progression speed Vz2 of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group Y (Vz1 > Vz2), and by doing so, the period from display start to display end of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group Y is set to be longer than the period from display start to display end of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group X. For this reason, in this variant example 1, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect can be executed at different times as background change effect A and strong development effect B, so that the player can be drawn to these effects at various times and be surprised. Furthermore, because the period required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear differs between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, even when the same break effect is executed and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, different impressions can be given to the player depending on the effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this variant example 1, the effects included in effect group Y are set to have a longer period of time required for the fragment image 006SG302C to be hidden than the effects included in effect group X, so that when a cracked effect is executed as an effect included in effect group Y, the effect of the display of the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced more than when a cracked effect is executed as an effect included in effect group X.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the fragment images 006SG302 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are illustrated as fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed and move toward the player (enlarged display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed and move toward the player (enlarged display) may change in visibility by being enlarged from the display start timing to the display end timing. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this modified example 1, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction, as shown in Figure 197 (C), the fragment image 006SG302C progresses from the start of display Although an example has been given in which the period from the start of display to the end of display is set longer than for fragment image 006SG302A or fragment image 006SG302B, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific performance (for example, a cut-in performance), may be longer than the period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment images 006SG302A and B, which move only in the X-axis direction or Y-axis direction in a predetermined performance (for example, a pseudo-consecutive performance) that is different from the specific performance. In this way, the display mode of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the specific performance and the predetermined performance (cut-in performance and pseudo-consecutive performance in the above example) can be made different, thereby increasing the interest of these specific performance and predetermined performance.

In addition, in the above embodiment and this modified example 1, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving the display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, the pseudo consecutive effect and the background change effect A) may be displayed. As for the images 006SG302, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are made invisible by moving them completely outside the display area of the image display device 5, and as for the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a specific effect (for example, strong development effect B or cut-in effect), some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be made invisible by moving them completely outside the display area of the image display device 5, while other fragment images 006SG302 may be made invisible while moving outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, a difference can be made in the display mode of the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a specific effect and in a specific effect, increasing the interest of these specific effects and the predetermined effects.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as each of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect is moved in multiple directions along the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive break effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the second consecutive break effect may start from different positions. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed differently between the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect, which can increase interest.

(Variation 2)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301A is broken to display multiple fragment images 006SG302 as the broken effect of each effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the broken effect of each effect may differ depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 198(A), the early whiteout display period from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks to the time when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed is set to a length L1, and the late whiteout display period, which is a period following the early whiteout display period and in which the whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than that in the early whiteout display period, is displayed, is set to a length L2 (L2>L1).

The fragment image display period is composed of a first fragment image display period of length L3 (L3>L1+L2), which is a period from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and is longer than the combined period of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, and a second fragment image display period of length L4 (L3+L4>L1+L2), which is a period continuous with the first fragment image display period.

Here, as shown in FIG. 198 (B), during the second fragment image display period, a greater number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed than during the first fragment image display period, thereby increasing the gaming interest of the broken effect. Furthermore, in this variant example 2, during the first fragment image display period that overlaps with the early whiteout display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 because of the whiteout image 006SG303, whereas during the period that overlaps with the late whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. Since the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is longer than the total length (L1 + L2) of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, during the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is made invisible to the player, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about the broken effect due to the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and during the late whiteout display period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the broken effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect have transparency, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the pseudo consecutive effects and the weak development effect do not have transparency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effects, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect may all have transparency, or may not all have transparency.

(Variation 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 199 as modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect changes according to the progress of the effect (in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the display timing of the fragment image 006SG302). It is also possible to set the time T1 (T1>0) at the end of the whiteout display first period, the time T2 (T2>T1) at the end of the whiteout display second period, and the time T3 (T3>T2) at the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so, for example, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is sufficiently scattered over the display area of the image display device 5 just before the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302.

In particular, in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, so the player can easily see the image displayed as the result of the broken effect through the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents a decrease in the effect of the effect from being caused by the image displayed as the result of the broken effect being blocked by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this modification example 3, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect has an increased transparency as the effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect may have a decreased transparency as the effect progresses.

(Variation 4)
Furthermore, in the modified example 3, as the breaking effects of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 4, as shown in FIG. 200(A) and FIG. 200(B), The transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on whether the displayed effect is a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect, and even if it is the same effect, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on the game status (Figure 200 shows an example of the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 in a background change effect A and a weak development effect).

As shown in FIG. 200, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as a broken effect and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, the whiteout display period ends and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Here, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the background change effect A's cracked effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the weak development effect's cracked effect have different transmittances when visible to the player, so even if both effects involve the glass plate image 006SG301A being cracked, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the background change effect A's cracked effect, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the weak development effect's cracked effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 200, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the background change effect A when executed in the normal state with the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the weak development effect when executed in the time-saving state or the probability change state, 302 have different transmittances when visible to the player, so even if both have effects in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effects, and this can enhance the effect of the effects when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a break effect of the background change effect A in the normal state, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a break effect of the weak development effect in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

(Variation 5)
In the above embodiment, as a result of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, a cracking performance is executed as a performance within the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, a sound (for example, a character voice) corresponding to the displayed character may be output. In this way, it is possible to add a difference between when a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 201 as a modified example 5, in the case where a character voice corresponding to the character is output when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, the character voice and the cracking sound may be output at the same volume (Vol 1 in the example of FIG. 201) so that at least a part of the output period of the character voice and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

In addition, in this variant 5, as shown in FIG. 201, the cracking sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed may be output at a louder volume (Vol 2 in the example of FIG. 201) than the cracking sound output when a crack is displayed. By doing this, it is possible to add contrast to the cracking effect when a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and furthermore, it is possible to impress on the player that the cracking effect is executed as the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, i.e., that these background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect have been executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of these cracking effects.

(Variation 6)
In the above embodiment, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is moved and displayed until the end of the display as the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the breaking effect of these effects may be displayed in a rotating manner in addition to being moved during the period from the start of display to the end of display. Furthermore, the number of rotations of the fragment image 006SG302 from the start of display to the end of display may differ depending on which effect is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 202 as variant example 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the dialogue preview effect rotates R3 times from the start of display to the end of display, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A rotates R2 times (R3>2) from the start of display to the end of display, which is less than R3, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect rotates R1 times (R2>R1) from the start of display to the end of display, which is less than R2.

In this way, in this variant example 6, even if the timing that may be executed during the variable display is different, by having the same number of rotations from the start to the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302, the correlation within each combination of effects is increased, such as the combination of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, and the dialogue preview effect, the combination of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, and the combination of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect, and the like, thereby enhancing the presentation effect within these combinations of effects.

Also, as mentioned above, in this variant 6, the number of rotations from the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of display varies depending on which type of break effect it is, and in particular, for example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a pseudo consecutive break effect has a greater number of rotations from the start of displaying to the end of display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cut-in effect break effect, so that it is possible to increase the variety of break effects executed as the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, and the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

In this modified example 6, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are rotated, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the rotation of the fragment images 006SG302, when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a first rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment images 006SG302, and when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a second rotation angle, the player can not see at least a part of the background image through the fragment images 006SG302. By doing so, the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be enhanced. Furthermore, in the case where the transparency of the fragment images 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment images 006SG302 as described above, rather than rotating all of the fragment images 006SG302 in synchronization, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be rotated at an angle different from that of the other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when one fragment image 006SG302 is rotated at the first rotation angle, some of the other fragment images 006SG302 are rotated at the second rotation angle, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Variation 7)
In addition, as the pseudo consecutive performance of the above embodiment, a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5, and then a crack performance is executed according to the movement of the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Fig. 203 (A) as a modified example 7, the pseudo consecutive performance may be such that a crack is displayed as a crack display period after a pre-stage operation period in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the movable body 32 falls. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 203 (B), the crack display period may be composed of a crack pre-stage display period and a crack post-stage display period, as in the background change performance A of the above embodiment, so that the crack is displayed in two stages and then the crack performance is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 203(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo consecutive performance may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change performance A of the above embodiment. By doing this, even though the background change performance A of the above embodiment and the pseudo consecutive performance of this modification example 7 both have two stages of cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, by making the period until the second stage of cracks is displayed different between the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, it is possible to increase the number of performance patterns until the crack performance is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect when cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301.

Furthermore, in this modified example 7, the pseudo consecutive performance is exemplified as a performance in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the action of the character or the movement of the movable body 32 operates, as in the background change performance A in the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach suggestion performance may be a performance in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the action of the character or the movement of the movable body 32 operates, as in the background change performance A in the above embodiment. Even in this case, the crack display period in the reach suggestion performance may be composed of a preliminary crack display period and a latter crack display period, and the length of the preliminary crack display period in the reach suggestion performance may be different from the preliminary crack display period of the background change performance A in the above embodiment. By doing this, even though the background change performance A of the above embodiment and the reach suggestion performance of this variant example 7 both have two stages of cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, by differentiating the period until the second stage of cracks appears in the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the number of performance patterns until the cracking performance is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect when cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301.

(Variation 8)
In the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A as crack precursor images are displayed in a layer 4 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image and the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed not only in the layer 4 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, but also in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U.

For example, in this modified example 8, as shown in Figs. 204 (A1) to (A5), in background change performance A, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. Also, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking action toward the front, cracks are displayed to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that after the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state (see Fig. 204 (A2)), when the crack gradually spreads radially and changes to a crack state, a part of the crack can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U (see Fig. 204 (A3)).

When a part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U in this way, if the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or the active display 006SG103 is displayed, there is a risk that the visibility of the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or the active display 006SG103 will decrease. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect in which the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes is restricted, so the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 204 (B1) to (B5), in the background change performance B, as explained in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. Also, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right corner of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Fig. 204 (B1)), and then, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 starting to descend, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, causing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 to change stepwise (see Fig. 204 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area, which is lower than the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U, even if the crack extends and is displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U, the crack will not be displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U.

In addition, even if the character image 006SG305 is displayed moving across the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U without the character image 006SG305 being displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U (see FIG. 204 (B3)). After that, the active change performance is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see FIG. 204 (B4)).

In this way, the background change effect A, which may reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, has an execution period overlapping with the active change effect (action effect by a changed character), so the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is restricted, while the background change effect B, which does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, allows the execution of an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103, so that even though the effect similarly displays a crack precursor image, the difference is in the display layer and whether or not the active change effect is executed, giving a different impression and increasing interest in the game. The target of the change effect may be the first reserved display 006SG101 or the second reserved display.

In addition, in background change performance A, a part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap with the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, reducing the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. However, if the display state of the reserved display or active display changes in such a situation, it becomes difficult to tell whether the change has occurred due to the change performance or the crack state, which causes distrust among the player. Therefore, it is preferable to be able to execute the change performance in background change performance B, in which the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is not reduced even when the crack state occurs.

In addition, in this variant 8, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in the background change performance A, the execution of the active change performance is restricted, but for example, after that, the crack performance is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 scatters, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is hidden, and then the active change performance can be executed, that is, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation or during a reach). Also, the active change performance may be executed in a simplified form (for example, a mode in which a changed character is not displayed and the active display mode is casually changed at the timing of FIG. 204 (A3)). In this way, by performing the change performance during a period that does not overlap with the period in which the active display is difficult to see due to the crack performance, the performance effects of both the crack performance and the change performance can be enhanced.

(Variation 9)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which when a strong development effect A is executed, it is determined that the effect will develop into a strong S reach effect A; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect may include fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc., in a suggestive manner that suggests that one of multiple types of strong S reach effects A, B, J, N with different degrees of expectation will be executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 205 (A) to (F), when a crack effect is executed in the strong development effect A, and after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends and before the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends and becomes invisible, a fragment image 006SG342M indicating that a strong S reach effect A or a strong S reach effect B will be executed, a fragment image 006SG342J indicating that a strong S reach effect J will be executed, a fragment image 006SG342N indicating that a strong S reach effect N will be executed, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see Figure 205 (G)).

And, among the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, if the fragment image 006SG342M is displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent state are displayed, it is notified that a strong S reach performance A or a strong S reach performance B will be executed (see Figs. 206 (A1), (A2), and (A2')), and the fragment image 006SG342J is displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG If fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that a strong S reach effect J will be executed (see Figs. 206 (B1) and (B2)), and if a single fragment image 006SG342N is displayed but the other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that a strong S reach effect N will be executed (see Figs. 206 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing this, it is possible to increase the correlation between the fragment image in the strong development performance A and the strong S reach performance that is executed afterwards, so that even if the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, it gives a suitably different impression and increases interest in the game.

In this modified example, the type of strong S reach performance to be executed is suggested by non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, which display the faces of the types of characters that appear in various strong S reach performances. However, the suggestion is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways as long as the fragment image is in a form that can identify the type of strong S reach performance to be executed. For example, the fragment image may display related information such as the reach title name or background image that can identify the type of strong S reach performance.

The type that has been decided to be executed is indicated by displaying one of the multiple fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N while the others are not displayed, but it may be indicated by, for example, displaying one of the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N larger, in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Also, the strong S reach performance may be executed ultimately while two or more fragment images are displayed.

(Variation 10)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in one layer 5 image drawing area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the images may be displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas.

For example, in this modified example 10, as shown in FIG. 207, of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the breaking pattern F used in the strong development performance A, the large fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent manner in the layer 5-1 image drawing area, and the small fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a non-transparent manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area that is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. In this case, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a break precursor image is displayed in both the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the time of breakage. Note that one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach performance depicted, as explained in modified example 9.

In this way, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has a character drawn on it, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area has a transparent aspect that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 5-2 image drawing area. In this way, the display periods of two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display aspects are overlapped to provide a memorable presentation.

As shown in FIG. 207(B), the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area are composed of a first display area L1 that does not overlap the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, and a second display area L2 that is surrounded by a two-dot chain line indicating the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 has a larger display amount than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed preferably while the movable body 32 overlaps with the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves from the first display area L1 to enter the second display area L2, while a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. In this way, a fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the second display area L2 makes the viewer aware that the image has broken, while a fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the first display area L1 is provided, providing a dynamic presentation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301 that imitates a glass plate is applied as an example of a crack precursor image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a crack precursor image that imitates an object other than glass, such as a panel, door, or rock, may also be applied. In addition, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, it may be displayed with a transmittance of 100% or less than 100%. In addition, the crack precursor image may be displayed in multiple layer image drawing areas so that the crack presentation can be performed individually.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as an example of a fragment image, a glass fragment image 006SG302 that imitates a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a fragment image that imitates an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed in part. In addition, although the fragment image is displayed on a display layer higher than the crack precursor image, it may be displayed on a display layer lower than the crack precursor image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, cracking patterns A to G were set as the cracking patterns in the cracking effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a cracking effect based on a cracking pattern of a type other than the above.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a cracking effect can be executed during the execution of an effect such as a preview effect that indicates the expected probability of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effect may be executed separately from other effects other than the preview effect. In this case, the expected probability of a jackpot may be made different depending on the state of the cracking pattern, so that the cracking effect may be executed as one of the preview effects, or may be executed as a change effect when the performance stage, performance mode, or game state changes.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as the crack precursor image is cracked when some kind of impact (force) is applied from behind to approximately the center of the image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack may be initiated when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the front to a specified position on the crack precursor image. The force may also be applied to multiple points on the crack precursor image at a specified timing or at multiple timings.

In addition, in the above embodiment, depending on the type of preview performance, there is an example in which the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a cracked state and then the cracking starts, and there is also an example in which the cracking starts suddenly without changing to a cracked state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the type of preview performance, all cracking performances may start after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a cracked state, or all cracking performances may start suddenly without changing to a cracked state.

In the above embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the object images (characters, etc.), decorative patterns, and background images displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and are displayed with the second visibility lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the various images displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed with the first visibility without reducing the visibility, and the cracks may be displayed so as to stand out, for example, by displaying a colored effect image or the like in the part representing the crack.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the character image 006SG305 is mainly used as an example of an object image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of character may be a type other than the above. Also, various changes can be made to the object image, such as a person, an object such as an iron ball or a rock, or a target, instead of a character.

In the above embodiment, the cracking effect is exemplified in the following cases: the cracking effect starts according to the movement of the object image, the cracking effect starts according to the movement of the movable body 32, and the cracking effect starts regardless of the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In all the effects, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of the object image, or in all the effects, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of the movable body 32, or in all the effects, the cracking effect may start regardless of the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. In addition, the movable body 32 as a logo role object is applied as an example of a movable body, but a board-side movable body provided in another location on the game board 2 may be applied, or a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 other than the game board 2 may be applied. Furthermore, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of a movable body such as the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the cracking of the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% is displayed as an effect image on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 in the period immediately after the start of the cracking effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to display the whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the cracking effect to make it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which the fragment image 006SG302 is made difficult to see at the start of the cracking effect by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% in a display layer above the glass plate image 006SG301, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased at the start of the cracking effect, in other words, the fragment image 006SG302 may be faded in to make it difficult to see at the start of the cracking effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying a crack is drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area as an image that will actually break (change into a fragment image 006SG302). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to draw and place a glass plate image 006SG301 in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 as an image of the glass plate image 006SG301 broken in the layer 5 image drawing area, without drawing and placing the glass plate image 006SG301A.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying in the cracked state may be different from the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying in the cracked state. For example, by making the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying in the cracked state higher than the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying in the cracked state (making the glass plate image 006SG301 a non-transparent image), the timing at which the cracks are displayed and the timing at which the cracking effect is executed can be made easier to understand than in the above embodiment.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked state in the layer 5 image drawing area is started at the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state in the layer 4 image drawing area is made invisible, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display times of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state and the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked state may at least partially overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state is exemplified as a crack precursor image in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image may be an image other than the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state, so long as it is an image that suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 will crack.

In addition, in the above embodiment, examples of the breaking effects of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect are given in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick (see Figure 158), a hammer (see Figure 162), a punch (see Figure 164), etc., thereby breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a form in which the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 to break the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect, in addition to or instead of the kick, hammer, punch, etc. described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be broken by the action of a slash with a sword or the like. In particular, as background change effects in this embodiment, in addition to background change effect A in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick to break the glass plate image 006SG301A (breaking due to the impact of the kick), and background change effect B in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without the action of the character or the movable body 32 (see FIG. 143), background change effect C in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a sword to break the glass plate image 006SG301A (breaking due to a sword slash) can be executed, as described above, and the proportion of the big win game state controlled may be changed depending on whether the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 or the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of glass plate 006SG301A breaking effect patterns that can be executed as a breaking effect, and to further increase the player's attention to the breaking effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was exemplified in which a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to display the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 (the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A starts to break). This increases the sense of speed from when the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed until the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, providing a powerful and memorable effect of the breakage.

Furthermore, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as a cracked effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 itself may be displayed as cracked. By doing this, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 when the cracked effect is executed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B. In particular, if a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B in this manner, a part of the background image that was displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until immediately before the execution of the cracking effect may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the above embodiment, examples have been given of forms in which the breaking effects can be executed as a first consecutive breaking effect, a second consecutive breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the breaking effects may be executed as effects other than these first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect. For example, during the variable display, after it has been notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage for the player (for example, a non-variable jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot game state of variable jackpot C with two rounds), or in the jackpot game state after the variable display ends, a promotion effect may be executed to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state with a high advantage for the player (for example, a jackpot game state of variable jackpot A with 10 rounds that is controlled to a variable state after the jackpot game ends), or a break effect may be executed as a revival effect to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state after it has been notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state during the variable display.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when performing the cracking effects as the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the character or the movable body 32 acts, the crack is displayed, etc., and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as these cracking effects, there may be cases where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked without the character or the movable body 32 acting, or the crack is displayed. In this way, the execution of the cracking effect can give the player a sense of surprise, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are exemplified as being formed by breaking the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and these breaking effects may also be formed by breaking images other than the glass plate image 006SG301 or the glass plate image 006SG301A (for example, the operation prompt image 006SG310 for the dialogue preview effect or the cut-in effect).

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was exemplified in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and at least a part of the background image are temporarily made invisible to the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 as an image above the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a break effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed as an image between the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as the background change effect A and the breaking effect of the reach suggestion effect, a form in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back side to the front side of the display area of the image display device 5 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as these breaking effects, the image of the character may be drawn and positioned in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figures 116 and 117), so that the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front side to the back side of the display area of the image display device 5.

In the above embodiment, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a normal flat image in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of a break effect in an effect that suggests that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed as a 3D image that can be viewed stereoscopically. In this way, when the strong development effect and the cut-in effect are executed, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as the break effect allows the player to recognize that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effects of the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be made different between the cracking effects in effects such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, which, by being executed, suggest that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, and the cracking effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. By doing this, for example, the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a strong development effect or a cut-in effect can be made slower than the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, or a result notification effect, so that when a strong development effect or a cut-in effect is being executed, the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 can make the player recognize that there is a high probability that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 172 and 173, a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for the cracking effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, while a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for the cracking effects of the pseudo consecutive break effect and the weak development effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may be differentiated between the cracking effects in effects such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, which suggest that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, and the cracking effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. In this way, the player can recognize whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state based on the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed when the crack effect is executed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine was used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, and assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot game state in which game balls can enter the jackpot winning port and more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the start winning port or the general winning port 10 is considered to be an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability-change state may be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the winning port than in a normal state or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot game state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. A gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state in which a player can play a predetermined number of rounds of games advantageous to the player by executing a variable display,
A movable body,
A performance control means;
A movable body control means,
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control can be performed to operate the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance operation control in which the movable body is operated by an operation for informing that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing an ending effect after a final round of play is completed,
The movable body control means
If no power interruption occurs during the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means, the performance operation control for operating the movable body during the execution of the ending performance is not performed;
When a power outage occurs during the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control ends before the execution period of the ending performance ends,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect for encouraging a player to perform an action during a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action promotion performance is notified.
The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a computer-implemented ...
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variable display before the start of a variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the power is then turned on, the movable body can be controlled so that the confirmation operation control is performed with the second operation control pattern during the execution of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern, and the confirmation operation control is ended before the start of the second part,
The confirmation operation control can be executed when the action prompting performance is executed,
A predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed.
The predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image after displaying the crack precursor image,
As a background image after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance, any one of a plurality of background images including a first background image and a second background image suggesting a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first background image can be displayed;
Before displaying the fragment image in the predetermined performance, the object image in any one of a plurality of object images may be displayed;
According to the aspect of the object image, it is possible to suggest which background image will be displayed after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images